7876 Construction Specification Rev G (Without Section 18) - 8.27.2013

FRIEDE AND GOLDMAN LTD
J U-2000E J ack-Up Drilling Unit

Based on 7811 Rev. 0 Rev G

J U-2000E
CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS

F&G Job Number 7876
Hull Number GK002



DOCUMENT REVISION HISTORY

Revision Description By Date

A Initial Issue F&G April, 2013
B VSP Commented VSP May, 2013
C F&G Updated per VSP comments F&G J uly, 2013
D VSP Commented VSP J une 2013
E F&G Updated per VSP comments F&G Aug. 2013
F VSP Commented VSP Aug. 2013
G F&G / VSP Finalized F&G Aug. 2013



Table of Contents
Section
1.0 CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS
2.0 STEEL STRUCTURES
3.0 HULL FITTINGS
4.0 INSULATION, J OINER WORKANDDECK COVERING
5.0 FURNISHINGS
6.0 LEGS, STRUCTURE, SUPPORTS, J ACKS AND HANDLING
7.0 SAFETY EQUIPMENT
8.0 PAINTING AND MARKING
9.0 DECK MACHINERY
10.0 HAVC SYSTEMS
11.0 REFRIGERATION
12.0 MAINAND AUXILIARY MACHINERY
13.0 REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPIG SYSTEMS
14.0 PIPING SYSTEMS
15.0 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
16.0 TRIALS AND TESTS
17.0 DRILLING SYSTEMS
18.0 EQUIPMENT LIST

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD.
MODIFIED 7811 REV.0

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 1.0 GENERAL PROVISIONS ...................................................................................................................... 2
1.1 INTENT OF DOCUMENTS ................................................................................................................... 2
1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................................... 2
1.3 DEFINITIONS ......................................................................................................................................... 2
1.4 CLASSIFICATION, RULES, REGULATIONS AND CERTIFICATES ............................................. 3
1.5 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA AND DESIGN CONDITIONS ............................................................. 7
1.6 STABILITY REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................................................... 11
1.7 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP ............................................................................................... 11
1.8 CONTRACT PLANS ............................................................................................................................ 11
1.9 BUILDERS DRAWINGS .................................................................................................................... 15
1.10 DRAWING APPROVAL ...................................................................................................................... 15
1.11 AS BUILT DRAWINGS ................................................................................................................... 16
1.12 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS ........................................................................... 16
1.13 PROGRESS SCHEDULE ..................................................................................................................... 16
1.14 WEIGHT AND CENTER OF GRAVITY ............................................................................................ 17
1.15 PHOTOGRAPHS .................................................................................................................................. 17
1.16 INSPECTION ........................................................................................................................................ 18
1.17 SOURCE OF EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................................. 18
1.18 SUBSTITUTIONS ................................................................................................................................ 19
1.19 TRIALS, TESTING AND CLEANING ............................................................................................... 19
1.20 SPECIFICATION AND PLAN OWNERSHIP .................................................................................... 19
1.21 OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT (OFE) ..................................................................................... 20
1.22 CONSTRUCTION PORTFOLIO ......................................................................................................... 20
1.22 NOISE AND VIBRATION ................................................................................................................... 20
MODIFIED 7811 REV.0

Friede & Goldman, Ltd., Houston, TX USA Rev. G 2
SECTION 1.0 GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.1 INTENT OF DOCUMENTS

It is the intent of this Specification, its Appendices, and the Contract Plans referenced below to provide for the
construction and delivery to the Owner of a completely outfitted and equipped Self-Elevating Mobile Offshore
Drilling Unit (hereinafter referred to as Vessel). The Vessel is to be constructed, outfitted and furnished to meet
the most current requirements of the American Bureau of Shipping (ABS), IMO MODU Code (2009) including all
amendments, and other such specific requirements as are set out in this Specification, the Contract and the Contract
Plans.

The Contract shall include the Builders labor, supply and installation of all materials, machinery, equipment,
furnishing, and fittings, as specified herein, and as required to deliver a complete and fully operational Drilling Rig,
able to drill in water depths up to 121.9 m. (400 ft.) and a drilling depth down to 30,000 ft. (9,144 m.) with 5 " drill
pipe under the conditions and limit as defined in the Specifications. The equipment or materials to be supplied by
the Builder are those items specifically identified as Owner Furnished Equipment (OFE) in Section 18. The Builder
shall be responsible for the storage, preservation and installation of all OFE. Upon delivery, the Vessel including all
material and equipment furnished by Builder and Owner shall be complete, and all its parts, systems, and
appurtenances shall be proven by appropriate commissioning tests and trials to be thoroughly workable as specified
herein.

1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The Vessel consists of a modified triangular hull with three (3) triangular truss work legs, each fitted with a spud
can at its lower end. The modified triangular hull is 70.4 meters (231 ft.) long, approximately 76.0 meters (249 ft.)
wide, and 9.5 meter (31 ft.) deep. The three legs are spaced with the forward leg on the centerline of the Vessel, and
the two aft legs 45.7 meters (150 ft.) aft of the forward leg and 23.8 meters (78.0 ft.) outboard of the Vessel
centerline. The spud cans, which form the lower segments of the legs, are circular with an outside diameter of 18
meters (59 ft.). The total leg length, including the spud can, is 147 meters (481 ft.). The leg design must be able to
accommodate future extensions up to a maximum 167 meters (547 ft.).

The multi-level accommodations provides spaces for catering, housekeeping, hospital, offices, and recreational
facilities for a crew complement of 140 persons in a combination of one and two man staterooms, generally as
shown in the Contract Drawings. The heliport is mounted on the bow of the Vessel on the Vessels longitudinal
centerline. The accommodations also house the helicopter waiting room, radio room, jacking control room and an
emergency generator house. .

The drill floor is located on the substructure above the cantilever. The cantilever is capable of being skidded fore
and aft, and the drill floor on its substructure can be skidded on the cantilever port and starboard of the Vessel
centerline.

The cantilever and drill floor shall be outfitted with sufficient lengths of continuous (no breaks) electrical (power,
control, communication, etc.) service cables. The cables shall be run from point to point without use of intermediate
terminal boxes except where required by the design of the equipment or devices being served. Accommodation for
movement or translation between structures shall be handled by drag chains at the main deck/cantilever and at
cantilever/drill floor interfaces so that the centerline of rotary can be skidded 22.8 meters (75 ft.) aft of the transom
and 4.6 meters (15 ft.) either port or starboard. Similarly, where service hoses are used as a catenary, adequate hose
connections (main deck / cantilever) shall be provided to accommodate the full range of cantilever skidding. Drill
floor translation shall be accommodated without the use of multiple terminals.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

When the term "Owner" is used herein, it shall be understood to mean Vietsopetro or its nominee.

Where the term "Resident Inspector" or "Inspector" or "Owner's Representative" is used, it shall be understood to be
any person or member of any organization designated by the Owner for that particular duty.

MODIFIED 7811 REV.0

Where the term "Builder" or "Contractor" is used, it shall be understood to mean the shipyard (Petrovietnam Marine
Shipyard) awarded the construction contract for this vessel.

When the term Designer is used, it shall be understood to mean Friede & Goldman, Ltd.

Where the term "Regulatory Agencies," "Regulatory Requirements," or "Regulatory Bodies" is used, it shall be
understood to be the requirements of all Government Agencies or statutory regulations relative to the construction of
the Vessel as defined in sub paragraph 1.1 above or 1.4 below.

Where the term "Vessel", Drilling Rig or "Unit" is used, it shall be understood to be the Self Elevating Drilling
Vessel, the construction of which is covered by the Contract, Contract Plans and this Specification.

Where the terms "Provided," "Furnish" or "Install" are used, it shall be understood that the Builder shall provide, at
his expense, any labor, material and equipment (hereinafter referred to as Builder Furnished Equipment or BFE) and
any installation materials required for the complete construction and outfitting of the Vessel including that necessary
for installation, commissioning, and testing of items listed in Section 18 which will be supplied by the Owner as
Owner Furnished Equipment (hereinafter referred to as Owner Furnished Equipment or OFE). The Builder shall
install all the referenced material and/or equipment (OFE and BFE) according to equipment manufacturers
requirements at the Builder's expense, and to the complete satisfaction of the Classification Society, Regulatory
Bodies as applicable, and the Owner.

"Classification Society" - The term Classification Society shall be the American Bureau of Shipping (ABS).

Contract Plans, Contract Drawings or Drawings- The term Contract Plans shall be those plans or Drawings
listed in Section 1.8.

Flag country: Vietnam
It is Owners responsibility to make application; documents approval and certificate obtain to flag country
regulatory bodies based on Vessel technical condition with assistance of Builder. In the case of design changes due
to requirement of flag country regulatory bodies, such changes shall be made subject to the mutual agreement in
writing under Contract.

1.4 CLASSIFICATION, RULES AND REGULATIONS

The Vessel, with its equipment, shall be built under special survey of the Classification Society to the highest
classification for Vessels of this type of Self-Elevating Drilling Vessel.

All items required by the Classification Society and other Regulatory Bodies (including latest changes, amendments
and published revisions) in effect as of the date of the Contract, shall be Builder's responsibility.

All changes or revisions required by the Classification Society and Regulatory Bodies as a direct result of rule
changes put into effect after the date of the Contract shall be for Owner's account.

The Vessel as delivered, shall comply with the applicable regulatory requirements as follows:

American Bureau of Shipping Rules for Building and Classing Mobile Offshore Drilling Units (2012)
including load line assignment, cargo gear, Certification of Drilling Systems (CDS) and distinguished in
Record by Maltese Cross Symbols, except for Certification of Drilling Systems (CDS).

A1 Self-Elevating Drilling Unit

ABS Rules for Building and Classing Mobile Offshore Drilling Units (2012)
ABS Steel Vessel Rules (2012)
International Convention on Load lines 1966 Regulation, with 1988 protocol.
International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships (MARPOL consolidated edition
2006), and as amended. (Single point discharge collection and treatment), Annexes I (Oil), IV (Sewage),
V (Garbage) and VI (Air Pollution)
MODIFIED 7811 REV.0

International Convention on Tonnage Measurement 1969.
International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea Consolidated edition, 2009 (SOLAS) including
all amendments
International Regulations For Preventing Collisions At Sea, 1972, consolidated edition 2003 (COLREG)
IMO international convention on the control of harmful anti-fouling systems on ships, adopted Oct. 2001,
into force Sept. 2008

IMO Code for Construction and Equipment of Mobile Offshore Drilling Units, 2009. (Resolution
A.1023).
IEC publication 61892, part 1 through 7. Mobile and fixed offshore units Electrical installations
International Tele-Communication and Radio Regulations Convention (1974 and 1982)
USCG regulations for foreign flagged vessels; CFR 155, CFR 159, CFR 164
UK Civil Aviation Authority, CAP 437 (for heliport design) 7
th
edition, May 2012.
WHO / US department of health and human services, CDC, Vessel sanitation program, construction
guidelines
ILO, 92 and 133, Accommodation of crews convention, as applied to MODUs by the Flag State
IMO FSS (Fire Safety Systems) code (2007 edition)
IMO resolution A.468 (XII) Codes of noise levels on board ships
ABS Guide for Certification of Cranes and lifting appliances 2007, including all 2012 updates
IMO LSA (Life-Saving Appliances) Code (2010 Edition)

ISO 6954 Mechanical Vibration Guidelines for the Measurement, Reporting and Evaluation of
Vibration with Habitability on Passenger and Merchant Ships

The Builder shall obtain and deliver all certificates and/or documents, except for those which apply to OFE, covering
the approval and indicating compliance with the above regulations as listed below. An official number shall be obtained
by the Owner and marked on Vessel by Builder as directed.

1) Interim Class Certificate (issued by ABS)
2) Temporary Stability Letter (issued by ABS)
3) Mobile Offshore Drilling Unit Safety Certificate* (issued by VR)
4) CAP 437 Helideck (Statement of Fact, issued by ABS)
5) Provisional International Load Line Certificate* (issued by VR)
6) International tonnage Certificate* (69 Convention) (issued by VR)
7) International Oil Pollution Certificate IOPP* (issued by VR)
8) International Sewage Pollution Prevention Certificate * (issued by VR)
9) Statement of Fact, in compliance with Prevention of Pollution by Garbage from Ship (issued by VR)
10) International Air Pollution Prevention Certificate* (issued by VR)
11) Engine Air Pollution Prevention Certificate* (issued by VR)
12) ABS Crane Register Certificates (CRC) (issued by ABS)
13) Statement of fact, compliance with API Spec 2C (issued by ABS)
14) Radio station inspection report by approved 3
rd
party (issued by local health authority)
15) De-rating Exemption Certificate (issued by local agency)
16) Builders Certificate (issued by Builder)
17) Bill of Sale (issued by Builder)
18) Class Approved Booklet of Operating Conditions (Marine Operating Manual) (issued by Designer)
19) Parts & Maintenance Manuals for BFE and OFE equipment
20) Certificates required of BFE equipment and pressure vessels
21) Certificates required of OFE equipment and pressure vessels
22) Certificate of Pressure Vessels and Pressure Vessel Register Book
23) Suez Canal Special Tonnage Certificate (issued by ABS)
24) Statement of Fact, in compliance with ILO No. 92 (issued by ABS)
25) Potable Water Certificate
MODIFIED 7811 REV.0

26) Seaworthiness Certificate (issued by VP)
27) Parats & Maintenance Manuals for FNG furnished equipment (issued by Designer).
28) Three (3) sets of prints of hull structure, outfitting, piping and electrical as-built drawings (issued by
Builder).
29) One (1) set electronic AutoCAD (.DWG) and (.PDF) format of hull structure, outfitting, piping and
electrical drawings based on as-built drawings and Lightship Weight Estimate Report ) editable
electronic format) (issued by Builder).
30) One (1) set each of prints and one (1) set electronic (.TIF/.PDF) format of applicable Regulatory/Class
Society Approved: Design Drawings and Approval letters, Inspection Reports, Material Traceability
Records, Construction Portfolio, Commissioning Reports, Industrial Piping Systems Analysis, Fire Plan,
Electrical Short-Circuit Analysis, Electrical Load Analysis, Protective Device Coordination Study,
Inclining & Deadweight Survey Report (issued by Builder).
Notes: The Certificates which are issued by VR and denoted with an asterisk * above will be requested a
Statement of Fact issued by ABS.

The Owner shall be responsible for obtaining the following Certificates:

1) Certificate of Unit Name, Official Number and Flag State Registry
2) An Official Number shall be obtained by the Owner and marked on the rig by the Builder as directed.
3) Radio Station License
4) Radio Safety Certificate
5) All certificates required of OFE equipment
6) Insurance Certificate
7) Certificate of Financial Responsibility
8) Minimum Safe Manning Certificate

1) In addition, the Vessel shall be designed and built utilizing the following applicable international
standards and recognized conventions where they are practicable or called out by Class and do not
conflict with the Class Rules or Regulatory Requirements: Electrical Cable: Cables are to be selected
according to IEC 331, 332-3 CAT A and ABS requirements. All cables are to be approved by the
Classification Society.

2) A60 Windows as shown on the Contract Plans and as required by the Regulatory Bodies shall comply
with ABS requirements and are to be approved by the Classification Society.

3) Ambient Temperature for Motors: Motors shall comply with ABS requirements.

4) IP Model Code of Safe Practice, Part 15 - Area Classification Code for PetroleumInstallations

5) Blowout Prevention Equipment and Systems

Blowout Preventers:
API-RP53
API 16A
NACE MR01-75
Hi-Temp Service

Choke & Kill Manifold, Piping, and Auto Chokes
API 6A
API 16C
API RP-53
NACE MR01-75
PSL-03
Hi-Temp Service

Diverter
API-RP-64
NACE MR01-75

BOP Controls
MODIFIED 7811 REV.0

API 16D
API 16E
API 53

6) AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel (latest revision)

7) AISC - Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel For Buildings

8) International Association of Classification Societies (IACS) Recommendation No. 47 (5 Oct 2010)
Part A Shipbuilding and Repair Quality Standard for New Construction

9) ANSI B31.3 - Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refinery Piping (latest edition)

10) IP Code of Practice Part 1 Electrical

11) IP Code of Practice Part 8 Drilling and Production Safety Code for Offshore Operations

12) ASTM American Society of Testing of Materials

13) AISE Association of Iron and Steel Engineers

14) SNAME T&R 5-5A

15) NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers

16) All calculations for cooling and heating shall be in accordance with the applicable sections of
SNAME technical and research bulletins 4-7 and 4-16, ISO 7547 (accommodations), ISO 8861
(engine rooms), ISO 8862 (control rooms) and ASHRAE standards including, but not limited to,
standards 26, 55, and 62.

17) ABS Guide for Crew Habitability on Offshore Installations (with regards to noise and vibration only
does not apply to room size requirements)

18) ABS Guidance Notes on Risk Assessment Application for the Marine and Offshore Oil and Gas
Industries

19) AISC-ASD 9Ed American Institute of Steel Construction Manual of Steel Construction Allowable
Stress Design 9
th
Ed.

20) ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers

21) API Spec 2C Specification Offshore Cranes, last Edition

22) API Spec 4F Specification for Drilling and Well Servicing Structures

23) API Spec 7K Specification for Drilling Equipment

24) API Spec 8C Specification for Drilling and Production Hoisting Equipment

25) API Spec 9B Specification for Application, care, Use of Wire Rope for Oil Field Service

26) API Spec 16A Specification for BOP and Associated Equipment

27) API Spec 16C Specification for Choke and Kill System

28) API RP14C Recommended Practice for Analysis, Design, Installation and Testing of Basic Surface
System on Offshore Production Platforms

29) API RP14E Recommended Practice for Design and Installation of Offshore Production Platform
Piping Systems

MODIFIED 7811 REV.0

30) API RP53 Recommended Practice for Blowout Prevention Equipment System

31) API RP505
,
1 st, Reaffirmed Nov. 2002, Recommended Practice for Classification of Location for
Electrical Installation at Petroleum Facilities Classified as Class 1, Zone 0, Zone 1 and Zone 2

32) ASME Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels

33) ASME/ANSI Chemical Plant & Petroleum Refinery Piping

34) AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code

35) IEEE 45 Recommended Practice for Electrical Installation on Shipboard

36) IEEE 1580 Recommended Practice for Marine Cable for Use on Shipboard and Fixed or Floating
Marine Platforms

37) IEC 61892 International Electro Technical Commission, publication for Mobile and Fixed Platforms

38) ISO 10423 Specification for Valves, Wellhead and Christmas Tree Equipment

39) ISO 14726 Piping Color Code

40) SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association

41) SNAME T&R Bulletin 5-5, Guidelines for Site Specific Assessment of Mobile J ack-Up Units.

42) SNAME T&R Bulletin 5-5A, Recommended Practice for Site Specific Assessment of Mobile J ack-
Up Units.

All fees incidental to the foregoing inspections, certificates, etc., shall be paid by the Builder except for those required for
OFE.

Owner shall be responsible for registering the Unit with the Flag authorities, at his expense, at least 60 days prior to the
Contractual delivery date.
An official number shall be obtained by the Owner and marked on vessel by Builder.

1.5 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA AND DESIGN CONDITIONS

Definitions

Fixed Loads: Consist of the following, all of which are permanently attached and form part of the drilling Vessel:
quarters, heliport, substructure, cranes, winches, engines, generators, pump, electrical equipment, electrical cables,
drilling machinery, cementing unit, well logging unit, foundations, piping, rigging, all fluids in equipment at normal
operating levels, etc.

Movable (fixed) Loads: Consist of the Cantilever, Drill Floor and their fixed machinery, and equipment (i.e. mud
return tanks, cement package, shale shakers, mud process machinery, drawworks house, drilling machinery,
pump(s), electrical equipment, electrical cables, derrick, piping, rigging, all fluids in equipment at normal operating
levels, etc.).

Variable Loads: Consist of the following items which are readily removable, shifted, or consumed during the
drilling operations: bulk mud, bulk chemicals, bulk cement, liquid mud, liquid cement, casing, drill pipe, drill
collar(s), drill water, diesel oil, lube oil, crew, crew supplies, potable water, setback load, conductor tensioner load,
mud logging unit, BOPs, well test equipment, skimmer tank contents, well logging unit, etc. Also includes
Substructure Drilling Loads, consisting of
Hook or rotary loads, setback load, and conductor tensioner load.

MODIFIED 7811 REV.0

General Operating Conditions:

Temperature
Minimum -20 C for steel
Minimum -10
o
C for air
Maximum HVAC design temperature: 45
o
C (Relative Humidity 90%)
Equipment operating:45 C
Relative Humidity
Minimum 30 %
Maximum 90 %
Sea water temperature:
Minimum 0C
Maximum 32 C

Design Operating Conditions
1

Standard Benchmarks:

Water Depth (meters) 100 107 122
Maximum Wave Height (meters)
22.0 20.7 17.1
Corresponding Wave Period (sec)
15.5 14.7 14.5
Max Wind Velocity (m/s - one min. avg.)
36 36 36
Surface Current (m/s) 0.51 1.03 0.77
Air Gap (meters)
19.8 15.2
12.2
Penetration (meters)
3 3 3
Penetration (Maximum) site specific TBD TBD TBD
Variable Load (mt.)
3,766 3,766 3,766
Minimum Design Temperature -20 C -20 C -20 C

Additional Benchmarks:

Water Depth (meters)
107 122
Maximum Wave Height (meters)
10.6 10.6
Corresponding Wave Period (sec)
10.1 10.1
Max Wind Velocity (m/s - one min. avg.)
22 22
Current 5m below / 50m below 1.0 / 0.7 1.0 / 0.7
Air Gap (meters)
22
19
5 5
Variable Load (mt.)
4533 4533
Minimum Design Temperature -20 C -20 C

Design Storm Survival Conditions
1

Standard Benchmarks:

Water Depth (meters) 100 107 122
Maximum Wave Height (meters) 22.0 20.4 18.3
Corresponding Wave Period (sec) 15.5 15.5 15.5
Maximum Wind Velocity (m/s - one min. avg.) 44.8 51.4 51.4
Surface Current (m/s) 0.51 1.03 0.77
Air Gap (meters) 19.8 15.2 12.2
MODIFIED 7811 REV.0

Penetration (meters) 3
3 3
Variable Load (mt.) 2,995 2,995 2,995
Minimum Design Temperature -20 C -20 C -20 C

Additional Benchmarks:

Water Depth (meters) 107 122
Maximum Wave Height (meters) 17.1 17.1
Corresponding Wave Period (sec) 13.2 13.2
Maximum Wind Velocity (m/s - one min. avg.) 29 29
Current (m/s) 5m below / 50m below 2.1/1.36 2.1/1.36
Air Gap (meters) 22 19
5 5
Variable Load (mt.) 2,995 2,995
Minimum Design Temperature -20 C -20 C

1
These ratings based on:
- ABS-approved calculation methodology
- Leg length: 167 meters
- Cantilever position: CL rotary 22.8 meters aft of transom
- Conductor (915 mm dia) included
- No marine growth
- P-delta and dynamic amplification per ABS

Hull Structural Design Loads

- Maximum Combined Variable (subject to
location, water depth, environmental conditions,
stability nomograms)
6,488 mt. (14,300 kips)

Drillfloor/Cantilever Load Maximum Combined
Total
1360 mt. (3000 kips)
- Consisting of any proportion of the following:
Hook 750 st. (1500 kips)
Rotary 750 st. (1500 kips)
Set Back 445 mt. (980 kips)
Conductor Tensioner 408 mt. (900 kips)
Skimmer Tank Load 58 mt. (127 kips)

Maximum Combined Load when Cantilever
Skidding
431 mt. Setback +508 mt. Cantilever Pipe
Rack

Cantilever Pipe Rack Load Total 508 mt.

Deck Structural Design Loads

Main Deck (Inside Pipe Rack) 500 lbs/ft
Main Deck (Outside Pipe Rack) 415 lbs/ft2
Cantilever Deck (Inside Pipe Rack) 500 lbs/ft2
Cantilever Deck (Outside Pipe Rack) 270 lbs/ft2
Drill Floor (Working Areas) 400 lbs/ft2
MODIFIED 7811 REV.0

(Set-back Areas)
Quarters' Deck 94 lbs/ft2
House Tops 150 lbs/ft2

Machinery Spaces 270 lbs/ft2
Sack Stores 500 lbs/ft2

Cantilever Structural Design Loads

Rotary Position On Centerline 4.57m Off CL P/S

22.86 m Aft of Transom 1230 mt. 500 mt.



The above design cantilever loads are the sum of the following individual loads:

a) Setback load
b) Rotary load
c) Hook load
d) Conductor Tensioner load

The above design loads are based on the following data (any changes to weights and centers may
affect the load chart):

Item Weight (mt.) LCG (m fwd. of
rotary
centerline)
TCG (m stbd
rotary
centerline)
Drill Floor 960 0.1 0.42
Cantilever/Substructure 1867 15.82 0.07
Setback 0 - -
Cantilever Pipe Rack 0 - -

Cantilever weight includes Well Control Load of 64 mt., Mud Return Load of 73 mt., &
Miscellaneous Loads of 50 mt.

Note: 1 tonne =1 mt.

Cantilever and Drill floor weights are inclusive of structure, paint, outfitting and equipment, as
listed elsewhere in this Specification and include mud logging unit, cementing unit and future
centrifuge units and pumps. During design development these weights shall be carefully
monitored, and should these weights vary appreciably, the designer is to be promptly notified by
the Builder.

Operating Capacities
To be confirmed by the capacity calculations.
Tank Total Capacity Units
Diesel Fuel 4150 bbls
Drill Water 9800 bbls
Fresh Water 3400 bbls
Ballast or Preload 84000 bbls
Bulk Mud and/or Cement 17600 Ft
3

Sack Stores 5000 Sacks
Active & Reserve Mud Pits 4700 bbls

MODIFIED 7811 REV.0

Tank Total Capacity Units
Slugging Pit 170 bbls
Brine 1340 bbls
Return Pits, Sand Trap, treatment tanks 528 bbls
Base Oil 1340 bbls
Trip Tank (2) 63 bbls
Stripping Tank 19 bbls
Skimmer Tank 126 bbls

Pipe Rack - Cantilever 453 m
Pipe Rack Main Deck 241 m

Design Towing Conditions

1. Wet Tow
Field Transit
Allowable Motion
6 degrees single amplitude roll or pitch at
the natural period of the unit, plus 120%
of the gravity load at that angle of
inclination.
Leg Length Fully Retracted 167 meters

2. Wet Tow
Ocean Transit
Allowable Motion
15 degrees single amplitude roll or pitch
at a 10 second period, plus 120% of the
gravity moment caused by the angle of
inclination of the legs (ABS)
Leg Length Fully Retracted 130.5 meters

3. Dry Tow
Leg Length 167 meters
It is to be confirmed that the structure of the Vessel is designed for dry tow with proper
sea fastening.

1.6 STABILITY REQUIREMENTS

The Builder shall prepare and obtain Classification Society approval of the stability calculations. The stability
calculations shall be based on the Vessel as delivered and verified by the inclining test of the Vessel. Stability
calculations shall be included in the Operations Manual covering the operating conditions of the Vessel as specified
in sub-paragraph 1.14 of this Section of the Specification. The location of air escapes, ventilation openings, hatches,
and personnel accesses shall be as shown on the Contract Plans.
1.7 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

All material, machinery and equipment furnished by the Builder shall be new and of a grade suitable for the service
intended, and approved by Classification Society and the Owner.
1.8 CONTRACT PLANS

All of the Drawings listed below Contract Drawing List are incorporated into and form an integral part of this
Specification and are hereafter referred to as "Contract Plans, Drawings or Contract Drawings. In the event
there are conflicts or inconsistencies between the Specification and the Contract Plans, the Specification will prevail.
In any event, if the Builder discovers a conflict or an inconsistency between the Specification and any of the
Contract Plans, he shall bring such conflict or inconsistency to the attention of the Owner who shall promptly
provide the Builder with a resolution. Under no circumstances shall such resolution cause the Builder to request a
change order unless the resolution clearly exceeds the intent of the Specification.

The Specification calls for compliance with Classification Society and other Regulatory Body requirements as
defined in paragraph 1.4. Builder shall modify and supplement the Contract Plans as necessary to meet the full
requirement of paragraph 1.4 and shall build the Vessel according to such modified and supplemented drawings.
MODIFIED 7811 REV.0


If Contractor determines that there is a better or simpler way of building any part of the Vessel in a way that does
not affect the performance of the Vessel or its compliance with any of the regulatory bodies, Contractor shall be
permitted to redesign such part of the rig to provide a better or simpler arrangement, as long as the redesign is
approved by the Designer and the Owner and it meets all Regulatory Body and Classification Society requirements
and does not result in a lightship weight increase.

All sizes, dimensions, quantities and descriptions shown on the Contract Plans are given for the purpose of guiding
the Builder in developing the detail design and working drawings. The Builder shall develop his own measurements
and shall not scale from the Contract Plans. However, no departure from principal characteristics, basic
arrangements and major dimensions will be allowed. While it is recognized that exact adherence to structural
arrangements, machinery layout, etc., is not always fully possible in progressing from the Contract Plans to the
detailed design and working drawings, any deviations made by the Builder shall be kept to an absolute minimum
and be subject to the Owner's prior written approval. Deviations permitted for the Builder's convenience shall be
considered a development of the Contract Plans and Specifications, and not as a basis of "change orders" or "extra
work". All such changes or deviations including weight increase or decrease shall be noted in written form
accompanying the submittal of the working plan for Owner's approval.

The Contract Plans which form a part of these Specifications are as follows:

Project Documentation
SP-7876-001 Construction Specification
WE-7876-001 Preconstruction Weight Estimate
OP-7876-001 Marine Operating Manual
NA-7876-001 Stability Analysis Report Summary
NA-7876-101 Loading Condition Sample
EL-7876-001 Preliminary Electrical Load Analysis
EL-7876-002 Preliminary Short Circuit Analysis
EL-7876-003 Preliminary Emergency Battery Calculation
TP-7876-001 Cantilever Beam and Drill Floor Test Procedure
TP-7876-002 J acking Trials Procedure
TP-7876-003 Inclining Experiment Procedure
TP-7876-004 Cantilever Beam & Drill Floor Weighing and CG Procedure Sample
TP-7876-005 Cantilever Beam & Drill Floor Weighing and CG Report Sample

Arrangement Drawings
7876-J -001 General Arrangement - Outboard Profile
7876-J -010 Inner Bottom Tank Arrangement
7876-J -011 General Arrangement - Machinery Deck 1830 ABL
7876-J -012 General Arrangement - Machinery Deck 5640 ABL
7876-J -013-1 General Arrangement - Main Deck
7876-J -013-2 General Arrangement - Top Deck Plan
7876-J -014 General Arrangement - Drill Floor and Cantilever Beam Pipe Rack
7876-J -015 General Arrangement - Cantilever Beam Cellar Deck and Mud Processing Area
7876-J -016 Primary Structure Plan
7876-J -020 General Arrangement Quarters
7876-J -030 Lines Plan
7876-J -034 Cathodic Protection Arrangement
MODIFIED 7811 REV.0

7876-J -035 Loadline Mark & Draft Plan
7876-J -040 Capacity and Deck Load Plan
7876-J -041 External Watertight Integrity Plan
7876-J -042 Internal Watertight Integrity Plan
7876-J -050 Hazardous Area Plan
7876-J -060 Preliminary Fire Control Plan
7876-J -061 Escape Route Plan
7876-J -090 Structural Fire Protection Plan
7876-J -092 Leg and J ack Tower Tolerance Plan
7876-J -093 Cantilever Beam Tolerance Plan
7876-J -094 Leg J ig Guidance Drawing
7876-J -099 F&G Standard Symbols and Drawing Aids
7876-J -600 J acking Foundation & Rack Chock Arrangement

Global Scantling Drawings
7876-J -100-1 Scantling Plan - Main Deck
7876-J -100-2 Scantling Plan - 5640 Flat
7876-J -100-3 Scantling Plan - Inner Bottom
7876-J -100-4 Scantling Plan - Bottom Plating
7876-J -101-1 Scantling Plan - Transverse Sections - Frames 2A to 10A
7876-J -101-2 Scantling Plan - Transverse Sections - Frames 11 to 22
7876-J -101-3 Scantling Plan - Transverse Sections - Frames 13 to 28, 30, 31 & Side Shell
7876-J -102 Scantling Plan - Longitudinal Bulkheads
7876-J -103 Scantling Plan - Longitudinal Girders
7876-J -104 Scantling Plan - Leg Well Modules
7876-J -105 Framing Below the J ack Foundation and Lower Guide
7876-J -106 Dry Tow Strong Boxes
7876-J -120 Leg Structure
7876-J -121 Spudcan Structure
7876-J -122 Racks for J U-2000E
7876-J -123 Rack Chord Detail
7876-J -130 Scantling Plan - Superstructure
7876-J -131 Structural Plan - Heliport
7876-J -132 Structural Scantling Paint locker / heavy storage
7876-J -151 J ack Foundation Bracing
7876-J -152 Pump Tower Support Arrangement and Details
7876-J -620 J ackcase Foundation Structure and Details
7876-J -621 J ackcase Foundation Machining and Miscellaneous Details

Equipment Dependent Drawings
7876-J -140 Scantling Plan - Substructure and Cantilever Beams
MODIFIED 7811 REV.0

7876-J -141 Drill Floor Structure
7876-J -142 Cantilever Support, Guides and Securing Arrangement
7876-J -143 Cantilever Bearing Plates
7876-J -144 Cantilever Skidding J ack Foundation
7876-J -145 Drill Floor Skidding J ack Foundation
7876-J -150-1 Crane Foundation - Crane 2 & Details (Stbd Fwd Crane)
7876-J -150-2 Crane Foundation - Crane 1 & Details (Port Aft Crane)
7876-J -150-3 Crane Foundation - Crane 3 & Details (Stbd Aft Crane)
7876-J -154 Main Engine Foundation
7876-J -155 Mud Pump Foundation
7876-J -156 Conductor Tensioning Foundation
7876-J -157 P-Tank Foundation
7876-J -158 Mooring Winches Foundation
7876-J -160 BOP Handling and Service Crane Support Structure
7876-J -161 Life Boat and Davit Foundations
7876-J -162 Towing Bit and Towing Pad Arrangement and Details
7876-J -199 Hull strength analysis for loadout with two beams

Piping Flow Diagrams
7876-J -201 Piping Diagram Preload Supply & Dumps
7876-J -202 Piping Diagram Bilge and Stripping System
7876-J -203 Piping Diagram J etting System
7876-J -204 Piping Diagram Salt Water Service
7876-J -210 Piping Diagram Main Engines
7876-J -212 Piping Diagram Brake Cooling System
7876-J -213 Piping Diagram Fire Fighting System
7876-J -220 Piping Diagram Fresh Water & Potable Water System
7876-J -222 Piping Diagram Drill Water System
7876-J -230 Piping Diagram Diesel Oil System
7876-J -231 Piping Diagram Lube Oil & Dirty Oil System
7876-J -232 Piping Diagram Helicopter Refueling System
7876-J -240 Piping Diagram Compressed Air System
7876-J -241 Piping Diagram Bulk, Barite, Gel & Cement System
7876-J -260 Piping Diagram High Pressure Mud & Cement System
7876-J -261 Piping Diagram Low Pressure Mud System
7876-J -262 Piping Diagram Low Pressure Mud Processing System
7876-J -265 Piping Diagram Brine & Base Oil System
7876-J -282 Piping Diagram Single Point Discharge System
7876-J -295 Piping Diagram Tank Gauging System

MODIFIED 7811 REV.0

Electrical One-Line Diagrams
7876-J -301 One Line Diagram of Power System
7876-J -302-1 One Line Diagram of 480V Distribution (Main MCC 1)
7876-J -302-2 One Line Diagram of 480V Distribution (Main MCC 2)
7876-J -303 One Line Diagram of 480V Distribution (Drilling MCC's)
7876-J -304 One Line Diagram of 480V Distribution (Cantilever Drilling MCC's)
7876-J -305 One Line Diagram of 480V/230V Distribution (Emergency)
7876-J -307 One Line Diagram of 480V Distribution (Ventilation MCC's)
7876-J -308 One Line Diagram of 230V Distribution (Main)
7876-J -309 One Line Diagram of 230V Distribution (Galley Power Panels)

1.9 BUILDERS DRAWINGS

During the detail engineering phase the Builder shall develop his own detailed measurements, prepare and provide
all working and construction drawings, shop drawings, sketches and calculations for the approval of the Owner and
Classification Society prior to the use of these drawings. The Builder shall also prepare and provide full composite
layouts and / or isometric drawings (for machinery spaces and accommodation corridors), including piping,
electrical cable ways, and ventilation ducts, for review and comment by the Owner. Approval of these drawings by
the Owner or Classification Society does not relieve the Builder of his responsibility to provide a complete and
operable Vessel in accordance with the requirements of these Specifications. If it is found, after approval of the
drawings by the Owner or Classification Society, that a drawing is in error or is not in compliance with these
Specifications, the Builder shall correct the drawing and make any changes to the Vessel required to ensure
compliance with the Specifications at no additional cost to the Owner.

It is to be clearly understood that the Contract Plans are not intended to show all details of the work to be performed.
In particular the scantling plans, even when already approved by the Classification Society, do not purport to show
all structure required for this design. The Builder shall have included in his Contract price the cost of such
additional steel work as may be required by the Classification Society when working drawings are submitted for
approval and for mutually agreed scantling increases which the Owner may request for Builder-developed structure
not shown on the Contract Plans.
1.10 DRAWING APPROVAL

The Builder shall provide the Owner, within thirty (30) days after the Contract date, a schedule of detailed working
drawings to be submitted for approval. The schedule shall list for each drawing the proposed and actual submittal
dates, approval dates and revision submittal and approval dates. The schedule shall be brought up to date quarterly
and resubmitted to the Owner.

The Builder shall submit six (6) copies of all drawings, sketches, diagrams, etc., and calculations developed by him
to the Owner for approval. The Builder shall simultaneously submit to both Classification Societies as well as to
other applicable Regulatory Bodies and agencies all documents required by these organizations to obtain the
certifications listed in Section 1.4. The Builder is responsible for any modifications to the drawings or calculations
required by the Classification Societies or Regulatory Bodies or agencies. The requested modifications shall be
made in a timely manner and shall be resubmitted to all parties including the Owner for approval. The Owner shall
normally approve the drawings within twenty (20) working days after receipt or the Owner shall advise the Builder
of discrepancies, which would require revision and re-submittal. For drawings requiring urgent approval, Owner
shall return within ten working days. Two (2) copies of all drawings submitted to and returned by the Classification
Society will be issued by the Builder to the Owner within ten days of receipt.

MODIFIED 7811 REV.0

1.11 AS BUILT DRAWINGS

Upon completion of the construction, the Builder shall provide the Owner and the Designer with one (1) set of
AutoCAD *.dwg files on optical disk and one set of photocopy "as-built" working plans, including tank tables (in
barrels, liters, metric tons, VCG, LCG, TCG, and longitudinal and transverse free surface moment as a function of
actual sounding height in meters and millimeters), capacity plan, curves of form, stability booklet, all diagrams, and
material traceability booklet (construction portfolio) .

The Builder shall further provide the following documentation:
The hazardous area equipment registers using the format, supplied by the Owner. One picture for each equipment
type shall be taken and filed as well as all certificates of the hazardous equipment shall be filed in one common
folder according to a grid plan, which shall be added to the hazardous area drawings.

The following studies and calculations shall be provided by the Builder:
Load analysis in transit, normal drilling, back reaming, emergency mode, including load cases for UPS and
chargers.
Power system study dossier, including short circuit calculations, earth fault calculations, load flow, large
motor inrush voltage drop, transformer inrush voltage drop, cable sizing and selection tables, total
harmonic distortion and battery and cable sizing calculations.

1.12 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

The Builder shall furnish to Owner one copy in Microsoft Word on optical disk and six photocopies of all operation
and maintenance manuals and parts lists for all BFE. The Builder shall furnish to the Designer one copy of all
documentation furnished to the Owner.

The operation and maintenance manuals shall include information describing; installation, operation, safety,
maintenance, adjustment, wiring, and parts lists, with suitable illustrations and dimension drawings. The manual
shall be formatted and organized according to Owner requirements.

Builder shall obtain from each vendor of BFE a list of recommended spares for one year's service, compile these
spares lists in a cross indexed booklet form and present them to the Owner for his subsequent use. This booklet
shall be provided to the Owner at least ninety days prior to delivery of the Vessel and notification of any long
delivery spares should be given as soon as possible during the construction of the Vessel.

All information regarding the as-built condition of the vessel necessary for completion of the operating manual shall
be submitted to the Owner in a timely manner. Schedule of submittal for this information shall be mutually agreed
upon between the Builder and the Owner.

A software register, identifying all installed support, operating and application software to be provided by the
Builder. For each release of software installed in a system, a back-up and tools for upload/download of updates shall
be provided by the Builder, together with upload/download instructions.

1.13 PROGRESS SCHEDULE

The Builder shall, within thirty days after execution of the Contract, prepare and furnish the Owner or his
Representative a detailed key event production schedule in the form of a Gantt bar graph based on Microsoft Project
software or another recognized planning program, such as Primavera showing planned construction progress of the
Vessel. The Builder shall provide a progress report to Owner or his Representative two weeks after Contract
execution. After approval of the production schedule by the Owner or the Representative within ten working days
after receipt thereof, the production schedule (herein called the "Production Schedule") shall be the basis of
interpretation of actual construction progress of the Vessel.

This Production Schedule shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:

The schedule shall as a minimumbe of a level 3 type with sufficient detail to allow tracking of progress and
determination of the critical path.

MODIFIED 7811 REV.0

An erection sequence to show the order in which the construction of the Vessel shall take place. This Schedule shall
be in a formdetailing all major activities with time duration of each. The Schedule shall be prepared in sufficient
detail to show all production items including the proposed start and finish dates for hull groups, machinery items,
piping systems, electrical items and systems, ventilation and air conditioning systems, and joiner items.

The schedule shall indicate by milestones identified to be achieved during the construction. The schedule shall
include planned issue dates for IDC, IFA, AFC and As Built. The final set of drawings shall be: As Built and
Commissioned

A schedule of proposed plans: This schedule shall include all plans to be prepared by the Builder and his
subcontractors.

A schedule of required dates for material, showing the dates on which all material items, including OFE, are
required at the shipyard for fabrication, erection or installation.

A schedule of documentation submittal to Classification Society or Regulatory Bodies.

A schedule of documentation deliverables to Owner.

All tasks shall be appropriately linked according to their interdependence, and the Builder shall use the Tracking Gantt
feature of the Microsoft Project software to indicate actual progress against planned activities and to identify the critical
path for completion.

Progress reports are to commence thirty (30) days following the date of the Contract signing through completion of the
Vessel.

These schedules shall be kept current with the progress of the Work, revised to show all changes, progress (percentage
complete) and delays, and shall be submitted to the Owner weekly for his information and review. Percentage
complete shall not be limited to an evaluation of the steel tonnage completed, but shall include evaluations of the status
of items such as engineering and systems installation. As each itemon the schedule is completed, it shall be so
indicated. Dates of submittals and approvals shall be noted.
1.14 WEIGHT AND CENTER OF GRAVITY

Within ninety (90) calendar days after date of award, the Builder shall submit for approval by the Owner an
independently prepared estimate of light ship weight and center of gravity. This estimate shall describe the weight and
center of gravity of the Vessel in comprehensive detail and shall include summaries and work sheets showing detailed
calculations.

Within thirty (30) days of the receipt of the Builder's estimate of the lightship weight and center of gravity, the Owner
shall approve the estimate. Thereafter, the Builder shall be responsible for monitoring the weight and center of gravity
characteristics adjusted for authorized departures fromthe construction contemplated in the approved estimate.

Departures fromthe construction contemplated in the approved estimate, which affects the light ship weight, and center
of gravity shall not be undertaken until the Builder has submitted to the Owner his estimate of the effect on weight and
center of gravity of the Vessel, and obtained written approval to proceed with the departure. Departures, of which the
total effect changes any weight group by less than 250 kg, may be considered negligible and will not require written
approval with respect to weight.

As an aid to weight, trim and stability control, the Builder shall submit quarterly to the Owner a tabulation of approved
departures and their cumulative effect on weight and center of gravity of the approved light ship. In addition, in
submitting plans for approval, where such plans involve departures fromthe type of construction contemplated in design
drawings or the estimate, the Builder shall itemize such departures and their effect on light ship weight and center of
gravity in his letter of transmittal. Where material substitutions are required, Builder shall submit the proposed
substitutions to the Owner so that the optimumsubstitution can be chosen
1.15 PHOTOGRAPHS

During the construction of the Vessel, the Builder shall make approximately one hundred (100) photographs to identify
progress of construction, and shall furnish the Owner with one set of these photographs. Upon completion of the
MODIFIED 7811 REV.0

finished Vessel, the Builder shall make approximately two hundred (200) photographs showing exterior and interior
views as directed and furnish three prints each and the digital copies on optical disk (CD-ROM/DVD) to the Owner and
Designer.

Photographs shall only be taken by the Builder or the Owner. The public release of any photographs shall be approved
by the Owner.
1.16 INSPECTION

The Vessel is to be built, equipped and delivered under the inspection and subject to the approval of the Owner,
Classification Society and applicable Regulatory Bodies.

The Builder shall have a quality control system and inspection force of his own to insure the quality of workmanship and
materials at the yard and at his vendors plants as necessary. The construction project shall be administered on the basis
of an ISO 9000 Quality Management System. Failure on the part of the Builder to provide these safeguards shall not
later be the basis of a claimfor delay in delivery if workmanship or design of a vendor is rejected by the Owner. Failure
on the part of the Owner to identify substandard quality at a particular time does not relieve the Builder of its
responsibility to correct this problemwhen it is discovered. Radiograph inspection shall also be provided in accordance
with Section 2 of these Specifications.

All material and workmanship shall be subject to inspection by representatives of the Owner at any reasonable time
during manufacture or construction and at any or all places where such work is carried on.

The Owner or his representative shall have the authority to reject workmanship or material whenever found defective,
not in conformity with good shipbuilding practice, or not in accordance with the requirements of the Plans and
Specifications.

The Builder and Owner will coordinate the scheduling of inspection personnel to minimize the disruption to both sides
by giving a minimumof one working day's but not less than twenty-four hours, written notice prior to all inspections.

The Builder shall furnish, without additional charge, all facilities, including air conditioned furnished offices, heat, light,
telephones, drawing tables, stools, desks, chairs, filing cabinets, personal computers with e-mail connections, etc., as
may be required for the resident project team. Long distance telephone calls, faxes and mailing costs, incurred by the
project teamwill be paid for by the Owner. Access to yard and office shall be available twenty-four hours a day seven
days a week.
1.17 SOURCE OF EQUIPMENT

Unless specifically stated to the contrary in this Specification, the Builder shall furnish and install all necessary materials,
machinery, equipment, appurtenances, etc., as specified herein for the construction of a complete Vessel.

Any outfit or equipment which may be OFE for use on the Vessel, upon delivery to the shipyards by Owner at Builder's
yard, or by truck to his warehouse, shall be stored and preserved until the time of installation by the Builder to prevent
pilferage, breakage, weather damage, etc., and shall be insured against all risk, and shall be installed and/or delivered
onboard prior to acceptance of the Vessel. Items of equipment, material and certified drawings to be furnished by the
Owner will be delivered free to the Contractor's yard. The Builder shall receive, unload, handle, inspect, preserve and be
responsible for all materials and articles furnished by the Owner under these Specifications, do all uncrating, cleaning
necessitated by wear or exposure after delivery to the Builder, care for the material and store same in a suitable manner
after Owner's inspection, including warehousing where usual, until such time as required by installation on board the
Vessel. All OFE shall be segregated from any Builder or other Owner equipment and its location ID shelf, spare number
identified. The OFE should then not be moved fromthis location without prior notice to, and approval by the Owner

The Builder, upon delivery by Owner, shall inspect OFE and endeavor to determine that no shipping damage, shortages
or obvious defects exist prior to the acceptance of such items. The Builder shall immediately notify the Owner in writing
should any such damage or defect be found. Thereafter any damages, shortages shall be rectified/replaced at the builders
cost.

Copies of all material receiving sheets whether OFE or BFE, shall be transmitted to Owner's representative within
twenty-four hours of receiving the material. Receiving sheet shall denote item, manufacturer, model, type, serial
number, and other name plate data, including area where stored, and whether anti-condensation heaters have been
installed where necessary. Copies shall be in triplicate.
MODIFIED 7811 REV.0


All OFE material must be of a usable quality suitable for the service intended and will be subject to inspection by the
Builder. Material found to be unsuitable shall be rejected in writing.

It shall be the responsibility of the Builder to provide suitable 3-conductor cords and plugs to meet regulations for
grounding the portable electrical appliances and to suit the receptacles provided. Electrical/mechanical equipment shall
be protected by use of heat lamps and/or supplying electrical source for equipment heaters according to manufacturers
recommendations.

The Builder shall then assemble, fit and install the items in their proper locations in a satisfactory manner, ready for use,
and shall deliver themwith the completed Vessel in a condition at least equal to that in which they were found at the
time of the Owner's inspection approval. All work of installation, assembling, fitting, fastening, wiring, piping and all
connections pertaining thereto shall be performed by the Builder as part of the Contract at no additional cost to the
Owner.

In the case of articles or materials supplied by the Owner, the Builder shall follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions, unless they do not specifically apply to the installation, at which time the Builder shall notify the Owner
who will furnish appropriate instructions. The Builder shall not be relieved of his responsibility in the event of faulty or
incorrect installation and securing on the Vessel of such equipment or apparatus.

1.18 SUBSTITUTIONS

Where materials, fittings or equipment are specified herein by vendor or trade name, it is the intent that such product be
furnished and installed by the Builder. Where the terms "or equal" or "similar to" are used herein in conjunction with
such vendor or trade name, the Builder may propose articles substantially similar in design, quality and construction
produced by reputable manufacturers other than those indicated, but such proposed substitutions shall be submitted to the
Owner for written approval, with reasons for substitution and complete description and specification of the article. It
shall be understood that any proposed substitution shall not be grounds for delay of delivery or increase of cost except
where specifically stated in the proposal and as agreed thereupon in writing by the Owner. Owner's written decision
regarding the acceptability or otherwise of any substitution shall be final, and such decision shall be given to Builder
within ten days. Substitution will not be allowed among other reasons if, in the opinion of the Owner, spare parts for the
proposed equipment are not readily available on an international basis.
1.19 TRIALS, TESTING AND CLEANING

All in place trials and testing shall be in accordance with Section 16 herein. Cleaning and testing of all piping systems
shall be in accordance and with the standards set forth in Section 13. The cleaning and chlorination of potable water
tanks and systemshall be in accordance with Regulatory Requirements. At time of delivery all tanks shall be empty,
clean and free fromall foreign material, except those tanks containing clean fuel, lube oil and fresh water.
1.20 SPECIFICATION AND PLAN OWNERSHIP

The Specifications and Contract Plans, which have been developed by the Designer are the Designers property. No
alterations shall be made to any of the above listed Contract documents without the written consent of the Owner
and Designer, except for alterations made according to the provisions of paragraph 1.8 of this Specification. The
reuse of the design, Specifications, and the Contract Plans are subject to the express consent of their respective owners
except as follows:

In addition to any Classification Society requirements, the Builder shall provide the Owner with copies of the as-built
plans for the Vessel as per paragraph 1.11 of this Specification, which the Owner may use as they see fit.

Any further development of the Specifications by the Owner shall be their property. Likewise, any further development
of the Construction Plans for this vessel shall be the property of the Builder.

If either the Builder or the Owner provides any other party with all or any part of the design, Plans, or Specifications,
they shall require such other party to treat the information contained therein as confidential.
MODIFIED 7811 REV.0

1.21 OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT (OFE)

All material and equipment furnished by the Owner shall be to the extent as listed in Section 18.
1.22 CONSTRUCTION PORTFOLIO

A booklet of pertinent documentation shall be compiled by the Builder, reviewed and approved by the Classification
Society (through Builder) and presented to the Owner upon delivery of the Vessel or as soon as possible thereafter. A
sample booklet shall be prepared and submitted to the Owner along with a procedure for obtaining the documentation
within ninety days of Contract date.

The booklet shall contain the following:

a) Key plans showing locations and grades of steel material.
b) List of piping and fitting materials for all applications.
c) List of structural drawings.
d) Welding procedures, specifications for all materials, and procedure qualification records.
e) Non-Destructive Testing (NDT) Plan.
f) NDT record of Vessel during construction.
g) Recommendation for repair procedures.
h) Mill certificates on all high strength and special application materials with a record of where all
such identified materials are to be found in the completed Vessel.
i) Full certification for all BFE equipment.
j) Comprehensive list of all pad eyes and their capacities.

Those items of special steel, piping and fittings included in lists shall include trade names, ASTM (or equivalent)
specifications, chemical composition, and physical properties, as well as any pertinent data, modifications, etc., that may
be required when ordering replacement parts or materials.

1.22 NOISE AND VIBRATION

Noise levels to comply with criteria as noted below.

Area dB (A) IMO dB (A) ABS
Workspaces
Machinery spaces (continuously manned)** 90 85
Machinery spaces (not continuously manned)** 110 108
Machinery control rooms 75 65
Workshops 85 80
Non-specified work spaces ** 90 80
Navigation spaces
Navigating bridge and chartrooms 65 55
Listening post, including navigating bridges*
wings and windows
70 55
Radio rooms (with radio eq. operating but not
producing audio signals)
60 55
Radar rooms 65 55
Accommodation spaces
Cabins and hospitals 60 50
Mess rooms 65 55
Recreation rooms 65 60
Open recreation areas 75 65
Offices 65 60
MODIFIED 7811 REV.0

Services spaces
Galley, without food processing equipment 75 70
Serveries and pantries 75 70
Normally unoccupied spaces
Spaces not specified **
90 108

*Reference is made to Resolution A. 343(IX) which also applies.
**Ear protectors should be worn when the noise level is above 85 dB (A)

The vibration levels shall comply with ISO/ABS

BASED ON JOB #7811 REV. 0

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 2.0 - STEEL STRUCTURE .......................................................................................................... 2
2.1 CONSTRUCTION ......................................................................................................................... 2
2.2 HULL ............................................................................................................................................. 2
2.3 LEGS .............................................................................................................................................. 2
2.4 LEG GUIDE STRUCTURE ........................................................................................................... 2
2.5 SUPERSTRUCTURES AND HELIPORT .................................................................................... 3
2.6 DRILL FLOOR, SUBSTRUCTURE, AND CANTILEVER ......................................................... 4
2.7 BURNER BOOMS ......................................................................................................................... 6
2.8 BUILT-IN TANKS......................................................................................................................... 6
2.9 SEA CHEST ................................................................................................................................... 6
2.10 WELDING ..................................................................................................................................... 7
2.11 FOUNDATIONS ............................................................................................................................ 8
2.12 DERRICK....................................................................................................................................... 8


SECTION 2.0 - STEEL STRUCTURE

2.1 CONSTRUCTION

Workmanship shall be of good marine standard and meet the requirements of the Classification Society, the
Regulatory Bodies and the Builder's standards. Plating shall be erected reasonably fair. Beams, frames, girders,
etc., shall be installed fair and in proper alignment in accordance with regulatory and classification society standards
listed in Section 1. Bulkheads and decks shall be erected reasonably fair to provide a good appearance and prevent
the collection of water. Fairness shall generally be in accordance with regulatory and classification society
standards listed in Section 1. Openings and doubler and insert plates shall have well-rounded corners with ample
radii. During the outfitting of the Vessel, care shall be taken to keep the size and number of openings made in the
structure for the passage of piping, wiring, ventilation ducts, etc., to a minimum. Where openings are required, they
shall be carefully made, and the openings structurally reinforced where required according to construction standards
developed by the Builder and approved by the Owner and Classification Society. Openings, permanent or
temporary, in the primary structure shall be approved by the Owner and the Classification Society.

2.2 HULL

The hull material shall be as shown on the Contract Plans and selected for a Minimum Design Temperature (MDT)
of -20C.

Each tank required by the Classification Society to be hydrostatically tested shall be individually tested by an
approved procedure (air and water) and proven tight.

The configuration of the hull shall be constructed with a flat bottom profile. There shall be no bilge radius on the
hull. All connections between the side shell and bottom plate will be by fabricated plate intersection (square
corners). Adequate structure and/or reinforcement shall be provided in way of chocks, towing pads, and recessed
strongboxes along the transom for dry transport sea fastening, etc., as required. The stern strong boxes, all
combined, shall be designed to react a transverse load of 7,000 mt. and a longitudinal load of 5,000 mt.

All structure shall be designed to be within the normal Classification Society and Regulatory Body stress levels, but
in any event shall not have scantlings less than indicated on the Contract Plans, except where specifically approved
by the Owner and Designer.

Deck structure shall be designed for the deck loading specified in these Specifications and as shown on the Contract
Plans. Concentrated loads such as foundations, depending on the framing method used, may require changes in the
basic scantlings, in which case the changes shall be considered as a development of the design and not an extra.

The crane foundation locations are shown on the Contract Plans. The Builder shall provide foundations for the
specific cranes selected by Owner. Crane boom cradle supports with layered timber shall be provided by the Builder
for each of the cranes and a means of securing the booms during transit.

Centerline, port, and starboard main deck pipe rack structures will be provided for racking of drill pipe and/or
casing. The details of the pipe racks shall be as shown on the Contract Plans. Easily removable pipe stanchions (with
lifting attachments), and sockets shall be provided to subdivide the pipe rack into bays, and a tie-down system shall
be provided for securing tubulars while afloat. All main deck pipe rack areas outside the envelope of the cantilever
shall have permanent bulkheads at the forward end.

2.3 LEGS

Legs shall be as defined in the Contract Plans and Section 6 of these Specifications.

2.4 LEG GUIDE STRUCTURE

The leg guide structure shall be constructed as shown on the Contract Plans. The Builder shall align guides in the
hull with those of the jack case to insure proper operation of the jacking system. The construction tolerances
considered critical are as follows:

Pinion/Rack - The placement of the guides should be such that a contact ratio in excess of one is obtainable at all
positions of the chord within the guides or as approved by the Classification Society and Designer.


The legs must be manufactured within a tolerance that allows free movement of the legs through the guides as
positioned to satisfy the pinion/rack alignment described above.

The Builder shall propose a procedure for both installing the jack houses and verifying pinion and guide placement
that is to the satisfaction of the Owner, the Designer and the Classification Society.

2.5 SUPERSTRUCTURES AND HELIPORT

The forward superstructure houses all of the accommodation and shall have size, shape and scantlings as shown on
the Contract Plans. Headers shall be provided below the main deck for carrying the above deck structures loads into
the hull structure.

A truss structure forward of the bow leg supports the helicopter deck and the lifeboat davits below the helideck. The
helicopter platform shall be designed in accordance with Classification Society and Regulatory Bodies rules for a
Sikorsky S-92 (gross weight of 12 mt.) , S-61N (gross weight of 9.3 mt) or MI-17 (gross weight of 13.0 mt). The
edges of the deck around the heliport shall be fitted with a 1.52 m wide safety net consisting of chain link type,
galvanized or PVC coated, wire fencing supported by a 32 mm galvanized pipe framework. The netting shall be
securely lashed with stainless steel wire to the pipe frame to develop the strength of the netting and eliminate
unsightly drooping of the netting (excluding the net across the flats).

The hull shall be reinforced where the helicopter deck and lifeboat davit supports connect into the hull.

The helicopter deck shall be equipped with a landing net suitably tensioned to meet CAP 437, IMO and
Classification Society requirements.

The helicopter deck shall be equipped with three equal distant placed exits, one of which exits from the outer edge
of the deck, complete with vertical ladders and safety railings. Each exit is to have an adjacent manually operated
foam monitor and a storage facility for emergency equipment.

A periphery drain gutter system with at least three 100 mm (4) diameter drain pipe shall be provided. Sufficient
number of self-draining recessed helicopter tie down pads shall be provided. The helideck is to be completely
liquid tight. The drainage collection manifold shall allow single point collection of fluids into a container or direct
overboard discharge.

The helideck height above main deck shall be such that all structure, deck plating, safety netting, life boats, and
peripheral walkways and equipment will not dip into the sea under the maximum field move pitch / roll angle of the
Vessel. This angle shall be to the satisfaction of the Classification Society.

All superstructures shall be hose tested and proven tight as per Regulatory Body requirements.



2.6 DRILL FLOOR, SUBSTRUCTURE, AND CANTILEVER

The drill floor, substructure and cantilever shall be provided generally as called for on the Contract Plans; however,
the final arrangements shall be based on the drilling equipment selected by the Owner. The Builder shall verify all
equipment dimensions and local loadings and determine whether or not they are within the allowable loads shown
on the Contract Plans. The Builder shall bring to the Owners attention any major discrepancies. The Builder shall
be responsible for monitoring the final weights, details and adequacy of the deck structure for drill floor /
substructure / cantilever.

The drill floor shall be moved athwartship on the substructure using a hydraulically operated lift and roll system and
shall be capable of being positioned at any rotary well center location 4.6 m port or starboard of the hull centerline.
Guides shall be provided to keep the drill floor properly positioned on the substructure transverse skid rails.
Movable clamps shall ride with the drill floor to secure the drill floor to the substructure in any location.

The cantilever shall slide fore and aft on the main deck using a hydraulically operated skidding system. The
Cantilever shall be capable of being secured by the skidding system in any position.

The forward cantilever hold down clamp and the stern roller support structure are to be designed and located so as to
provide the maximum live drilling loads given in Section 1.5.

The drill floor shall support the following and other BFE or OFE equipment, as listed in Sections 17 and 18 of the
Specification, installed on the drill floor, including but not limited to the following:

ITEM Description

a) Derrick
b) Drawworks, including motors and brakes incl. ventilation and cooling.
c) Rotary table
d) Setback area
e) Drawworks house and Wind Walls
f) Dead line anchor
g) Top Drive System
h) Manifolds (C&K, Cement, Mud, Cement Wash down)
i) Iron Roughneck
j) Offline Iron Roughneck
k) Offline Activity Crane
l) Hydraulic Power Unit
m) Mud Gas Separator
n) Drillers House, including instrumentation and equipment control packages
o) Brake Water Cooling Package
p) PLC room
q) BOP Control Panels
r) Air Hoists
s) LIR and LER, Local Instrument and Local Electric Rooms
t) Mouse Hole
u) Auxiliary Mouse Hole
v) Tong Posts
w) Derrick Lighting
x) Powered Wire Line Reel
y) Wire Line Measuring Unit
z) Choke Manifold Control Panels
aa) Rig Floor Hydraulic Manifold
bb) Compressed Air Receiver
cc) Diverter Control Panel / Manifold


dd) Hydraulic Cathead
ee) Diverter with Hydraulic Ball Valves
ff) Secondary Conductor Tensioning Cylinders
gg) Workbench, lockers, etc.
hh) Casing Stabbing Basket

The drill floor in the areas indicated on the Contract Plans shall be strong enough to withstand the impact of a 27.4
m stand of 241.3 mm drill collars (90 ft. stand of 9 drill collars) dropped from a height of 1.0 meter. There shall be
provided impact resistant sub-flooring beneath the drill floor as required withstanding such impact. The setback
area shall have two (2) 75 mm layer of hardwood decking. This decking is built up in two layers, set apart 90 and
lined with bitumen in between the layers of hardwood.

Beneath the drill floor a system of access gratings, ladders, rails, etc., shall be provided for access to brake water-
cooling system, air receiver, mud return system, diverter and other equipment. A 6 mm thick drain pan shall be
provided beneath the drawworks and rotary to collect all pollutants and direct them down to the skimmer tank.

The drill floor shall be provided with a system of gutters, drains and deluge system as called for in Section 14.

The drill floor shall be provided with a wind wall, complete with sliding doors, a drawworks shed and a wind wall at
the monkey board level. The Builder shall develop, subject to Owner approval, the structure for these using the
design criteria set forth in the specification to meet the requirements of the Regulatory Bodies. The weight of these
structures shall be held to a minimum; therefore, the construction need not be similar to that of the superstructure.
Top of drawworks house to have minimum slope, design for 0.24 mt./m
2
loading and shall be fitted with hand rails.
Composite materials shall be used for wind walls, etc. wherever allowed by the Regulatory Bodies and the
Classification Society. Access shall be provided, either by walkways at the aft end of the drill floor or removable
panels on the aft side of the wind walls, to allow a rig mover a clear view to the stern of the Vessel.

There shall be a unitized, enclosed, air-conditioned driller's house installed on the drill floor. The house shall fully
enclose all driller's instrumentation and controls for all the drill floor machinery and systems, pipe handling
system(s), and other operational panels and alarms.

There shall be installed in the derrick a pipe racking system that facilitates racking of pipe on the drill floor, a Top
Drive drilling system, a TDS parking system, and a casing stabbing basket, including all of the associated
mechanical, electrical, hydraulic, and ventilation systems.

The cantilever substructure shall support the following equipment or as otherwise indicated in Sections 17 and 18,
including but not limited to:

a) BOP Handler, Service Bridge Crane and BOP Horizontal Restraint System (HRS) Winches.
b) BOP(s)
c) BOP test unit
d) Primary Conductor Pipe Tensioning Support Cylinders, accumulators and Control System
(CTU)
e) Conductor Tensioner Platform (CTP)
f) CTP Support Brackets
g) Movable CTP Walkways
h) Trip and Stripping Tanks and Pumps
i) BOP Carts
j) Scalper Shakers
k) Drill floor and All Machinery
l) Mud Processing Equipment and Tanks
m) Mud Lab and Test Equipment
n) BOP Closing Unit and Bottle Storage Racks
o) Cementing Package
p) Not used
q) Skimmer Tank


r) Electric Equipment Room
s) Centrifuges and Pumps
t) Mud Logging Unit
u) Hydraulic Power Unit

A system to support and handle the BOPs shall be installed consisting of a 125 Ton Bridge Crane, which travels on
trolley beams running longitudinally beneath the drill floor. Builder shall install four manually operated BOP
stabilizer winches (14,000 lb. capacity) and fairleads.

Removable test/assembly stumps for BOP stack(s) shall be installed on provided storage cart(s). The storage carts
shall be movable fore and aft from test/assembly area to staging area, using a hydraulic skidding system. Above the
BOP test / assembly area a single 35 mt. Service Bridge Crane with two (2) 17.5 mt. trolleys shall be installed that
travels on trolley beams running transversely across the full width of the storage area.

The BOP closing unit shall be installed under the elevated pipe rack within the forward end of the cantilever
structure main and mezzanine decks. All necessary piping and fittings will be furnished by the Builder to locate full
function control panels at the unit, on the drill floor, in the toolpusher's office, and on the main deck.

The third party cementing package with batch mixing plant, liquid additive tanks, etc. shall be installed under the
cantilever pipe rack deck within the forward end of the cantilever structure. The installation shall include all service
piping to and discharge or drain piping from the cementation package as well as any instrumentation, electrical or
otherwise, control cables, electric power, communication, alarm, lighting, etc. systems. The area surrounding the
cementing engine package shall be classed A-60.

A pipe rack structure, approximately 30.5 m long x 18.3 m wide will be provided atop the cantilever beams with
transverse pipe rack beams and removable pinned socket type stanchions.

The details of the pipe rack shall be as shown on the Contract Plans. Easily removable pipe stanchions (with lifting
attachments), and sockets shall be provided to subdivide the pipe rack into bays, and a tie-down system shall be
provided for securing tubulars while afloat. Hatches shall be installed in the pipe rack to provide access for the
removal of cuttings.

The elevated pipe rack will be outfitted with a drain system as provided in Section 14.

2.7 BURNER BOOMS

See Section 3.27

2.8 BUILT-IN TANKS

Built-in tanks shall be provided where shown to accommodate fresh water, fuel oil, lube oil, waste oil, base oil,
mud, contaminated drains, etc., as required. Mud pits shall be covered and ventilated according to the Contract
Plans.

All inner bottom voids, preload, brine and drill water tanks shall be fitted with approved docking plugs. Each plug
shall be accessible from inside the tank. The locations of the plugs shall consistently be adjacent to the tank access
ladder landing. The design of the plug shall incorporate a cross bar to allow the plug to be struck with a hammer to
loosen and remove it. The threaded portion of the plugs shall be generously lubricated with Never-Seize.

Where fittings are required during construction for erecting scaffolding, they shall be designed and arranged so that
they can be left installed to facilitate support of scaffolding for future repairs, maintenance or inspection.

2.9 SEA CHEST

Sea chests shall be provided with sacrificial anodes, see Section 8.16.3. The shell plating shall have heavy inserts in way
of sea chests to compensate for the openings and all sides of the sea chests shall have a plate thickness equal to the shell
thickness. All sea chests shall be fitted with strainer plates of 16 mmstainless steel with 25 mmdiameter holes on 38


mmcenters. Strainers shall be attached with 316 stainless steel bolts and nuts so that the latter is flush with the shell.
The free area through the strainer shall be at least twice that of the combined cross sectional area of the connections.

Air flushing of the sea chest is to be provided. Valves shall be located as close as possible to the shell. All bolting shall
be 316 stainless steel.

Two sea chests to be provided in the bottom plate of the hull. Locations shall be shown on the Contract Drawings.

2.10 WELDING

All welding shall be subject to rigid inspection and approval of the Owner, his authorized representatives and the
Classification Society. Builders welding inspectors (direct employees or subcontractors) shall be currently
qualified as ASNT-TC1A Level II for the NDT processes, which they are performing. All NDT processes are to be
performed according to approved written procedures. All NDT equipment shall have current calibration
certification where applicable. Builders welding inspectors performing visual inspection shall be currently
qualified according to the requirements of AWS D1.1 or as required by the Classification Society.

All welds shall be shown on the working drawings using standard industry symbols and call outs. All welding
processes, including repair processes, shall be documented by written procedures (WPS). All WPS shall be
qualified (PQR) according to AWS, ANSI/ASME, and the Classification Society. All of Builders welders (direct
employees or subcontractors) shall be qualified (WQR) to the qualified welding processes they are using.

All welds shall be 100% visually inspected, and NDT inspected according to industry standards and Classification
Society requirements as detailed below.

Industrial radiographic sequences shall be prepared and submitted to the Owner and the Classification Society.
Radiographs shall be as per Classification Society requirement. The minimum extent of this inspection shall be as
follows:

Hull structure weldments shall be non-destructively tested in accordance with the requirements of
the Classification Society and the Regulatory Bodies.

All welds at the attachment of jacks, chock supports, cantilever hold down clamps, supporting
structure, and connecting primary bulkheads shall be tested 100 % by Radiographic Testing (RT)
or Ultrasonic Testing (UT) as accepted by the Owner, the Classification Society and the
Regulatory Bodies.

All welds in the crane support structures and their attachments to the hull shall be tested 100 % by
RT or UT as accepted by the Owner, the Classification Society and the Regulatory Bodies.

Welding inspection of the legs is covered in Section 6 of this specification.

The Owner will be allowed 100 additional RT randomshots to be taken at locations as directed in
the hull, substructure, foundations, etc. For each rejected X-ray, two additional X-rays shall be
provided at no additional cost to the Owner.

Should visual inspection show that thickness, surface contour, or appearance of continuity of any strength weld is not in
accordance with the applicable approved working drawing or should radiographic, magnetic particle or ultrasonic
examination and testing of any weld indicate defect of an unacceptable nature as determined by standards of the
Classification Society, the weld shall be carefully cut out over the full extent of the defect, re-welded, and the quality of
the final re-weld determined by similar methods of inspection at Builder's expense.

All welds shall have adequate penetration and shall be reasonably free fromundercutting. A maximumof 3 mm
reinforcement will be allowed on butt welds.

Intermittent welding of scantlings is not allowed. The welding of all beams, brackets, stiffeners, etc., above or below
deck shall be continuously welded on both sides of the member to seal the faying surfaces and prevent corrosion.



2.11 FOUNDATIONS

General

It shall explicitly be the responsibility of the Builder to design and provide all needed foundations plus under deck
support for proper distribution of loads into the structure for all machinery, equipment, structures and outfitting as shown
on the Drawings or listed in Specifications, whether OFE or BFE. The Builder shall submit plans of all equipment
foundations to Owner and the Classification Society for their approval and comments, before commencing construction.

Layouts of the individual pieces of equipment shown on the Contract Plans are meant for general guidance and are
subject to relocation by the Owner and the Builder to suit local conditions and/or operational requirements. Relocation
of equipment by the Builder must be approved by the Owner. Relocation of equipment by the Owner, which causes an
impact on cost or schedule, must be negotiated with the Builder. Minor relocation of individual equipment after
discussion and before construction should not be considered as causing impact on cost and schedule.

Vibration and Deflections

Special attention shall be given to providing sufficient rigidity of the foundation support structure, and to the cushioning
and restraint of piping, machinery or equipment, so as to minimize or otherwise control vibrations and consequent
transmission of noise and/or vibrations through the Vessel's structure to acceptable levels. Particular attention shall also
be paid to limiting any relative deflections of foundations to insure positive alignments are maintained on machinery and
to avoid any damaging effects on bearings, etc.

Foundation Design

Foundations shall be designed to act as complete supports, against all loading conditions, independent of the casing,
frame bed plate, or other part of the supported panels, equipment, or machinery and in accordance with manufacturers
recommendations. Equipment furnished on oil field skids may be mounted on deck pads with under deck chocking at
structural intersection with the specific approval of the Owner. Foundations shall be designed to preclude development
of thermal stresses in either the foundation or in supported heat producing equipment.

Foundations for equipment shall be designed for a combined static and dynamic load of 1.5 G vertical and 0.5 G
horizontal for roll and pitch.

Changes to Owner Furnished Equipment

Where Contract Plans show details of some foundations, it is to be understood that they are indicated for Builder's
guidance at bid stage as to the general principles of design and to show the minimumstandard of strength expected for
an assumed typical make of the equipment involved. The actual foundations in all details to suit the final selected
equipment in each case, shall remain within the Builder's scope of design and supply, and shall be subject to Owner's
review and approval as already noted in this Section. The Owner may also change the manufacturer of any equipment
specified in these Specifications and substitute a unit of similar size and weight without incurring any extra costs or
delays, if this is done prior to issuing certified drawings to shipyard for foundations or within ninety days of the contract
date, whichever is later. Any equipment change, which causes an increase in installation cost or schedule, shall be
negotiated by the Owner and the Builder.

2.12 DERRICK

The Derrick Vendor shall provide derrick builders to assemble the derrick and supervise its installation on board the
Vessel. The Builder shall provide cranes (with operators, riggers, etc.) and services necessary to assist with assembly
and installation.

The Builder is to outfit the derrick per the Specifications, including miscellaneous structure, lighting, piping, etc.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 3.0 - HULL FITTINGS AND ACCESS ....................................................................... 1
3.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................... 1
3.2 WATERTIGHT DOORS .......................................................................................................... 1
3.3 WEATHER TIGHT DOORS .................................................................................................... 1
3.4 NON-TIGHT DOORS ............................................................................................................... 1
3.5 WIRE MESH DOORS ............................................................................................................... 2
3.6 GAS-TIGHT DOORS ................................................................................................................ 2
3.7 J OINER DOORS ........................................................................................................................ 2
3.8 MANHOLES ............................................................................................................................... 2
3.9 HATCHES ................................................................................................................................... 2
3.10 LADDERS AND STAIRWAYS .............................................................................................. 3
3.11 RAILS .......................................................................................................................................... 4
3.12 WINDOWS ................................................................................................................................. 4
3.13 DECK FITTINGS ....................................................................................................................... 4
3.14 GRATINGS AND FLOOR PLATES ...................................................................................... 5
3.15 PAD EYES .................................................................................................................................. 5
3.16 LIFE BOATS AND LIFE RAFT DAVITS ............................................................................ 5
3.17 COAMINGS ................................................................................................................................ 6
3.18 PROTECTION FENCES ............................................................................................................ 6
3.19 HOSE HANDLING AND LOADING STATIONS .............................................................. 6
3.20 MUD PIT COVER ..................................................................................................................... 6
3.21 DRAWWORKS HOUSE AND WIND SCREEN ................................................................. 6
3.22 ACCESS PLATFORMS AND LADDERS ............................................................................ 7
3.23 DOCKING PLUGS .................................................................................................................... 7
3.24 CANTILEVER SERVICE HOSE CONNECTION PLATFORM ...................................... 7
3.25 DRAG CHAINS ......................................................................................................................... 7
3.26 BURNER BOOM SUPPORT TOWERS ................................................................................ 8


SECTION 3.0 - HULL FITTINGS AND ACCESS
3.1 GENERAL

Careful consideration must be given to the possible future removal of major equipment items (e.g. main
engine-generator sets, mud pumps, etc.). The Builder is to produce plans for such equipment replacement,
including provision of soft patches in bulkheads and decks and lifting fittings as required.

Provisions shall also be made for removal of machinery components, such as parts, pumps, etc., for the
purpose of maintenance or repair. Any areas of gratings, ladders, piping, etc., which must be removed for
machinery removal, shall be made readily portable for this purpose. Load rated lifting eyes shall be
provided and proof load tested in all applicable areas (see 3.15).

Provisions shall be made for safe access to any valve or fitting which is to be operated. Devices such as
tank air pipe, tank sounding pipe, ventilation fans, valve handles, etc arranged on the main deck, mud pit
cover shall not impede passageways. Builder's standards will be considered for approval of all types of
doors, access hatches, manholes, etc., provided they meet the requirements of the regulatory bodies and
approval of the Owner.

Tops of doors shall be not less than 2.0 m above top of finished deck or step. Doors shall be as shown on
the Contract Plans and generally shall be 760 mm minimum width except stateroom doors which may be
660 mm wide.

Exterior doors are to have watersheds above the door openings to prevent dripping of water from the top of
the doorway.
3.2 WATERTIGHT DOORS

Watertight-hinged doors shall be installed below the main deck and in booby hatches and quarters on the
main deck, as indicated on Contract Plans and/or required by regulatory bodies. Doors shall be of marine
type, constructed of steel, quick acting, wheel-operated, fitted with six dogs with clips and a rubber gasket.
Hinges and dogs shall be fitted with bronze bushings and grease fittings. All doors on the main deck are to
be fitted with a 6 mm steel clip with mating clip on bulkheads for locking with a padlock where permitted
by the Regulatory Bodies. Where not permitted, a means of securing doors during stacked conditions is to
be provided. Doors shall open out.

3.3 WEATHER TIGHT DOORS

Weather tight doors shall be constructed and outfitted similarly to watertight doors except that only four
dogs are required.

3.4 NON-TIGHT DOORS

Non-tight doors shall be of flat or dished plate steel construction, and as light as practicable, but offering
good resistance to distortion in any direction. Corners and edges shall be well rounded. Non-tight doors
shall be fitted to internal lockers, storerooms, etc., except in accommodation and control spaces where
joiner doors shall be fitted.



3.5 WIRE MESH DOORS

Hinged expanded metal doors, with suitable hardware and constructed as described below shall be located
where shown on the Contract Plans.

3.6 GAS TIGHT DOORS

Fume-tight self-closing doors shall be fitted in the paint locker, if below deck, bulkhead between mud
pump room and the mud pit room, other locations shown below the pipe rack deck and as necessary and/or
as required by the regulatory agencies. The doors shall be similar to the metal joiner doors and a soft
rubber gasket shall be fit into a recess in the doorframe and sill. Doors shall be 38 mm thick, insulation
filled, reinforced for three pairs of butts. Door cladding and hardware shall be stainless steel.

Doors between hazardous and safe areas shall be installed in airlocks as shown on the Contract Plans.

All hazardous areas are to have gas-tight escape hatches or doors, approximately 750 mm x 750 mm in
size, for egress to safe areas.

3.7 JOINER DOORS

All inside doors in accommodation spaces, not otherwise designated, shall be insulation filled, hollow steel
and flush type.

Doors in passages or where subject to through traffic, such as between mess rooms and recreation rooms
and elsewhere as indicated on Contract Plans shall be self-closing and shall be fitted with 250 mm diameter
port light with wire inserted glass at eye level. These doors are to be fitted with stainless steel push and kick
plates.

3.8 MANHOLES

Oil-tight or watertight flush surface mount or raised manholes, not less than 600 mm x 800 mm elliptical or
900 mm round clear opening large enough to allow access by a man wearing self-contained breathing
apparatus, shall be provided for access to void spaces, tanks (preload, brine, drill water, etc.) and other
compartments as necessary. Manholes are to have bolted plate covers with appropriate gaskets and be
secured with stainless steel studs and bronze nuts. Manholes located on vertical surfaces shall be provided
with suitable handles and shall be raised flanged openings so that covers can be removed with nuts and
bolts (dowel pin shall be provided to align / support cover during installation). Recessed deck manholes
shall be fitted for lifting lugs. Manhole covers shall have a chain welded to underside and inside tank
(keeper chain). Coamings on preload tank manholes shall be of a height and size that would be exempt
from admeasurements by the Classification Society. Fresh water tanks shall be fitted with raised manholes.

3.9 HATCHES

Water tight hatches for handling stores, sacks, machinery parts, etc., shall be installed on the main deck.
The hatches shall have sizes as shown on the Contract Plans and shall be hinged (HRWTH) or bolted
(BWTH), steel watertight covers. Covers shall have rubber gaskets and shall be secured with stainless steel
bolts and nuts or dogs. Covers shall be flush or mounted on coamings meeting regulatory body


requirements for height and scantlings. Ring bolts for lifting covers and hold back hooks shall be provided.
The cranes shall handle the covers.

Hatches installed below the main deck shall be of watertight, non tight or fume tight flush construction as
indicated on the integral watertight integrity plan. Hatch sizes shall be as shown on the Contract Drawings.
The construction of these hatches shall be similar to the watertight hatches, except that a hand winch and
pulley system may be used to open and close the hatch covers (other means, such as motor driven, either
electrical or hydraulic is also optional).

Coamings for the main deck sack storage and main store hatches are to be 1.07 meter high. For other
hatches, doors are to be operable on both sides with handles. All hatches with coamings of less than 1.07
meter height shall have permanent sockets affixed for Builder supplied removable handrails.

3.10 LADDERS AND STAIRWAYS

3.10.1 Stairways

Stairways shall be located as shown on the Contract Plans and shall be constructed of composite
materials wherever allowed by the Regulatory Bodies and Classification Society. Stairways shall
have a slope not greater than 45 in the accommodation and escape ways and 50 in machinery
spaces to the horizontal unless specifically approved by Owner. Stairways shall be not less than
920 mm wide. Stairway steps shall be fitted with prefabricated fiberglass treads with anti-slip
nosings, and exterior stair treads shall have adequate holes for drainage to prevent ice buildup.

The Builder shall furnish removable stairways for each cantilever beam for access from the main
deck to the elevated pipe rack walkways. These stairways shall be arranged to accommodate the
full range of cantilever travel.

Stairways shall have galvanized metal sheet underneath where required for the protection against
dust and debris for equipment and personnel.

3.10.2 Vertical Ladders

Vertical ladders shall be provided for access into all tanks and compartments for inspection as
required. The ladders shall be located so that they will be placed in line with the access opening
above and reasonably recessed under the deck as necessary to keep the ladder clear of the opening.
Vertical ladders, hand grabs, individual ladder rungs, etc., which are to be located in salt or
freshwater tanks, shall be galvanized prior to installation.

Vertical ladders access via manholes shall be positioned towards the short dimension of the
manhole (for easier access by personnel wearing SCBA gear).

A landing platform, approximately 1850 mm (6) below the manhole access, shall be located
adjacent to the vertical ladder in each deep tank. Platform size should be approximately 900 x 900
mm, with handrail on the three non-access sides. There shall be an inclined ladder fromthe
platform to the bottomof the tank.

Particular consideration will be paid to the selection of all ladder materials. Safety cages and
landing platforms shall be fitted as per Regulatory Bodies requirements (except for preload tank
ladders and leg ladders).



3.11 RAILS

3.11.1 Pipe Rails

Open pipe rails shall be installed on the periphery of all weather decks, inclined ladders, fairleads,
life boat stations, stairways and platforms, with the exception of the helicopter platformand areas
protected by bulwarks and house sides. Pipe rails shall be fiberglass wherever allowed by the
Regulatory bodies and Classification Society. All steel pipe rails shall be fabricated frombent pipe
(not welded elbows).

Open pipe rails shall be 3 courses, 1.2 meter high, with stanchions and top rail of 40 NB SCH 40
pipe. The two lower rails shall be 25 NB SCH 40 pipe. Rails installed on exterior (weather) areas
shall be galvanized.

Rails installed in interior areas need not be galvanized. Rails and stanchions at material handling
areas shall be 80 NB SCH XS pipe.

Machinery spaces shall have rails around all open areas and as necessary for the protection of
personnel from hot equipment.

Pipe rails and stanchions at the periphery of the main deck, in way of crane loading areas, shall be
80 NB SCH XS galvanized pipe.

All pipe rails shall be equipped with 150 mm kick plates (toe boards) as required by Regulatory
Bodies.

3.11.2 Chain Rails

Suitable two course railings of chain rail and portable stanchions with all appropriate fittings shall
be provided for all access and equipment, which require temporary railings for safety while
accesses are in use. The use of chain rails shall generally be avoided as far as possible.

3.11.3 Grab Rails and Storm Rails

Hand grabs of hard wood or non-conductive material shall be provided in way of all electrical
switchboards. Stormrails shall be provided in all passageways, outside of deckhouses, and
elsewhere as required.

3.12 WINDOWS

Marine windows shall be of a type, fire rating class and placement in accordance with Regulatory Body
requirements approved by the Classification Society. Such windows shall be installed according to
manufacturers requirements and as generally shown on the Contract Plans.

3.13 DECK FITTINGS

3.13.1 Bitts and Chocks

Bitts, chocks, etc., of the size and location as shown on the Contract Plans and as described herein
shall be provided by the Builder for mooring or towing as appropriate. All bitts and closed chocks
located at the edge of main deck shall be positioned so that the mooring line or towline will not


chafe on the deck or other structures at any normal operating angle of incidence to the deck or hull.
Chaffing bars are to be provided as required.

Panama Chocks with a minimumopening of at least 460 mm x 250 mm, ASTM F 936-85, cast
steel, type I (deck mounted), grade 2, material ASTM A 27/A 27M grade 60-30 (material marked
per ASTM F 936 Section 9), or equivalent as approved by Classification Society.

3.13.2 Towing Pads

Five (5) 82.5 mm chain Smit towing pads, rated at 225 Tonnes SWL, shall be provided on the
bow (two port, two starboard, and one on centerline). Two pair of 63.5 mm chain towing pads,
rated at 150 mt. SWL, shall be provided on the stern (one pair port and one pair starboard). Nine
heavy fairleads for towing bridle are to be installed in line with the towing pads. The aft corner
mounted towing line fairlead must have a 180 clear arc with the mid point being at right angles
to a line drawn from the fairlead to the centre line of the rig, as shown on the Contract Plans.

3.14 GRATINGS AND FLOOR PLATES

Fiberglass open gratings shall be installed where indicated on the Contract Plans and elsewhere as may be
required. Galvanized steel open gratings may only be used where fiberglass is not allowed by the
Classification Society or the Regulatory Bodies.

Removable galvanized raised pattern floor plates shall be provided in the machinery spaces, on machinery
space platforms and as necessary for convenient access to and operation of all machinery and controls.
Floor plates, in general, shall be designed for 1.0 mt./m
2
. Landing platforms shall be designed for the
equipment or materials to be handled. Floor plates shall be 42.5 Kg/m
2
raised pattern, non-skid plates.
Where required to provide maintenance access, floor plates shall be secured to a sub-floor of angle supports
with flush stainless steel flat head countersunk machine screws.

Nonskid walk ways are to be painted showing the routes to be used for access / egress in an emergency
from all locations both above and below deck.

3.15 PAD EYES

Suitable load rated pad eyes and fittings shall be provided and welded on decks, overheads, bulkheads,
shell, hatch openings, etc., for the securing of and/or lifting of equipment, crane load testing or other
necessary service in all spaces requiring maintenance. Testing and marking of pad eyes shall be in
accordance with Sections 1 and 12. Location and size of all pad eyes shall be proposed by the Builder and
to be approved by Owner.

Recessed pad eyes (tie downs) shall be installed on the helicopter platform for securing helicopters.
Locations shall be as directed by the Owner and required by the Regulatory Bodies. Recesses shall be
fitted with drains connected to the helicopter deck drain system.

3.16 LIFE BOATS / LIFE RAFT DAVITS

The Builder shall furnish and install foundations and access/handling platforms for the lifeboats and
MOB/FRC, davits and associated handling gear described in Section 7 at the locations shown in the
Contract Plans.



The Builder shall design, fabricate, and install foundations and access/handling platforms for the liferaft
launching davits and associated equipment and gear.

3.17 COAMINGS

Water tight coamings shall be provided around all machinery units such as water makers, diesel generators,
mud pumps, mud mixing and charging pumps, fire pumps, etc. These coamings shall be 6 mm x 100 mm
steel flat bars welded continuously on both sides. Deck drains shall be provided from within coamings.

The edge of every floor, gangway and stairway, and all openings from which a person could fall more than
1.8 m, or into the sea, shall where practicable, be provided with a toe board not less than 150 mm high.

3.18 PROTECTION FENCES

A metal structure with wooden inserts, approximately 7.5 meters high, shall be provided at the forward end
of all pipe racks to protect ventilators and other equipment and controls on deck from damage by drilling
tubulars, when moved by the crane. The structures shall consist of 50 mm oak or similar hardwood timbers
attached to the flanges of H beam stanchions. The stanchions shall be on approximately 1.8 m centers
and shall be suitably braced.

All bolting for the fences is to be stainless steel and counter-sunk.

Structures of similar construction are to be installed on the main deck as required to protect ventilators,
hatches, machinery, etc. from damage.

3.19 HOSE HANDLING AND LOADING STATIONS

The Builder is to design, fabricate and install port and starboard loading stations, generally, as located on
the Contract Plans.

The loading valves shall be located within easy reach of the rig personnel. Racks for the supply boat end of
the hoses shall also be located within easy reach of both rig personnel and cranes.

3.20 MUD PIT COVER

The mud pit is to be covered with a raised deck fabricated from 42 Kg/m or equal raised pattern, non-skid
plate supported by an angle frame. Hinged hatches shall be provided for access into each pit and for access
to equipment, mud guns, etc., as required. Flush type hand grabs shall be provided on all hatches. The area
between the cover and top of the mud pits is to be ventilated by an independent ventilation system. See
Section 10 for a description of the ventilation system.

Mud pit access hatches should be fitted with coamings and the lids should have a rubber seal and fitted with
securing dogs to allow the carriage of liquid mud when under tow (field moves).

3.21 DRAWWORKS HOUSE AND WIND SCREEN



The Builder shall design, furnish and install a drawworks house. The drawworks house, enclosed on three
sides, is to be 4800 mm high and extend the full length of the drill floor and cover the drawworks with a
sloping roof over. The drawworks house is to be corrugated steel plate with the corrugations extending
away from the drill floor. The drawworks house shall have four (4) commercial heavy duty single hung
windows glazed with 10 mm heat treated wire reinforced glass. An H-beam over the centerline of the
drawworks drum capable of lifting 5.5 mt. shall be incorporated into the house structure.

Foundations shall be provided on the roof of the drawworks house to accommodate the drawworks motor
blowers, brake cooling unit radiators, wire line unit, etc.

A wind screen shall be designed, fabricated and installed by the Builder around the drill floor. The screen
shall be 3000 mm high and is open in way of the V-door ramp and access ladder. The top of the wind
screen shall project back and upwards into the derrick. The wind screen is to be corrugated steel plate with
the corrugations extending away from the drill floor.

Access stairs shall be provided to the top of the drawworks house. Vertical ladders shall provide access to
the top of the wind screen. The wind screen shall have six (6) windows similar to the drawworks house.

3.22 ACCESS PLATFORMS AND LADDERS

Platforms with ladders shall be designed, fabricated and installed by Builder to make all vent closures,
valves, and other equipment that needs to be frequently maintained or used accessible.

A platform to support the well logging unit and tool house shall be provided by the Builder on the starboard
side of the cantilever beam generally as shown on the Contract Plans. The well logging unit shall have
unobstructed access to the well over the entire drilling pattern.

3.23 DOCKING PLUGS

See Section 2.8

3.24 CANTILEVER SERVICE HOSE CONNECTION PLATFORM

The Builder is to design, fabricate and install a service hose connection platform on the starboard side of
the cantilever beam generally as shown on the Contract Plans. This platform is to be elevated above the
main deck and of sufficient size and capacity to support all pipe terminations and hoses supplying services
to the cantilever and drill floor. The elevation is to be such that the hoses do not contact the main deck
when the connections on the platform and cantilever are at minimum offset. The Builder is to provide
supports for the cantilever ends of all hoses when the cantilever is the fully retracted.

3.25 DRAG CHAINS

Stainless steel drag chains are to be furnished and installed by the Builder to provide for the longitudinal
movement of the cantilever beam and transverse movement of the drill floor. The drag chains are to be
sized to accommodate all power, control, instrumentation, communication, etc. services required between
the hull, cantilever and drill floor. A spare capacity of 15 % is to be provided in both drag chains.

The Builder is to design, fabricate and install the drag chain, support structure, end terminations, etc. to
provide a complete and fit for purpose installation.


3.26 BURNER BOOM SUPPORT TOWERS

Appropriate foundations, supports, reinforcements, support and stowage tower, etc. for the Owner supplied
burner booms shall be designed, fabricated and installed by the Builder, on port and starboard aft side of
the drilling unit, generally as shown on the Contract Plans. A water curtain pipe system shall be burner
boom mounted as well as a handrail nozzle system.

Both burner booms shall be stowed in the vertical position when not in use. The deck cranes are used to
raise and lower the burner booms.

Burner booms are stowed in vertical open frame trussed towers with platform(s) at the securing level for
access. Access to the platform(s) is via vertical ladder(s). The burner booms shall be secured to the tower
by a system of locking pins and pad eyes when in the stowed position.

A universal joint type pivoting foundation shall support the burner booms at the main deck level. This
foundation permits the burner boom to hinge vertically for stowage or horizontally for operation or access
to the burner head for maintenance or removal.

In the horizontal position, the booms are supported by stays attached to the top of the tower. A pivot at the
upper end of the stay permits horizontal rotation of the burner boom.

Horizontal movement of the burner boom is by wire rope guide lines attached to the forward and aft sides
of the boom and connected to air hoists on the main deck.


TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 4.0 - INSULATION, J OINER WORK AND DECK COVERING ............................... 1
4.1 TEMPERATURE INSULATION ............................................................................................. 1
4.2 ACOUSTIC INSULATION ....................................................................................................... 1
4.3 REFRIGERATED SPACES ...................................................................................................... 1
4.4 J OINER WORK .......................................................................................................................... 1
4.5 FLOOR COVERING .................................................................................................................. 2
4.6 STRUCTURAL FIRE PROTECTION .................................................................................... 3


SECTION 4.0 - INSULATION, JOINER WORK AND DECK COVERING

4.1 TEMPERATURE INSULATION

Inside surfaces of all accommodation spaces and other conditioned spaces, which are exposed to the
weather or are adjacent to excessively heated spaces, pump rooms, or machinery spaces shall have such
exposed portions covered with insulation material. Total thickness of this material shall be equivalent to
50mm thick insulation in vertical and 100 mm thick in overhead spaces with a K value of 0.03 Kcal/mhC.,
16 Kg/m
3
density fiberglass or equal. This insulation shall cover the inside surface of the bulkhead and
overhead and any flanges bearing on this plating.

All surfaces of living or public spaces in way of unheated or excessively heated spaces, such as machinery
spaces, galley, etc., shall be insulated to a 150 mm thickness or greater, or as may be required by
Regulatory Bodies. Insulation shall be applied on heated side where practical.

All blanket or felt type insulation shall be impaled in weld studs with a spacing pattern not over 300 mm on
centers in any direction and not more than 75 mm from the edges and secured by speed clips. Exposed
insulation shall be covered with heavy fiberglass cloth suitable for paint application without degradation of
thermal properties. In areas subject to normal physical contact, a protective metal covering shall be
installed over fiberglass cloth.

4.2 ACOUSTIC INSULATION

In way of all noisy spaces adjacent to or within quarters, medics stateroom / hospital, or control rooms,
such as AHU rooms, etc., insulation shall be provided against sound transmission on bulkheads, decks
and overheads. Insulation shall comply with Regulatory Bodies requirements.

Builder shall take care to select materials and use design details that will minimize noise levels within the
accommodation spaces.

Warning notices shall be posted at entrance to such spaces where the noise level is in excess of 85 dB.(A).

All windows in acoustically insulated spaces shall be double-glazed.

4.3 REFRIGERATED SPACES

The built-in refrigerated stores boxes shall be in accordance with Section 11, "Ship Service Refrigeration".

4.4 JOINER WORK

4.4.1 General

All joiner work throughout the vessel, including furring and trim, shall meet the requirements of
the Classification Society, Regulatory Bodies and as specified herein.

4.4.2 Ceilings

Ceilings shall be at least 2.30 m above the finished floor and of a noise absorption type shall be
fitted in all staterooms, galley, public spaces, offices and elsewhere as required to cover all
insulation. Where no ceilings are provided, suitable fiberglass cloth or sheet metal shall be
provided to protect the insulation.



4.4.3 J oiner Bulkheads and Lining

Joiner bulkheads and linings for accommodations, including control room, living and working
spaces, recreation and mess room, store rooms, passageways, toilet and shower spaces, change
rooms, hospital, staterooms and other spaces may be metal or an approved type joiner panel.
Removable panels shall be provided in way of areas, which may require future access for
maintenance (e.g. piping connections, cable trunks, valves or apparatus).

4.4.4 Galley Sheathing

Galley sheathing shall be stainless steel, attached to galvanized angle furring with stainless steel
sheet metal screws.

4.4.5 Toilet & Shower Modules

All toilet and shower spaces are to be of the prefabricated self-contained construction. The
modules are to be made of either FRP or aluminumand shall be completely outfitted and ready for
installation in the accommodations. The interior bulkheads, ceiling and deck are to be pre-finished.
All fixtures, shower, toilet and lavatory, and their associated shower and lavatory control valves,
etc. are to be installed and connected. The modules shall be completely outfitted with such items
as, but not limited to, medicine cabinet and shelf, toothbrush and cup holders (2 each), towel bars
(2), toilet paper holder, shower curtain rod, hand grabs in shower, clothes hooks, etc.

All plumbing fixtures shall be suitable for operation with a vacuumcollection system.

All services, hot and cold water, sewage, shower, lavatory and scupper drains, electrical and
ventilation, shall be installed, connected to their proper component and terminated at a common
location for connection to the various rig systems.

Units shall be right and left handed so that two modules can be installed adjacent to each other and
services from both modules terminate in one location.

Exterior services are to be pre-finished to match the adjoining joiner bulkheads or covered with
joiner liner panels.

All lavatory, shower, scupper, etc. fixtures are to be triple chrome plated brass or stainless steel.

4.5 FLOOR COVERING

The floor base of staterooms, offices, control rooms, recreation rooms, radio room, mess room, helicopter
waiting room, hospital, stairway landings, accommodation passageways and lockers in way of
passageways, and vestibules in accommodations spaces shall be leveled with PolySpec Fornaft
underlayment or an approved equal. All of the wet spaces including change rooms, washrooms, toilets,
laundry rooms, galley, cleaning gear lockers, and refrigerated spaces shall be leveled with an epoxy base
underlayment such as PolySpec CLAD or equivalent. Any areas requiring a heavy fill (>12 mm) shall be
leveled only with an epoxy base underlayment.



All accommodation spaces shall have a finished floor covering according to the following schedule:

Table 4.5.1 - Floor Coverings
AREA SYSTEM
Galley, refrigerated Homogenous ceramic tiles two component epoxy
flooring
Stateroom living area Vinyl sheet
Offices, Recreation rooms, Gym Vinyl sheet
Mess hall, main corridors, stairwell landings,
helicopter waiting room, stateroom lavatories,
laundry rooms, hospital / bathroom, between deck
landings, lavatories other than change room..
Generally Vinyl sheet, except for wet spaces where
a Terrazzo System shall be used
Change rooms and adjacent lavatory, dirty tea
room, laundry area.
Terrazzo or two component epoxy flooring
Closets, linen or mop, Store Rooms Vinyl sheet

Floor covering in accommodation passageways shall have contrasting color (laminated under the last two
clear coats) centerline stripes, 300 mm in width, to indicate escape paths in the event of an emergency. The
mess area floor shall have a contrasting 300 mm wide stripe around the perimeter of the space. All terrazzo
floor systems shall feature a 100 mm troweled cove strip around the perimeter of the space. All other floor
systems shall feature a standard 100 mm perimeter cove. All terrazzo floor systems shall have at least four
layers of epoxy clear coat to provide a high sheen, except for bath / toilet areas which only require one clear
coat application. Terrazzo or two component epoxy flooring thickness shall be according to the
manufacturers specification.

All floor covering materials and colors are to be selected by the builder.

4.6 STRUCTURAL FIRE PROTECTION

Interior and exterior bulkheads and decks within and around the quarters and machinery spaces shall be
A60 class in those areas required by the Classification Society and Regulatory Bodies. The exterior
bulkheads of the quarters, the bulkheads bounding the galley, the stairwells, the toolpusher's office, the
jacking control room, the fan rooms, the radio room, the emergency generator room and the quarters decks
shall be A60 class and as designated by the Contract Plans.

The bulkheads, doors and windows bounding the 3
d
party diesel engine driven cementing package shall be
bounded with A-60 class structural fire protection as required by the Classification Society, Regulatory
Bodies, and IMO MODU Code.

All structural fire protection materials of construction shall be listed in a register with the IMO
Fire Test Procedures Code approval certificate provided to Class and the owner.


TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 5.0 - FURNISHINGS .................................................................................................................... 1
5.1 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................... 1
5.2 FURNITURE AND FURNISHING SCHEDULE ......................................................................... 1
5.3 UTILITY SPACES ......................................................................................................................... 4
5.4 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT AND STOWAGE ................................................................. 5
5.5 COMMISSARY SPACES .............................................................................................................. 6
5.6 DIRTY TEA ROOM ...................................................................................................................... 9
5.7 HARDWARE ................................................................................................................................. 9
5.8 SANITARY FIXTURES .............................................................................................................. 10
5.9 CLOCKS ...................................................................................................................................... 10
5.10 ACCOMMODATIONS OUTFITTING ....................................................................................... 10
5.11 HOSPITAL ................................................................................................................................... 11

5.12 MACHINERY SPACE OFFICES


SECTION 5.0 - FURNISHINGS

5.1 GENERAL

The living quarters shall be outfitted with furnishings and equipment as described in this section and as
listed in Section 1.2. All furniture and furnishings shall be subject to approval by the Owner. The Builder
shall prepare a complete furniture and furnishings schedule showing each item proposed to be supplied, the
manufacturers name, model number, size, materials, finish, and other pertinent specifications, including
samples of materials as required. These schedules and samples shall be submitted to the Owner for
approval within 90 days after execution of the Contract, and the schedules must be approved by the Owner
prior to procurement by the Builder.

The arrangement and type of furniture, fixtures and other items of equipment and outfit for spaces shall be
generally as shown on Contract Plans. The Builder shall prepare his own plans of sufficiently large scale to
ensure that all furniture will fit properly into the assigned spaces. These detailed plans must be approved
by the Owner prior to procurement of any furniture or furnishings by the Builder.

Each space shown on the Contract Plans shall be fitted out completely by the Builder with furnishings as
required herein. The furnishings shall be chosen so as to create a pleasant living environment for the crew
members while maintaining durability and serviceability. Furniture and fittings shall have substantial
construction in harmony with the decorative treatment of the space. All items shall be complete, including
hardware, finish molding strips, latches, reinforcements for attaching and securing hardware, sub-bases,
etc.. Furniture shall be made in sections or shall be separable so as to readily pass through the
accommodation doors.

All interior finish materials, including furnishings and furniture, shall meet the flame retarding
requirements of the codes.

All furniture shall be made in self-contained units of heavy duty, marine quality steel, finished with
melamine-baked enamel, subject to Owner approval and in compliance with the Classification Society and
other Regulatory Body requirements.

All furniture except chairs shall be secured to decks, bulkheads and deck heads as necessary, but furniture
legs or bases shall not be welded to decks directly. All necessary fastenings to secure chairs and other
portable furniture to the deck shall be provided. These securing devices shall be designed to withstand the
forces resulting from occupancy and under the conditions resulting from roll and pitch of vessel when
afloat.

The accommodations is to be provided with a sufficient number of offices to meet the Owners
rwquirements. These office spaces are to be outfitted with the customary and usual furnishing found in
office spaces.

One large meeting room is to be provided in the accommodations. The room is to be of a sufficient size to
accommodate the number of persons required by the Owner. It is to be outfitted with a large table, chairs,
white board, flat screen TV, etc.

5.2 FURNITURE AND FURNISHING SCHEDULE

The following items shall be provided and installed by the Builder:

5.2.1 Upholstery


All upholstery shall be of heavy, marine grade materials; padding shall be solid foam rubber. All
upholstery materials shall satisfy the requirements set forth by the applicable Regulatory Bodies.
Color and design of upholstery shall be approved by the Owner prior to procurement by the Builder.

5.2.2 Mirrors

Mirrors shall be a minimum 450 mm x 900 mm x 6 mm thick. Sectional mirrors in the shower
rooms shall be installed over the full extent of the walls over the lavatories. Complete with 230
VAC AC grounded outlets.

5.2.3 Lights - Berths, Desks, Etc.

Berths, radio shelves (560 mm x 180 mm) shall be provided at the head of each berth. Desks and
writing tables shall be provided with lamps. In addition recessed overhead lighting shall be installed
to provide sufficient lighting for the space usage.

5.2.4 Shelves, Coat and Hat Hooks

Each stateroom shall be provided with coat hooks, two per man. In addition, a 300 mm continuous
shelf shall be installed over change roomwashbasins and in areas having slop sinks. Coat hooks
shall be in change rooms and passageways leading to mess roomas required.

5.2.5 Stools

Stools shall be of steel, have steel seats and shall be adjustable.

5.2.6 Filing Cabinets

Filing cabinets, steel, legal size, both vertical four drawer and horizontal double drawer, shall be
provided, and as shown on the Contract Plans.

5.2.7 Wastebaskets

Wastebaskets shall be provided in all staterooms, hospital, change room, galley, mess room, offices
and radio room, recreation rooms, toilet and shower areas, laundry and in all spaces provided with
tissue and folded paper towel dispensers and at each desk..

5.2.8 Chairs

Chairs for each space shall be provided as shown on the Contract Plans and as described in this
Specification.

5.2.9 Built-in Tables and Counters

Built-in tables and counters fitted out as shown shall be in keeping with the decor of the space where
located.

5.2.10 Tack boards

Tack boards shall be 900 mm x 1200 mm.

5.2.11 Springs and Mattresses



Berths shall be spacious enough to accommodate the average height person. Mattresses shall
be comfortable and at least 200 x 90 cmand Owner approved. Mattresses for hospital shall be
covered with water-repellent ticking. Berths shall have solid steel bottoms.

5.2.12 Bookcases

Bookcases shall be located in offices and recreation rooms and as indicated in the Contract Plans.

5.2.13 Window Curtains

Curtains of attractive, heavy drapery cloth shall be provided for each window in staterooms and
offices. Curtains shall be of generous fullness, dense enough, and fitted with the necessary hardware
so that they can be secured at all edges to completely darken the roomduring daylight hours. Color
and design of curtains shall be approved by the Owner prior to procurement by the Builder.

5.2.14 Schedule

The furniture and furnishings shall be provided as shown on the Contract Plans and as approved by
the Owner.

5.2.15 Shelves

Shelves for books and files shall be provided in offices and other spaces as required. Shelves are to
be fitted with sea rails.

5.2.16 Medicine Cabinets

Medicine cabinets with mirrored doors shall be provided over lavatories in private (and semi-private)
sanitary spaces.

5.2.17 Bunk Curtains

Curtains of heavy drapery cloth shall be provided for each bunk. Color and design shall be as
approved by the Owner.

5.2.18 Lockers

Lockers shall be provided as shown on the Contract Plans and shall be a minimum of 610 mm deep
and fitted with clothes rod, clothes hooks on sides plus top and bottomshelf.

Lockers for the storage of life jackets and survival suits shall be provided in each stateroom.

The quantity of lockers for each stateroomshall equal the number of occupants.

5.2.19 Shower Fittings

Each private and semi-private sanitary space shall be provided with towel rails, soap holder and a
grab rail adjacent to shower and wash basin. See Section 4.

The final layout and equipment selection shall be done in conjunction with the accommodation equipment
provider, and the Builder to accomplish a complete and fully operational, ergonomically compliant and
comfortable accommodation, which complies with modern comfort and ergonomic standards. The equipment
listed is only to be used as an indication of equipment possibly required.



5.3 UTILITY SPACES

5.3.1 General

Each space shown on the Contract Plans shall be completely furnished with articles and equipment
shown thereon.

5.3.2 Locker and Change Rooms

Double tier lockers shall be provided in both change rooms. Lockers shall be sheet steel with
powder coat paint, approximately 350 x 300 x 1800 mm, arranged as shown on Contract Plans,
complete with hardware and fittings. Latches shall have eye for padlock. A total of 15 double coat
hooks shall be installed on clear bulkheads in change rooms. Wood benches about 380 mm wide by
length as shown shall be provided.

Change roomto be fitted with central scupper.

Lockers to be colored as selected by the Owner.

Two wastebaskets shall also be provided.

5.3.3 Laundry Equipment

Laundry equipment shall be installed as shown on the Contract Plans as follows:

Dirty Laundry
Three Electric clothes washer, commercial heavy-duty type, 20 kg load
Two Electric clothes dryer, commercial type, 25 kg load
Clean Laundry
Two domestic washing machines for personal clothes
Two domestic condensation driers (no extra ducting required) for personal clothes

Laundry rooms are to be equipped with a central scupper and folding tables, double laundry tubs and
laundry baskets on casters and supply locker.

Water shutoff valves for washers shall be readily accessible ball valve types, dryer vents to be
arranged so as to minimize back pressure and lint accumulation and facilitate periodic clean out.

Washers and dryers shall be positioned to provide access to the rear of the machine for equipment
hook-up and maintenance. Washers and driers shall be of a modular construction to permit transport
through accommodation doors.

5.3.4 Tool Rooms and Store Rooms

Tool rooms and storerooms shall be fitted out with necessary lockers, bins, rack, shelves and battens,
etc. Drilling tool storeroomto be fitted with Owner approved, Builder furnished drilling tool storage
racks.
The main store roomis to have an office for the storekeeper. Included in the office is to be a desk,
chairs, file cabinets, book cases, computer, waste basket, etc,

5.3.5 Paint Locker

The following shall be provided:

- One Locker, with four shelves and locking device


- One Trough rack for brushes
- One Cleaning tank
- One Set of shelving, 3 high, for storage five gallon cans. One tier of such shelving to
be provided with locking doors to contain thinners, solvents, etc.
- One Can, 30 liter capacity with cover, for clean waste
- One Can, 3 liter capacity, with foot-operated cover

The paint locker shall be classified as a hazardous area and shall be provided with ventilation, fire
detection system, fixed firefighting system (HP water mist) and self-closing vapor-tight door.

5.3.6 Drill Floor

Four steel plate (minimum 6 mm thickness) lockers 1.83 mhigh x 0.90 mwide x 0.60 mdeep
complete with shelving shall be provided. A 1.50 mx 0.75 m steel bench complete with 100 mm
heavy metal working vise shall be provided.
A tea break cabin, 2.2m(wide) x 3.0 m(length) x 2.2, (high) for drilling crews with insulation all
around and roof, equipped with a table, two (2) steel benches, explosion proof air conditioner,
lighting ventilation and 230V, 60 HZ outlets, shall be of the same general standard, shall be
furnished by the builder.

5.3.7 Mud Pump Room

Builder shall fabricate and install a heavy duty 1.50 m by 0.75 m steel work bench complete with
a 125 mm heavy metal working vise and a back panel suitable for the storage of tools.
An observation room and a mud lab, both with windows, small desk, chair, file cabinet, book
case, telephone, etc. is to be provided at the 5640 ABL Level. The mudlab is also to be outfitted
with a stainless steel counter, stainless steel sink with faucets for hot and cold fresh water. In case
the observation room and mud lab is located in a hazardous area, all electrical appliances, fixtures
and air conditioner shall be explosion proof.

5.3.8 Helicopter Waiting Room

The helicopter waiting roomshall be arranged as shown on the Contract Plans. The roomshall be
equipped with windows, one weather tight doors, with direct access to the passageway and the
helideck. Further the roomshall seat 24 people, have a weight scale, cabinets, and a color LCD flat
screen TV and a DVD/VCR player with a multi-national format (PAL, NTSC, etc.). Lighting,
heating, ventilation and 230 V, 60 Hz electrical outlets shall be to the same general standard as the
rest of the accommodation.

5.4 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT AND STOWAGE

5.4.1 General

Bins, racks, shelves with battens, etc., shall be provided to suit each particular space. Arrangement to
be determined depending on the type of material or equipment to be stowed.

Spaces not specifically mentioned herein but which normally require shelving, etc., shall be suitably
equipped in keeping with the requirements of similar spaces.

In storerooms where upper shelves and racks are not readily accessible from the deck, ladders shall
be provided. Adequate stowage for ladder, when not in use, shall be provided with the spaces.

5.4.2 Linen Closets



Linen closets shall be provided at each level. Closets shall be provided with No. 16 gauge stiffened
shelving, with sea rails.

5.4.3 Dry Stores

The stores spaces shall be finished and outfitted for stowage of Galley and Steward's stores
according to the Contract Plans. The spaces shall be fitted with stainless steel plate shelving having
sea rails. Dry stores storage capacity shall be studied to confirmthat sufficient space is available to
meet the Owners requirements.

5.4.4 Cleaning Gear Lockers

Cleaning gear lockers shall be provided at each level with the following equipment:

A service sink with roll rim.

Clips and racks for stowage of mops, brooms and buckets.

Shelving, 3-high, with bottom shelf 300 mm above deck with 100 mm high
raised edges.

5.5 COMMISSARY SPACES

The final layout and equipment quantity and selection shall be done in conjunction with the galley and mess
roomequipment provider. The shipyard and the Builder shall accomplish a complete and fully operational
galley and mess room. All galley equipment shall be of a modular design to facilitate transport through the
accommodation doors.

5.5.1 General

Messing service shall be furnished as shown on the Contract Plans and as specified herein to be fully
adequate in every respect to provide service for the vessel's personnel. Equipment shall be of
industrial marine type. Equipment suggestions are mentioned below.

5.5.2 Range, Oven and Broiler

Electric marine range Toastmaster, Model NO G20A2RB, all-purpose, all CRES including back,
cooking top and oven under. Model 4172-D back shelf broiler oven, or equal.

5.5.3 Griddle Top Range and Oven

Electric, griddle top range and oven, Toastmaster Model No. G20G1RB, with Model BS36D back
shelf or equal.

5.5.4 Deep Fat Fryer

A deep fat frying machine with full size basket, Toastmaster G14C4 or equal.

5.5.5 Sinks



Sinks shall be constructed of not less than 20 gauge stainless steel, ground flush and polished. Sinks
shall be provided with stainless steel lever type waste outlet with overflow, with CRES perforated
strainers. Sanitizing sink shall be fitted with heater and thermostat. Undersides of sinks to be coated
with a sound deadening material.

5.5.6 Racks

Stainless steel racks or shelves for pots, pans, utensils, etc., with sea rails, shall be provided as
necessary.

5.5.7 Cabinets

Overhead cabinets measuring 380 mm deep x 610 mm high with length as required for proper
stowage of items or as indicated in the Contract Plans. Cabinets shall be provided with shelves and
doors where indicated. Doors shall be capable of being secured during transit.

5.5.8 Refrigerators

Galley - Hobart Model No HS-1, 0.614 cubic meters, stainless steel or equal.

Mess room- Hobart Model No. JI, 0.215 cubic meters, under counter type stainless steel or equal.

5.5.9 Freezer

Hobart Model No. HSF-1, 0.614 cubic feet, stainless steel or equal.

5.5.10 Icemaker

Scotsman Model No. 205JSS, 91 kg per day capacity or equal.

5.5.11 Slicing Machine

Hobart Model No. 512TMS or equal.

5.5.12 Can Opener

Table style, Edlund Model No. 1 or equal.

5.5.13 Mixer

Hobart Model D-300 or equal. Mixer shall have CRES mixing bowl with standard 30-quart
equipment, including all standard attachments. Stowage for attachments shall be provided. Unit
shall be mounted on a stainless steel pipe pedestal.

5.5.14 Coffee Maker

Vaculator, Model No. VAC NKLP1/J with warmer unit Model No. J, complete with CRES
decanters, or equal. CRES sea rails are to be provided.

5.5.15 Toaster

Toastmaster ID2-2 or equal complete with a 3-wire cord and plug shall be provided. The toaster
shall have a 4-slice capacity and be bulkhead mounted (on a shelf).

5.5.16 Water Cooler



Halsey Taylor, Model SW-13-A or equal, stainless steel finish, wall hung, electric, self-contained,
drinking fountains shall be provided as shown on the Contract Plans. All units to be fitted with
external replaceable cartridge type filters.

5.5.17 Food Waste Disposer Unit

Red Goat or equal under counter type, stainless steel casing.

5.5.18 Dishwasher

Hobart Model AM-12 straight through or equal. Automatically timed, with CRES electric hot water
booster heater.

5.5.19 Galley Hoods

Hoods shall be provided over the griddle, deep fat fryer and range. An exhaust fan shall be provided
in the hood. The fan shall be controlled by a switch conveniently installed. Hoods are to be of
stainless steel.

A fixed fire extinguisher system shall be installed in the hoods over the ranges and deep fat fryer.

5.5.20 Ice Cream Maker

Taylormate 152 or equal.

5.5.21 Milk Dispenser

Electric with self-contained refrigeration unit, CRES interior and exterior.

5.5.22 Beverage Dispenser

2 x 2 Compartment, Electric with self-contained refrigeration unit

5.5.23 Garbage Can with Cover

75 Liter, galvanized steel.

5.5.24 Hot Food and Cold Food Tables

Stainless steel construction and located as per the Contract Plans, self-contained with built in
heating or cooling units.

5.5.25 Equipment Supplied by Owner

Silverware, glassware, chinaware, linen (sheet, blankets, pillowcase, towels, etc.), galley utensils.

5.5.26 Serving and Dirty Dish Return Hatch

To be self-released operable from either side.

To be as per Regulatory Body requirements.

5.5.27 Potato Peeler

12.7 kg Potato peeler to be installed in galley.



5.5.28 Eye Wash Unit

An eye wash unit is to be installed in the galley and as listed in Section 7 of this specification.

5.5.29 Trash Compactor

A trash compactor is to be installed on the main deck.

5.5.30 Rice Cooker

One (1) electric rice cooker is to be installed in the galley.

Worktables and dressers, stainless steel with drawers and shelves underneath, battens, etc., as required to
provide adequate and ergonomic workspace for food preparation.

5.6 DIRTY TEA ROOMS (SMOKING AND NON-SMOKING)

The dirty tea room shall be arranged according to the Contract Plans and shall be outfitted with the
following furnishings:

Table and benches for eight persons.
Coffee Maker
Hot Water Dispenser
Beverage Dispenser
Sink, wash hand basin and towel dispenser
Counter with cabinets below and shelves above
Wall Shelf
A total of sixteen double coat hooks shall be installed on a clear bulkhead

5.7 HARDWARE

5.7.1 Locks, Keys, Etc.

All hardware shall be of heavy-duty severe service marine type.

All doors shall be provided with locks, hold-back hooks, rubber tipped bumpers, knobs, handles, butts
and hinges, escutcheons, roses, push plates, kick plates, etc., as required to serve the space intended.

Special consideration shall be paid to noise prevention fromthe selection of the doors models. All
doors in accommodation spaces shall be provided with locks and latch sets with mortise, cylindrical or
rimtype cases.

All locks shall be keyed differently except where there is more than one door to the same
compartment, in which case these doors shall be keyed alike.

Each door lock to living spaces shall be provided with one key for each occupant plus two spares. All
other spaces requiring keys shall be provided with total of three keys.



Two master keys shall be provided, one for all accommodation spaces and the other for machinery
spaces, etc. Both master keys shall be keyed to one grand master key. Two spares shall be provided
for each master key and grand master key.

Steel lockers and chests are to be provided with facilities for padlocks.

5.7.2 Door Closers

All door closers shall be provided with "magnetic hold open" feature, except access ladder doors and
those leading to restricted spaces. Door closers for air locks and external areas shall be extra heavy-
duty severe service duty. The door holders shall be connected to the fire detection system. All held
open doors shall be released upon detection of fire or smoke by the fire detection system.

5.8 SANITARY FIXTURES

Sanitary fixtures shall be furnished and installed as specified herein and in the approximate locations as shown
on Contract Plans. See Section 4.

The fixtures and accessories described herein are those of Toto, INA or Owner approval equal.

All sanitary fixture piping within the accommodations shall be concealed where practicable.

5.9 CLOCKS

The Builders shall provide and install wall mounted battery operated electric clocks with approximately 300
mm diameter faces, which will be synchronized from a master clock system, in the following locations:
Mess Room
Galley
Radio Room
Engine Control Room
Offices
Recreation Rooms
Jacking Control Room
Helicopter Waiting Room
Dirty Tea Rooms

The radio room shall be provided with a mariners clock, showing radio silence periods.

5.10 ACCOMMODATIONS OUTFITTING

The Builder shall furnish and install the following, but not limited to, items to complete the outfitting of the
accommodations. All items are subject to the Owners review and approval.

Galley utensils and cooks tools
Silverware, china, glassware, etc.
Linens, blankets, towels, pillows, etc.
Gymequipment
Library items
Entertainment equipment, i.e. LCD flat screen TV, VCR, DVD, radios, etc.
Office equipment, including desks, chairs, desk lamps, book cases, file cabinets, etc.



5.11 HOSPITAL

The Builder shall furnish and install the following furniture, equipment, medical supplies, etc., to provide a
hospital that meets all Regulatory Body requirements and the Owners approval:

1 Berth, minimum200 x 90 cm, 3 drawers below berth
1 Examination table
1 Medicine locker with medical supplies as approved by the Owner
1 Medicine safe with medical supplies as approved by the Owner
1 Radio shelf, CRES 560 mm (22) x 180 mm(7)
1 Table, night approximately 380 mm(15) x 300 mm(12) bulkhead mounted with table
lamp
1 Bookrack, single
1 Steel locker double, 460 mm(18) x 530 mm(21) x 1.830 m(72), enclosed base
1 Examination lamp, floor pedestal type
1 Chair, side
1 Waste receptacle foot pedal, removable liner, all CRES
1 Wastebasket
1 Writing desk w/desk lamp
1 Tissue dispenser
1 Refrigerator (170 liters)

5.12 MACHINERY SPACE OFFICES

The builder shall provide offices in the machinery spaces as required by the Owner. As a minimum
the following offices, each outfitted with a desk, chairs, bookcase(s), file cabinet(s), desk lamp(s),
computer, etc. shall be provided:
1) Motormans office (in Switchgear/Control Room)
2) Automation office and workshop (on 5640 ABL Level)
3) Miscellaneous offices as required by the Owner

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 6.0 - LEGS - STRUCTURE, SUPPORTS, J ACKS, & HANDLING ........................... 1
6.1 LEG STRUCTURE ..................................................................................................................... 1
6.2 J ACKS AND RACK CHOCKS ................................................................................................ 2
6.3 MISCELLANEOUS .................................................................................................................... 4



SECTION 6.0 - LEGS - STRUCTURE, SUPPORTS, JACKS, & HANDLING

6.1 LEG STRUCTURE

The three triangular cross-section leg structures shall be of size, configuration, and scantlings as shown on
the Contract Plans. All components shall be of steel with properties generally as indicated below and
confirmed suitable by the Classification Society for Class.

6.1.1 Leg Racks

Material - Quenched and tempered steel ASTM A517 GR Q Modified, level A UT inspection, 690
MPa yield, 790/965 MPa tensile, Charpy V-Notch (CVN) minimum average, longitudinal direction
69 J at T/4 thickness at -37 C and 69 J at T/2 thickness at -27 C, flame cut teeth free of cracks and
laminations. Quarter depth hardness 240 Brinell minimumto 290 Brinell maximum, vacuum
degassed, fine grained practice, sulfur content maximum 0.01 %, Carbon content maximum 0.18 %.

Rack flame cut tolerances shall be as follows:

tooth to tooth (pitch) -304.8 mm 0.20 mm
tip to tip (teeth) - 838.2 mm +0.76 mm
root to root (teeth) - 464.7 mm +0.76 mm
offset opposite teeth - 0.20 mm
rack flatness 3 mm in 4 teeth along a zero datum line
rack length 3 mm in 4 teeth
rack length - (304.8 mm 0.14 mm) x number of teeth
camber less than 3 mm in 36 teeth
tooth cut - square with edge within 0.01 mm/mm rack thickness
tooth cut surface finish - 250 micro inch
pressure angle - 305 minutes
rack thickness 177.8 mm plate mill tolerances of 1.52 mm
rack butt welds shall maintain tooth pitch (304.8 mm) within 1.27 mm

6.1.2 Leg Chords

Material - Quenched and tempered steel ASTM A517 GR Q Modified, level A UT inspection, 690
MPa yield, 790/965 MPa tensile, Charpy V-Notch (CVN) minimum average, longitudinal direction
69 J at T/4 thickness at -37 C and 69 J at T/2 thickness at -27 C, fine grained practice, 0.010 %
sulfur maximum, Carbon content maximum 0.18 %. Leg chords are to be heat-treated or stress
relieved after forming.

Chord Tolerance - round, height and width - 3 mm

6.1.3 Diagonal Braces and Horizontal Braces

Material 520 MPa minimum yield, minimumlongitudinal CVN impact test 41 J at -40 C or 45 J
at -37 C, Carbon content maximum 0.18 %, seamless pipe.

6.1.4 Internal Braces

Material - ASTM A106 GR B or C.

Minimum longitudinal CVN impact test 27 J at -27 C, seamless pipe.

The diamond braces must also meet the below listed ABS requirements:


Carbon content maximum 0.21 %
Mn minimum 0.60 %
fine grain treatment for t>25 mm

6.1.5 Spud Cans

Material - as shown on the Contract Plans

The spud cans at the bottom of the legs are to be watertight.

The spud cans are designed and constructed so they are capable of providing full structural support
independent of their contents.

Bolted manhole covers shall be provided in the top of each spudcan so that each segment or
compartment can be properly ventilated and accessed in case repairs are necessary.

6.1.6 Leg Fabrication

All chord and rack butt welds, including butt welds of racks, are to be fully ultrasonically tested and
X-rayed. All other welds are to be fully ultrasonically tested. All welds are to be of a quality that
meets the approval of the Classification Society. All non-destructive testing of repairs of defective
welds shall employ the same methods of testing which proved it defective.

The chord sections are to be watertight throughout, and are to be proven sound by UT and MPI.

Welding and repair procedures shall be developed by Builder in accordance with consideration of
hydrogen induced cracking in high strength steels as may be caused by H
2
S.

The completed leg assemblies shall be true to dimension, as described in the Contract Plans. The
rack sections shall be carefully installed to maintain accurate tooth pitch through the entire vertical
range.

Rack teeth in way of upper guides, with legs in all towing positions, shall be built-up to remove
clearance between guide and teeth tips.

6.2 JACKING SYSTEM AND RACK CHOCKS

6.2.1 J acking System

The Builder shall purchase and install a jacking system composed of 54 jacking units with electric
motors and associated control equipment. The supply of the jacking systemwill be in accordance
with classification society rules.

a) Performances of Jacking unit

The Jacking units are designed to be utilized according to the rack and pinion principle which
consists of a set of simultaneously operated Jacking units, allowing lifting and lowering of jack-up
type platforms. The Jacking units are installed in several stages on each side of the leg chord. The
Jacking units are mounted in one Frame per chord.

Jack Lifting Ratings:


Metric Tons Per Pinion Per Chord Per Leg
Normal J acking (Vertical Push on Rack) 340 MT 2,040 MT 6,120 MT
Maximum J acking (Vertical Push on Rack) 521 MT 3,126 MT 9,378 MT
Lifting speed 0.46 m/min 0.46 m/min 0.46 m/min
ABS Storm Holding 646 MT 3,876 MT 11,628 MT

The Jacking unit is designed for the following life cycle:
Normal jacking 500 H
Maximum jacking 55 H

Any variation of load on pinion will impact consequently the life of the jacking system
Any lack of greasing/lubrication will reduce the life time of the rack and pinion / jacking system

The Jacking is designed for elevating and lowering the hull and to support the hull during normal
weather conditions. During drilling operations, severe weather and tow conditions, the jacking
system shall be released, and the legs are rigidly locked to the hull with the rack chock system. It is
understood that design and operation practices shall not lead to an overload of the jacking unit.

The jack houses shall be reinforced with 50mm x 200 mm steel flat bars to compensate for the rack
chock access cutouts, if such cutouts are found to be necessary

The safety factor against failure for the maximum static holding condition shall be in accordance
with the requirements of the Regulatory Bodies.

b) The Jacking pinion

The Jacking output pinion, seven teeth, engages into a rack:
Module 97.02
Pressure Angle 30
pinion thickness 178 mm (7 inches)

c) Electric motors

Each Jacking unit is supplied with a BLM jacking AC motor, deck watertight. The motor protection
is IP56.
Windings are encapsulated in epoxy resin to ensure efficient protection against humidity. Motors are
fitted with a self cooled electro brake fail-safe designed, applied by spring when controller is in off
position or in the event of power failure. Effective operation of the disc brake is controlled through
an electric detector (microswitch type) that checks the physical displacement of the disc brake.
The brake is provided with a manual releasing device and the shaft is provided with a 19mm square
end for measurement and adjustment of braking torque by dynamometric spanner.
One PTC thermal switch is installed in the motor winding to protect the motor against an accidental
overload. A spare PTC switch is fitted to be connected only in case of defect of the first one.
A heating resistor prevents condensation inside the motor when not in use.

All the motors are located in a safe (non hazardous) area.

The motor is a single speed motor with following characteristics:
Voltage- Frequency : 690 V 60 Hz
Power on shaft (Normal jacking): 35 kW
Power on shaft (Maximum jacking): 54 kW
Maxi ambient temperature: 50C
Temperature rise: 105C
Insulation Class: H
Space heating power: 150 watts


Absorbed electrical power /leg (normal jacking): 700 kW
Absorbed electrical power /leg (Maximum jacking): 1,080 kW
Maximum regenerated power / leg : 540 kW

The primary drive pinions shall be manufactured from a through-hardened material with sufficient
strength and hardness to ensure the rack and not the pinion is subject to wear during normal
operation.

The width of the primary drive pinions shall be at least 277 mm.

.

6.2.2 F&G Rack ChockSystem

The leg fixation system (rack chocksystem) is to be provided by the Designer (Friede and
Goldman, Ltd).

The leg fixation system shall consist of:

QUANTITY DESCRIPTION
18 6-TOOTH CHOCKS
36 VERTICAL SCREW J ACKS
36 HORIZONTAL SCREW J ACKS
1 RIG SET RETRACTING UNITS
1 RIG SET MISCELLANEOUS FASTENINGS
36 VERTICAL SCREW J ACK DRIVES
36 HORIZONTAL SCREW JACK DRIVES
3 HYDRAULIC POWER UNITS
1 RIG SET VALVES, CONTROL HOSES
9 CONTROL CONSOLES

Greasing points are to be provided with grease lines manifolded to convenient locations where
necessary.

A means of releasing stuck chock elements is to be provided with the rack chock
system.

The screw jacks are to be fully tested to demonstrate adequate strength under maximumdesign loads
and satisfactory performance under operational loads.

6.3 MISCELLANEOUS

6.3.1 Leg Markings

On each leg, 25 mm high x 150 mm wide markings shall be provided at 300 mm intervals, from9.0
meters above the bottomof the spud cans to the top of the legs. Arabic numerals 6" high shall


indicate the height above bottom of cans on 1.5 meter intervals. In addition, a prominent mark shall
be placed on each leg that lines up with an indicator on the adjacent jack tower to indicate the
required leg position(s) for towing. These marks and indicators shall be easily visible fromthe
jacking control console. Marking shall be painted in bright contrasting colors of same type coating
as applied to the legs. Markings shall be located as to be visible on all legs fromthe jacking control
room.

6.3.2 J et Piping

Piping for jetting systems shall be as specified in Section 14 and as shown on the Contract Plans. All
piping shall be securely attached to the bracing members of the legs in an approved manner.

Spudcans will be fitted with top and bottomjets, and both systems, including jetting lines, are to be
rated for a working pressure of 104 bar. All jetting lines shall be of the same size.

Piping shall be structurally adequate and suitably arranged to guide and support deep well pumps.

6.3.3 J ack Access

There shall be provided walkways on the jack bracing between each jack case of a leg. An access
platform shall be provided at each Jacking Unit motor assembly.

6.3.4 Leg Ladders and Platforms

There shall be provided one leg ladder in each leg in a configuration that complies with Regulatory
Bodies requirements.

Builder shall also fabricate and install work platforms at the top of each leg. The platforms are to be
safely accessible fromthe leg ladder and provided with standard three tier pipe handrails. It shall be
possible to service all hazard and other lights located at the top of the leg while standing on the
platform.

6.3.5 Cathodic Protection

There shall be provided sacrificial anodes on the legs. Installation shall provide for ten (10)-year
(minimum) service life.

6.3.6 Leg-Mounted Sea Water Towers

Three (3) single sea water towers shall be provided, one on each aft leg well and one in the forward
leg well. The sea water tower support/guide arrangement shall utilize the hull for vertical support
and the leg spudcan jetting lines for lateral support (i.e. as a guide and restraint). The spudcan shall
feature a pump support pad should the pump be allowed to rest on the spud can. The placement of
the sea water piping shall be as shown on the Contract Plans. The pumps and sea water towers shall
be capable of being handled by Vessels cranes or other Builder furnished system.

Each sea water pump shall be capable of obtaining electrical supply from the emergency generator
MCC.

At each sea water connection point, the Builder will install cathodic / anti-fouling protection spool
unit(s). The selected unit(s) provided will not affect the design performance of the pumps or the
sea water tower system.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 7.0 - SAFETY EQUIPMENT ....................................................................................................... 1
7.1 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
7.2 LIFE RAFTS ..................................................................................................................... 1
7.3 LIFE BOATS .................................................................................................................... 1
7.4 LIFE PRESERVERS ........................................................................................................ 1
7.5 LIFE BUOYS ................................................................................................................... 2
7.6 FIRE MAINS AND STATIONS ...................................................................................... 2
7.7 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS ................................................................................................. 2
7.8 PERSONNEL TRANSFER NET ..................................................................................... 2
7.9 BREATHING APPARATUS ........................................................................................... 3
7.10 STRETCHERS ................................................................................................................. 3
7.11 FIREMAN'S OUTFIT ...................................................................................................... 3
7.12 POLLUTION ABATEMENT SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT ...................................... 3
7.13 GAS DETECTION SYSTEMS (H
2
S and CH
4
) ................................................................ 3
7.14 RESCUE EQUIPMENT FOR HELICOPTER PLATFORM ........................................... 6
7.15 MISCELLANEOUS SAFETY EQUIPMENT ................................................................. 6
7.16 LINE THROWING APPARATUS .................................................................................. 7
7.17 ROCKET PARACHUTE SIGNAL .................................................................................. 7
7.18 SMOKE AND FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM ................................................................. 7
7.19 BREATHING AIR SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS .......................................................... 8
7.20 SHOWER / EYEWASH STATIONS ............................................................................. 10
7.21 SURVIVAL SUITS ........................................................................................................ 10
7.22 PERSONAL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT .................................................................. 10



SECTION 7.0 - SAFETY EQUIPMENT

7.1 GENERAL

Safety equipment shall be provided and installed on the Vessel as specified herein, and the equipment and
its installation shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Classification Society and Regulatory
Bodies for a self-elevating drilling unit with a crew as stated in section 1.2.

The location of all safety equipment shall be generally shown on the Contract Plans and the rigs safety,
escape way and fire plans.

7.2 LIFE RAFTS

Davit-launchable, inflatable life rafts, sufficient for the total rig crew as per Regulatory Body rules and as
stated in Section 1.2 and two slewing launching davits shall be installed. Rafts shall be self-inflating,
complete with cover and survival gear, and suitably outfitted for launching at high air gaps.

7.3 LIFE BOATS

Three (3) life boats shall be installed, sufficient for the total rig crew as per Regulatory Body rules and as
stated in Section 1.2, that are of reinforced fiberglass construction, totally enclosed, diesel propelled with
electric-hydraulic start, engine block heaters (oil) and saltwater cooling. Each life boat shall be fitted with
fuel tank, life lines, row locks, rudder and tiller, built-in plastic foam filled buoyancy compartments, built-
in provision compartments, independent equipment locker, handrails, grab rails, H
2
S breathing air system
and releasing gear. Full ocean equipment and provisions shall be in accordance with the ABS, IMO, and
SOLAS requirements. The capacity of each lifeboat is to meet Gulf of Mexico requirements of 95 Kg per
person.

The unitized gravity davits for the life boats shall be of an appropriate type fitted with blocks, sheaves, wire
rope falls, galvanized turnbuckles, holding devices, winch and drive system and installed on superstructure
foundations that provide access for entry and handling (see Section 3).

The winch drives shall be electrically driven fitted with brakes, clutches, and hand cranks. Starters and
switches shall also be waterproof. The hoist speed shall be in accordance with ABS and SOLAS
requirements.

A standalone MOB/FRC (man overboard / fast rescue craft) rubber tube, aluminum bottom, complete with
an inboard diesel engine, water jet propelled unit. The MOB/FRC shall be launched and retrieved by its
own davit. The MOB/FRC and launching system shall comply with the IMO-LSA code.

7.4 LIFE PRESERVERS

Stowage for sufficient for the total rig crew as per Regulatory Body rules and as stated in Section 1.2, life
jackets and work vests shall be provided. One life jacket shall be stowed in the staterooms of the Vessels
accommodations for each occupant. An additional 50 % of the required number of the life jackets shall be
stored in lockers at the lifeboats and other commonly occupied work areas.

Sufficient deck mounted Fiberglass lockers with stainless steel hinges and hardware shall be provided for
the lifeboat and work area life jackets. The lockers shall be clearly labeled and located by the builder.



7.5 LIFE BUOYS

Stowage for ten life buoys shall be provided. The buoys shall be stowed in suitable galvanized steel
brackets secured to the railings and/or bulwark. The buoys shall be provided with a life line and water
lights. Two of the buoys shall be arranged with smoke signals and quick release.

7.6 FIRE MAINS AND STATIONS

Fire mains and stations shall be provided and installed as specified under Sections 13 and 14, "Piping
Systems" of these Specifications. Each hydrant shall be equipped with cotton/polyester jacket rubber lined
hose, combination fog / stream nozzles and spanner.

Two (2) applicators with mounting clips are to be installed as directed by the Owner. One (1) of 1.2 m (4
ft.) and one (1) of 3 m (10 ft.) in length

7.7 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

7.7.1 Fixed Systems

For the spaces listed in Section 14.16 of the Specification, a water mist smothering system shall be
provided with distribution piping for dousing fires in each individual space. The number, type and
location of discharge outlets shall be such as to give a uniform distribution throughout the space as
required by the Classification Society and the Regulatory Bodies.

The monitoring of the system shall be furnished as per the Regulatory Bodies and consist of a
complete control panel located in the radio roomor another continuously manned office as selected
by the Owner.

Pneumatically operated automatic ventilation shut down dampers shall be provided. These are to be
tied into the fire detection system.

All equipment shall be obtained froman approved manufacturer with experience in the production of
marine firefighting equipment.

Instruction plates shall be posted at suitable locations.

For a more detailed description of the water mist system and other firefighting systems, see
Section 14.

7.7.2 Portable Equipment

Portable fire extinguishers shall be mounted in fiberglass or approved molded plastic boxes with
stainless steel hardware or in protected areas on suitable brackets. All portable extinguisher locations
shall be clearly marked and numbered. Spare charges for extinguishers shall be furnished as required
by Regulatory Bodies. Portable extinguishers shall be provided in machinery spaces and living
quarters and at fire stations where practicable as shown in the Contract Plans and as may be
additionally required by the Classification Society or the Regulatory Bodies.

7.8 PERSONNEL TRANSFER NET

Two ring bottom nets suitable for transferring personnel to and from boats, by means of the deck cranes,
shall be provided and stowed on the Vessel. The net shall be padded and covered with strong canvas fabric
to provide a floor to store baggage on. The edges of the net shall be attached to a sturdy steel frame for


lifting the net. The height of the net when lifting shall be about 2 m and the net shall be designed to safely
and comfortably handle four persons and their gear. Each net shall have a 4 m long polypropylene tag line
with no knots or loops and safety sling.

7.9 BREATHING APPARATUS

A minimum of six (6) complete compressed air 30-minute self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) shall
be supplied per Section 18 and installed on the Vessel. Apparatus shall be of a pressure demand type
suitable for rescue operations in contaminated compartments on the Vessel. A spare cylinder shall be
provided and stowed with the equipment. The total number, location, and stowage of SCBA shall meet
with the approval of the Regulatory Bodies.

7.10 STRETCHERS

Two aluminum frame, Stokes, wire basket litters, suitable for handling injured personnel at sea and one
aluminum frame scoop/break apart stretcher for immobilization of personnel with spinal injuries, shall be
provided per Section 18 and stowed on the Vessel.

7.11 FIREMAN'S OUTFIT

A minimum of six firemen's outfits shall be installed in fiberglass storage cabinets and/or fixtures, placed
and mounted as required by the Regulatory Bodies.

7.12 POLLUTION ABATEMENT SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT

Appropriate equipment, systems, and control measures to contain, treat and control pollution from the
Vessel to permit the operation of the Vessel without restrictions on all navigable waters in accordance with
Regulatory Body requirements shall be provided.

The systems and equipment shall be comprised of, but not be limited to, the following:

Contaminated Drain System
Sewage Collection and Treatment System
Oily Water Separator System
Cuttings Cleaning System - space to be provided
Zero Pollution / Single Point Discharge System
Shale Shaker Running Lights
Pollution SPILL KITS

7.13 GAS DETECTION SYSTEMS (H
2
S AND CH
4
)

7.13.1 General

A builder furnished combustible gas and H
2
S monitoring and alarm system as described below
shall be installed which will be capable of detecting the presence of combustible gas and H
2
S in
the areas described. The monitoring and alarm system shall be a self-contained gas detection
panel and shall comply with the requirements of the Regulatory Bodies.

7.14.2 Sensors


The sensors will be of the 4-20 mA type and shall be individually wired to the gas detection system
analog input module. The three type of sensors and areas of application are described as follows:

Primary Locations:

Primary sensors are those placed along the route of the well return flow to detect either
combustible gas or H
2
S if it breaks into the atmosphere. There will be voting system with multiple
sensors in various locations that are prone to gas exposure and the detectors will give a pre-alarm
to the addressable fire and gas system if one out of three detects gas, when two out of three detect
gas, then an alarm will be given on the main fire and gas panel. Once three gas detectors detect
gas, the appropriate alarm will sound on the units PA/GA system. The following lists the
locations of primary sensors:

BOP Area

Drill Floor
Mud Return Trough
Mud Pit Room
Gumbo Shaker Area
Mud Processing Room
Derrick Gas Vent Line
3d party units
All accommodation air intakes
Breathing air compressor intake(s)

Secondary Locations:

Secondary sensors are those positioned in areas where gas, if present, is likely to migrate from the
well fluids to the adjacent spaces. These include but are not limited to:

Mud Pump Room
Engine Room
Switchgear / Engine Control Rooms

Safety Locations:

Safety sensors are those placed at locations where gas, if present, necessitates the operation of the
ventilation emergency shutdown. The following are the locations of the safety sensors:

Galley Ventilation Intake Fan
Machinery Space Ventilation Intake Fans
Radiator(s) adjacent to cantilever which fall into the Zone 1 or 2 area
classification)

7.13.3 Sensor Location



Where sensors are not easily accessible for hands free calibration, e.g. ventilation intake plenums,
they shall be provided with fixed 6 mm stainless steel tubing fromdeck level to the sensor head for
application of the calibration gas test sample.

Sensors shall not be located where they are continually subjected to contamination by oil-based mud.
Where such locations are unavoidable, sensor heads shall be provided with louvered covers suitably
designed for ease of removal and to eliminate direct contact with the contaminant.

All sensors shall be fit for installation in a hazardous area (ATEX approved) and all outdoor
sensors shall be fitted with weather guards.

7.13.4 Calibration and Testing

The gas detection system will provide a software calibration mode for maintenance purposes. When
in calibration mode, a visual alarm shall be generated the main gas detection panel indicating that the
sensor has been disabled. The alarm shall remain active until such time as the sensor has been
returned to service. The calibration mode shall provide a graphical display of the application of the
gas test sample and shall inform the technician of any sensor head which is not within tolerance.

7.13.5 Alarms

The gas detection system panel shall continuously monitor each 4-20mA sensor input for detection
of an alarmcondition at a frequency no less than one sample per second.

The panel shall generate an alarmon detection of any of the following conditions:

5 ppm H
2
S - Low level H
2
S
10 ppm H
2
S - High level H
2
S
20 % LEL - Low level combustible gas
40 % LEL - High level combustible gas

On detection of an alarm condition, the gas detection panel shall indicate the location of the alarm on
its display field. Audible and visual alarms shall be generated at each manned control station, i.e. the
engine roomalarmpanel, toolpushers office and the drill floor. The alarm shall display the type of
gas detected and the alert level.

Additionally, an audible and visual alarmat the main gas detection panel shall be generated should
any sensor or alarm indicator, PC board, etc. develop a detectable fault condition.

Public Address:

An interface shall be provided to the Public Address System, which shall automatically generate
the appropriate preset audible alarms according to the aforementioned voting sequence.

Visual Alarms:

Visual alarm lights (blue for toxic gas, yellow for explosive gas) shall be provided in high noise
areas and shall be suitably mounted and grouped for high visibility. The visual alarm system shall
be fully integrated within the PA/GA system and shall be wired directly to the digital output or
alarm module.



7.14 RESCUE EQUIPMENT FOR HELICOPTER PLATFORM

The following minimum rescue equipment complying with Cap 437 and other Regulatory Bodies shall be
provided and placed in crash boxes within easy access on or near the helicopter platform:

fire axes, Elkhart, 2.7 Kg
1 crow bar (large)
1 hack saw with 6 spare blades
1 metal hook
1 harness knife and sheath
1 fire blanket
1 cutting pliers/metal cutter
1 adjustable wrench
1 bolt cutters
2 piece ladder
1 set of assorted screw drivers
1 set of fire resistant gloves
life line
self contained breathing apparatus (complete)
power cutting tool

Other equipment as especially required:

1 set of instructions in use of emergency equipment
First aid equipment in a metal waterproof case.

The Builder shall provide a labeled fiberglass locker with stainless steel hardware to stow the above
equipment.

7.15 MISCELLANEOUS SAFETY EQUIPMENT

The following minimum safety equipment, and as required by the Regulatory Bodies shall be provided and
installed by the Builder:

2 Portable combination gas detectors, explosive gas, H
2
S and oxygen level
2 Flame safety lamps
4 Embarkation ladders of rope or light weight chain construction
6 Breathing apparatus
1 Safety belt (harness type) with 100 m (300) of 9.5 mm (3/8) Dacron line
2 Safety belts (monkey board)
1 Resuscitator
4 Climbing belts
1 Derrick escape system
Lot Fire axes
Lot Sand



7.16 LINE THROWING APPARATUS

A line-throwing appliance shall be provided and stowed on the Vessel per Section 18.

7.17 ROCKET PARACHUTE SIGNAL

Twelve (12) rocket parachute flares shall be provided and stowed on the Vessel per Section 18.

7.18 SMOKE AND FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM

7.18.1 General

The smoke and fire detection and alarmsystem shall be Builder furnished. The system shall provide
coverage for all spaces on the entire drilling unit.

7.18.2 Sensors

The sensors shall be of the addressable type and shall be wired in loops to the fire detection panel.
Various types of sensor shall be used depending on the area to be monitored and in accordance with
regulatory body requirements. There will be multiple smoke or fire detectors in various locations and
the detectors will give a pre-alarmto the addressable fire and gas system if one out of three detects
smoke or fire, when two out of three detect smoke or fire, then an alarm will be given on the main
fire and gas panel. Once three smoke or fire detectors detect smoke, the appropriate alarm will sound
on the units PA/GA system. A manual call station pushbutton, when activated will always give a
direct fire alarm to the main fire and gas panel as well as the PA/GA system and start the main fire
pump.

The sensor types to be used are:

Smoke detectors
Rate of rise heat detectors
Flame (UV) detectors
Manual call stations
Sprinkler system flow switches (Water Mist system)

7.18.3 Sensor Locations

An appropriate type of sensor shall be mounted in areas taking into consideration the following:

Likelihood of smoke or fire detection
Possible vibration problems
Dust or corrosive atmospheres
Accessibility for calibration

The location of each sensor head shall be determined by the Builder and approved by the Regulatory
Bodies and the Owner.

7.18.4 Calibration and Testing


The fire detection panel shall provide a test mode for maintenance purposes. When in calibration
mode, a visual alert shall be activated on the fire detection panel that the sensor has been disabled.
The alert shall remain active until such time as the sensor is returned to normal service.

The calibration mode shall provide a visual reaction to the application of the test sample.

7.18.5 Alarms

The fire detection system shall continuously monitor each addressable loop for detection of an alarm
condition at a frequency no less than one sample per second. On detection of an alarm condition,
audio and visual alarms shall be activated at the fire detection panel and at each manned control
station, i.e. the engine roomalarmpanel, toolpushers office and the drill floor. The fire detection
system shall indicate the location of the alarm. The alarm display shall also provide a description of
the exact location of the active alarm.

Additionally, the programshall generate an audible and visual alarmat each control station should
any sensor develop a detectable fault condition.

Public Address:

An interface shall be provided to the Public Address System, which shall automatically generate the
appropriate preset audible alarms.

Visual Alarms:

Visual alarm lights (red) shall be provided in high noise areas and shall be suitably mounted and
grouped for high visibility. The visual alarmsystem shall be fully integrated within the PA/GA
system and shall be wired directly in the fire detection systems addressable loops.

7.19 BREATHING AIR SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS

7.19.1 Purpose

The purpose of the system is to provide an adequate amount of breathing air, from manifolds at
the TSR (Temporary Safe Refuge) and other selected locations, to allow all personnel to muster,
work and/or evacuate the rig in the event of a hazardous concentration of H
2
S in the atmosphere.

7.19.2 Compressors

Two breathing air compressors are proposed to be furnished by the Builder. Space must be reserved
for these compressors to be located port and starboard on the machinery deck. The compressors to
be provided shall have 3 phase, AC motors. Separate sections shall be reserved in the MCC with
cable runs from the MCC to the compressor locations. One of the compressors shall also be
connected to the emergency generator MCC. The compressors shall have automatic condensate
dumps, drain lines shall also be provided at each location. Air intake lines of sufficient size non-
metal pipe shall run fromthe compressors to the forward corner quarters roof. A shut down of this
system on detection of any combustible or hazardous gas at the compressor air inlets shall be
provided.

7.19.3 Cascade Storage Cylinders



The future location for 50 DOT cascade cylinders (builder furnished) is on the main deck, adjacent to
the forward accommodation bulkhead. When provided, these shall be in racks. The footprint shall
be approximately 12 m long by 1 mwide. Foundations for the gas racks shall be required to be
provided by Builder during the construction phase.

7.19.4 Distribution Piping

A system of breathing air systempiping shall be furnished and installed by Builder throughout the
rig to work areas and places identified as mustering/working/ briefing/evacuation areas. This piping
shall be routed in conformance with the general arrangement layout review and shall be physically
protected by an angle iron cover where exposed to damage.

The locations to be serviced by this piping system include:

Machinery Deck

Engine Room
Switchgear / Engine Control Rooms
Mud Pump Room
Mud Pit Room
Sack Store Room
Mud Mixing Area

Main Deck

Cranes
Mud Logging Unit
Cement Unit
Upper Mud Processing Area
Pipe Deck/Main Deck/Substructure
BOP Area/BOP Control System Area
J acking Control Room
Radio Room
Life Boat Stations
Muster Stations

Drill Floor

Drill Floor
Drillers cabin
Casing Stabbing Basket (portable)
Monkey Board



All piping is specified as 12 mm NB diameter, 1.65 mm wall thickness, 310 Bar working pressure
with a 4:1 safety factor. It shall be fully annealed type 316 seamless, stainless hydraulic tubing to
ASTM A269 or ASTM A213 or equivalent. Hardness to be RB 80 or less.

All connections are to be properly applied Swagelok stainless steel fittings. All terminations are
to be plugged. The entire system to be pressure/leak tested to 465 Bar with a dry medium. Tubing
runs shall be arranged to avoid creating traps for water accumulation. Where traps are
unavoidable, a means shall be provided for draining the section without compromising system
integrity.

7.20 SHOWER / EYEWASH STATIONS

Combination shower / eyewash stations are to be installed in the sack storage rooms, the mud
pump room, engine room, upper and lower cantilever mud process rooms, drill floor and
elsewhere as indicated on the Contract Plans and as required by the Owner, Classification
Societies or Regulatory Bodies.

A portable eyewash kit is to be installed near the monkey board and the casing stabbing basket.

7.21 SURVIVAL SUITS

Builder shall furnish Regulatory Body approved survival suits. One (1) suit for each occupant
shall be stored in lockers in all staterooms. Additional suits shall be stored in lockers at the
lifeboats and other commonly occupied work areas.

Sufficient deck mounted fiberglass lockers with stainless steel hinges and hardware shall be
provided by the Builder for the lifeboat and work area survival suits. The lockers shall be clearly
labeled and located as determined by the builder.

7.22 PERSONAL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT

Appropriate personal protection equipment shall be provided in all areas where personnel are
working with hazardous materials, such as mud additives in the mud mixing area. Rubber apron,
rubber mud resistant boots, rubber long sleeved gloves and protective face masks with a breathing
filter shall be made available and kept in lockers close to the working areas. For personnel
working on the drill floor during wet trips, adequate protective clothing should be available to
protect the individual from the splashing of drilling fluids.

Eye wash stations and safety showers shall be located in strategic locations where personnel are
working with mud fluids and chemicals. See section 7.20.

In the electrical switchboard rooms, equipment shall be available to safely work with electrical
equipment; this may not be limited to rubber aprons, rubber boots, long sleeved rubber gloves,
specially insulated fuse pullers, grab hook and certified rubber mats in front of all switchboards.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 8.0 - PAINTING AND MARKING ............................................................................................................. 1
8.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................................................................... 1
8.2 PAINT SYSTEM - INTERIOR, EXTERIOR, TANKS .................................................................................. 2
8.3 MARKINGS - GENERAL ............................................................................................................................ 13
8.4 VESSEL'S NAME......................................................................................................................................... 13
8.5 BUILDER'S NAMEPLATES ....................................................................................................................... 13
8.6 DRAFT NUMERALS ................................................................................................................................... 13
8.7 LOAD LINE MARKINGS ........................................................................................................................... 13
8.8 LEG AND SEA WATER TOWER MARKINGS ......................................................................................... 13
8.9 CANTILEVER MARKINGS ........................................................................................................................ 13
8.10 COMPARTMENT LABELS ........................................................................................................................ 14
8.11 SAFETY MARKINGS.................................................................................................................................. 14
8.12 HVAC LABEL PLATES AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ............................................................... 14
8.13 NOTICE FRAMES ....................................................................................................................................... 14
8.14 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND PLANS ........................................................................................... 14
8.15 MISCELLANEOUS ...................................................................................................................................... 14
8.16 CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM ........................................................................................................ 15

SECTION 8.0 - PAINTING AND MARKING

8.1 GENERAL

All paint, coatings, and finishing materials shall be high-grade commercial products of a quality satisfactory to the
builder. The colors shall be in accordance with the builders color scheme. The Builder shall prepare and a painting
and decorative schedule which shall include types and colors of coating material including sample of colors (color
chips).

The paints and coatings employed shall be those manufactured by PV Paint, J otun, Sigma, Hempel or Akzo Nobel
(International Protective Coatings). Paint employed in a given coating system shall be from the same manufacturer.

Methods and techniques of painting shall conform to good painting practice as described in the Steel Structures
Painting Council manual, - Paint Application Specification #1- SSPC-PA-1-2011.

All steel surfaces shall be cleaned by grit/shot blasting to grade Sa 2.5/ISO8501-1 or equivalent.

The surface profile after abrasive blasting is to be in accordance with the paint manufacturers specification (30.-80
microns).

All surface preparations are to be inspected and approved by the Owners representative, paint manufacturer and
builder and recorded in the specified daily inspection report before coating.

When more than one coat is specified, subsequent coats shall not be applied until the preceding coating has become
properly dry and hard and/or as recommended by the manufacturer. All intermediate coats shall contrast in color
relative to the primer, each other and the topcoat.

The topcoat color of all hull tanks and voids shall be a light color (i.e. not black, etc.)

Angles, beams, brackets and flanges internal to tanks shall be stripe coated with brush application before applying
each paint layer by conventional spray. Internal paint system requiring multiple coats to allow verification shall be
coated in contrasting colors to allow verification of even coating. Stripe coats shall be applied by brush prior to
application of full coats. Paint for stripe coating shall be brushing quality.

Rollers may be used only for the application of the stripe coat and then only if they are of sufficient quality so as to
prevent inclusions of roller wool.

No priming or painting shall be done on the erection welds and fillet welds affecting water tightness of
compartments or tanks required to be tested until completion of such tests, except as may be provided herein.

All fixtures, display instrumentation, adjacent surfaces, label plates (including machinery), gaskets, walking treads,
etc., shall be properly protected during painting. After completion of the work all dirt, smudges, paint and varnish,
etc. shall be removed from the glass, plumbing fixtures, deck coverings, etc.

Gouges or dents in exposed steel surfaces shall be smoothed by fairing or grinding of welds on non-structural
bulkheads. Where gouges or dents are excessive an approved glazing compound may be employed after normal
procedures have been used to their fullest possibilities.

All parts or spaces not specifically mentioned or covered by the general clauses herein shall be cleaned and painted
to conform to the surroundings or to comparable spaces.

All interior and exterior steel surfaces of the spud cans at the bottom of each leg shall be left without blasting and
left uncoated; protection shall be provided by a cathodic protection system as outlined in clause 18 of this section.


All surfaces are to undergo pre-preparation by degreasing with an emulsion type solvent and pressure washing with
fresh water, prior to primary and secondary preparation.

BFE valves and loose items of equipment in ballast/preload tanks and void areas are to be supplied pre-coated in a
compatible system to its surrounding area.

All surface preparation is to be inspected and approved by the builders Representative before coating.

8.2 PAINT SYSTEM - INTERIOR, EXTERIOR, TANKS

The schedule of preparation, type and buildup of the paint systems to be used throughout the rig are presented in
Table 8.1 - Paint System, below.



Table 8.1 - Paint System
INTERVAL
BETWEEN COATS
MINIMUM DRY
FILM
THICKNESS PER
COAT
LOCATION NO. OF
COATS
SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINTING SPECIFICATION MIN.
HRS
MAX.
DAYS
MICRON
SHOP STEEL AT SHOP
ALL STEEL SURFACES SHALL BE ABRASIVE BLAST CLEANED TO SA 2.5 AND
APPLY :
SEE
NOTE 6
SEE
NOTE 6

1 ZINC SILICATE SHOP PRIMER (SEE NOTE 5)

- 15
A) HULL
1) LOAD WATERLINE TO
KEEL (BOTTOM PLATING AND
LEG WELLS)
2) MAIN DECK, SIDE TO
LOAD WATERLINE, LEG WELLS,
ELEVATING UNITS, BRACING
AND PLATFORM

AFTER FABRICATION & ERECTION
SPOT BLAST CLEAN ALL RUSTED, DAMAGED AND WELDED AREAS TO SA 2.5.
LIGHT SWEEP BLAST OTHER AREAS TO
REMOVE SALT AND CONTAMINANTS, ETC.

AND SPOT PRIME WITH ZINC RICH EPOXY PRIMER ON THE UNDERSIDE OF HULL
ONLY.

SEE
NOTE 6
SEE
NOTE 6

1 ZINC-RICH EPOXY - 65
1 H.B. EPOXY MID COAT - 150-175
1 POLYURETHANE FINISH COAT, (COLOR TBD)

STRIPE COATS TO BE APPLIED TO ALL WELDS, EDGES, ETC.

- 50-75

3) WORKING DECKS
A) DRILL FLOOR
B) PIPE RACKS, MAIN
DECK AND CANTILEVER

1 ULTRA HIGH BUILD / HIGH ABRASION EPOXY
POLYURETHANE FINISH COAT, (COLOR TBD) 150
1 NOTE: 1) 75 TO 100 MICRON ANCHOR PROFILE
2) NON SKID AGGREGATE ON DECK
75


INTERVAL
BETWEEN COATS
MINIMUM DRY
FILM
THICKNESS PER
COAT
LOCATION NO. OF
COATS
HRS
MAX.
DAYS
MICRON
B) HELIPORT
1) TOPSIDE
LIGHT SWEEP BLAST OTHER AREAS TO REMOVE SALT AND CONTAMINANTS,
ETC. AND SPOT PRIME WITH ZINC RICH EPOXY PRIMER
SEE
NOTE 6
SEE
NOTE 6

1

ZINC RICH EPOXY

-

65
1 HB EPOXY MID COAT - 125-150
1 POLYURETHANE FINISH , (COLOR TBD)

NOTE:
1) APPLY NON-FLAMMABLE NON-SKID AGGREGATE ON MAIN DECK AND
HELIPORT DECK, AT A RATE TO BE AGREED. (SAMPLE TO BE SUPPLIED)
2) HELIDECK MARKING PER CAP437


- 50-75

2) UNDERSIDE AND
STRUCTURAL

SEE
NOTE 6
SEE
NOTE 6

1 ZINC RICH EPOXY - 65
1 H.B. EPOXY MID-COAT - 125-150
1 POLYURETHANE FINISH, (COLOR TBD)


- 50-75



INTERVAL
BETWEEN COATS
MINIMUM DRY
FILM
THICKNESS PER
COAT
LOCATION NO. OF
COATS
HRS
MAX.
DAYS
MICRON
C) SUBSTRUCTURE / SUPER-
STRUCTURE
1) DRILL FLOOR, SUB-
STRUCTURE AND CANTILEVER
A) WORKING AREAS
B) PERIPHERY

SEE
NOTE 6
SEE
NOTE 6

2) DECK HOUSE
BULKHEADS
3) DECK HOUSE TOPS OR
DECKS
1 H.B. EPOXY MID-COAT - 150
4) DRAWWORKS HOUSE
(OUTSIDE)
5) WIND WALL AROUND
DRILL FLOOR (OUTSIDE)
1 POLYURETHANE FINISH COAT (COLOR TBD)

NOTE: INSIDE OF CANTILEVER TO HAVE WHITE FINISH COAT


-

-
65

D) LEGS & SEA WATER TOWER

BASELINE TO 140 M.
ABL

SEE
NOTE 6
SEE
NOTE 6

1 H.B. EPOXY 175
1 H.B. EPOXY 175
140 M. ABL TO TOP OF
LEGS
ALTERNATE: THIS SYSTEM MAY BE USED FOR THE ENTIRE LEG.
1 HB EPOXY MID COAT - 125-150
1 POLYURETHANE FINISH COAT, (COLOR TBD)
NOTE: OBSTACLES SHALL BE MARKED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE
REGULATORY BODY REQUIREMENTS. BOW LEG TO BE PAINTED ALTERNATING
RED/WHITE BANDS 20' LENGTH FOR A DISTANCE FROM TOP AS REQUIRED BY
REGULATORY BODY.

- 50-75



INTERVAL
BETWEEN COATS
MINIMUM DRY
FILM
THICKNESS PER
COAT
LOCATION NO. OF
COATS
HRS
MAX.
DAYS
MICRON
E) EXTERIOR DECK FITTINGS,
PIPE, VENT TRUNKS, HATCHES,
ETC.

SEE
NOTE 6
SEE
NOTE 6

1 HB EPOXY MID COAT - 150
1 POLYURETHANE FINISH COAT. (COLOR TBD)


- 65
F) CRANE FOUNDATION
(ABOVE MAIN DECK) / HAND
RAILS

SEE
NOTE 6
SEE
NOTE 6

1 HB EPOXY MID-COAT - 150
1 POLYURETHANE FINISH COAT, (COLOR TBD) (HAND RAILS TO BE YELLOW)


- 65
G) VOID SPACES AFTER FABRICATION & ERECTION

SEE
NOTE 6
SEE
NOTE 6

1 H.B. EPOXY PRIMER (OPTIONAL) 40
1 H.B. EPOXY MID COAT 125
1 H.B. EPOXY FINISH COAT WHITE

STRIPE COATS TO BE APPLIED TO ALL WELDS, EDGES, CORNERS, SEAMS,
BEHIND STIFFENERS, ETC

125



INTERVAL
BETWEEN COATS
MINIMUM DRY
FILM
THICKNESS PER
COAT
LOCATION NO. OF
COATS
HRS
MAX.
DAYS
MICRON
H) FRESH WATER TANKS

ROUND WELDS AND SHARP EDGES AND REMOVE WELD SPLATTER /
UNNECESSARY BRACKETS. H.P. WASH @ 3000 PSI MINIMUM. BLAST CLEAN TO
SA2.5.
SEE
NOTE 6
SEE
NOTE 6

1

EPOXY PRIMER (OPTIONAL)

40
1 H.B. EPOXY, 125
1 H.B. EPOXY, WHITE

SYSTEM TO BE CERTIFIED FOR THE CARRIAGE OF POTABLE WATER.

125

I) MUD PITS (ACTIVE, RESERVE
AND PROCESSING)
ROUND WELD AND SHARP EDGES AND REMOVE WELD SPLATTER /
UNNECESSARY BRACKETS. SPOT BLAST CLEAN ALL RUSTED, DAMAGED AND
WELDED AREAS TO SA2.5. MINIMUM 75 TO 100 MICRON ANCHOR PROFILE
SWEEP BLAST OTHER AREAS AND SPOT PRIME WITH EPOXY GLASS FLAKE
PRIMER
NOTE: PRODUCTS PROVIDED ARE REQUIRED TO BE FACTORY MIXED AND
SHALL CONTAIN A MINIMUM OF 0.34 (0.85 LB) PER GALLON OF GLASS FLAKE
MATERIAL.
SEE
NOTE 6
SEE
NOTE 6

1 GLASS FLAKE EPOXY 375
1 GLASS FLAKE EPOXY

BEHIND STIFFENERS, ETC.

375



INTERVAL
BETWEEN COATS
MINIMUM DRY
FILM
THICKNESS PER
COAT
LOCATION NO. OF
COATS
HRS
MAX.
DAYS
MICRON
J ) MUD PIT ROOM, SACK
STORAGE, PROCESS MUD
ROOM AND MUD PUMP
ROOM
ETC.

SEE
NOTE 6
SEE
NOTE 6

1 H.B. EPOXY MID-COAT - 150
1 POLYURETHANE FINISH, WHITE (DECK TO BE MID-GREY)


- 65

K) MACHINERY / STORAGE
SPACE
1 ) BULKHEADS AND
OVERHEADS
SPOT PRIME WITH H.B. EPOXY
SEE
NOTE 6
SEE
NOTE 6

1
1
H.B. EPOXY
H.B. EPOXY WHITE


125
125
2) DECK (INSIDE &
OUTSIDE COAMINGS)
LIGHT SWEEP BLAST OTHER AREAS TO REMOVE SALT & CONTAMINANTS, ETC.
SPOT PRIME WITH H.B. EPOXY
SEE
NOTE 6
SEE
NOTE 6

1
1

H.B. EPOXY
H.B. EPOXY (COLOR TBD) (EXTERNAL DECK)
MID GREY (INTERNAL DECK)

ESCAPE ROUTES MAIN DECK
NOTE: APPLY NON-FLAMMABLE NON-SKID AGGREGATE. AT A RATE TO BE
AGREED (SAMPLE TO BE SUPPLIED)


100
100


INTERVAL
BETWEEN COATS
MINIMUM DRY
FILM
THICKNESS PER
COAT
LOCATION NO. OF
COATS
HRS
MAX.
DAYS
MICRON
L) PRELOAD TANKS AND DRILL
WATER TANKS
UNNECESSARY BRACKETS. SPOT BLAST CLEAN ALL RUSTED, DAMAGED AND
WELDED AREAS TO SA2.5. SWEEP BLAST OTHER AREAS, SPOT PRIME WITH ZINC
RICH EPOXY PRIMER OR H.B. EPOXY

SEE
NOTE 6
SEE
NOTE 6

1 H.B. EPOXY 150
1 H.B. EPOXY WHITE


150
M) FUEL OIL, BASE OIL, AND
LUBE OIL TANKS (INTERIORS)
UNNECESSARY BRACKETS. POWER TOOL CLEAN ALL RUSTED, DAMAGED AND
WELDED AREAS TO St.3

APPLY PRESERVATIVE OIL.



INTERVAL
BETWEEN COATS
MINIMUM DRY
FILM
THICKNESS PER
COAT
LOCATION NO. OF
COATS
HRS
MAX.
DAYS
MICRON
N) ALL STEEL PIPE LOCATED IN
TANKS

SURFACE PREPARATION
AS PER SURROUNDING AREAS

SUBSEQUENT SYSTEMS SHALL BE AS PER SURROUNDING AREAS

ALL STEEL PIPE OUTSIDE OF
TANKS, INCLUDING PIPE
SURFACE PREPARATION SEE
NOTE 6
SEE
NOTE 6

LOCATED IN WEATHER
EXPOSED AREAS INSULATED
AND NON-INSULATED
REPAIR PROCEDURE FOR FIELD J OINTS / DAMAGED AREAS

BLAST TO SA 2-1/2, WHERE POSSIBLE, OTHERWISE POWER TOOL CLEAN ALL
CORRODED AREAS TO St3 AND COAT AS PER SURROUNDING AREAS.

EXHAUST PIPES (EXPOSED)

1
1
1
TOP-COATING REQUIRED FOR NON-INSULATED PIPEWORK (COLOR: AS PER THE
SURROUNDING AREA)

NOTE: ALL PIPING AND PIPE COVERING EXPOSED TO VIEW SHALL BE COATED
TO MATCH THE SPACE IN WHICH IT IS LOCATED. EACH PIPE SHALL BE COLOR
CODED AT BULKHEAD PENETRATIONS, AT THE EQUIPMENT OR MACHINERY
AND AT 20' MAXIMUM SPAN INTERVALS.


INTERNATIONAL INTERZINC 22
INTERNATIONAL INTERTHERM 50
INTERNATIONAL INTERTHERM 50

75
25
25


INTERVAL
BETWEEN COATS
MINIMUM DRY
FILM
THICKNESS PER
COAT
LOCATION NO. OF
COATS
HRS
MAX.
DAYS
MICRON
O) AREAS BEHIND INSULATION
AND PANELING
SURFACE PREPARATION
SPOT-BLAST CLEAN ALL RUSTED, DAMAGED AND WELDED AREAS TO SA2,
AND SPOT COAT WITH H.B. EPOXY

SEE
NOTE 6
SEE
NOTE 6

PLATES, STIFFENERS 1 HIGH BOND EPOXY, WHITE 150

THE EPOXY COATING APPLIED TO THE SURROUNDING AREAS SHALL HAVE
FIRE CERTIFICATES DEFINED AS CLASS 1 BS 476:PART 7:1987: SURFACE SPREAD
OF FLAME.

WET ON WET STRIPE COATING WILL BE CONSIDERED IN LIEU OF BRUSH
COATING IN THESE AREAS.

P)
1) BILGE HOLDING TANKS
2) SANITARY HOLDING TANKS
SURFACE PREPARATION
ALL WELDS SEAMS, CORRODED, DAMAGED / BURNT AREAS TO BE SPOT
BLASTED TO SA2.5 AND REMAINING INTACT SHOP PRIMER TO BE GRIT SWEPT
AND SPOT COAT WITH EPOXY PHENOLIC
SEE
NOTE 6
SEE
NOTE 6

3) WASTE OIL TANKS 1 EPOXY PHENOLIC 125
4) DIRTY OIL TANKS 1 EPOXY PHENOLIC 125
5) CONTAMINATED DRAIN
TANKS

Q)
1) GALVANIZED HANDRAILS
SURFACE PREPARATION
DEGREASE WHERE NECESSARY, FRESH WATER WASH

1 ETCH SOLUTION OR LIGHT SWEEP BLAST
FOLLOWED BY SYSTEM AS PER SURROUNDING AREAS
N/A

2) STRUCTURAL DUCTING
INTERNALS
1
1
ZINC RICH EPOXY
H.B. EPOXY FIRST 5 METERS FROM EXTERIOR OPENING
75
150
STRIPE COATS TO BE APPLIED TO ALL WELDS, EDGES, CORNERS, SEAMS ,



INTERVAL
BETWEEN COATS
MINIMUM DRY
FILM
THICKNESS PER
COAT
LOCATION NO. OF
COATS
HRS
MAX.
DAYS
MICRON
GENERAL NOTES:

1. AIRLESS SPRAY APPLICATION (AS) IS NECESSARY IN ORDER TO ACHIEVE THE REQUIRED DRY FILM THICKNESS / BUILD SPECIFIED. BRUSHING, ROLLING AND
CONVENTIONAL SPRAY APPLICATIONS MAY NOT ACHIEVE THE REQUIRED THICKNESS.
2. THINNING OF THE PRODUCTS SPECIFIED IS NOT RECOMMENDED WITHOUT PRIOR CONSULTATION WITH REPRESENTATIVE OF PAINT MANUFACTURER
REPRESENTATIVE.
3. WHEN USING ANY TYPE OF PAINT IN SPACES, FORCED VENTILATION IS REQUIRED; FOR FURTHER INFORMATION, THE PAINT MANUFACTURER REPRESENTATIVE
SHALL BE CONTACTED FOR RECOMMENDATIONS.
4. WHERE THERE IS OIL OR GREASE, REMOVE IT WITH PAINT MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDED EMULSIFIABLE DEGREASER. HIGH PRESSURE FRESH WATER BLAST
AT 3000 PSI TO REMOVE THE EMULSIFIED RESIDUES, SALT, DIRT, SOOT AND OTHER CONTAMINANTS, ETC. ALLOW SURFACE TO DRY THOROUGHLY
5. PRIMER TO BE WELD THROUGH TYPE. APPROVED BY THE CERTIFYING AUTHORITY,
6. OVER-COATING INTERVALS ARE TO COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS.



8.3 MARKINGS - GENERAL

All equipment installed on the Vessel shall have an legible name plate with a (according to the numbering
system selected by the Owner) tag number and description.

Letters and numbers on all signs, notices, etc., shall be in English.

All nameplates and notices to Builder's standard shall be of one of the following materials, appropriate to
the location where used however, all exterior nameplates shall be brass:

Anodized aluminum with image imbedded in the anodized layer photographically
("Metalphoto" process, or equal).
Laminated plastic with engraved characters.
Brass plates with engraved characters.

8.4 VESSEL'S NAME

The Vessel's name and hailing port, in block letters, shall be placed on the transom side shell in accordance
with customs regulations. Name letters shall be 300 mm minimum in height. The Vessel's name shall also
be on each side of the bow vertical shell at side and on four sides of the derrick wind wall at the monkey
board level. All helicopter deck navigation markings shall be according to CAP 437, including Vessel's
name, insignia, etc. All letters shall be outlined by continuous weld bead (not for aluminum helidecks) and
painted in contrasting color.

8.5 BUILDER'S NAMEPLATES

Two Builder's nameplates shall be provided and of an attractive design and located determined by the
builder and in accordance with applicable Regulatory Requirements. The nameplates shall contain the
Vessel's name, the Builder's name, the Builder's hull number, year built and Designers name.

8.6 DRAFT NUMERALS

Draft numerals shall be Arabic, 150 mm (6) projected height, of simple outline and good proportion, the
bottom of each figure being the height in meters above the bottom of the keel. Draft figures shall be
painted in a contrasting color to each side of the hull at the bow and stern and onto the three leg wells
shell.

8.7 LOAD LINE MARKINGS

Load line markings are to be installed on the hull, port and starboard, in accordance with the Classification
Society and Regulatory Body Requirements. All markings are to be outlined with a 5mm weld bead and
painted a contrasting color.

8.8 LEG AND SEA WATER TOWER MARKINGS

Leg elevations shall be marked on one chord of each leg that is visible from the J acking Control Room.
See Section 6.3.1 for details.

A similar system of markings shall be used to indicate the elevation of the sea water towers below the
bottom of the hull.

8.9 CANTILEVER MARKINGS



On each cantilever beam, 25 mm wide x 150 mm high marks shall be provided at 250 mm intervals, to
indicate the distance from the well center to the transom. Arabic numerals 100 mm high shall indicate the
distance on 1500 mm intervals. In addition, a prominent mark shall be placed on the hold down clamp
which aligns with a mark on the cantilever beam to indicate when the cantilever beam is fully retracted.
All marks shall be outlined with a weld bead and painted in bright contrasting colors.

8.10 COMPARTMENT LABELS

All rooms or compartments shall be provided with label plates over entrance doors, designating
compartment/room number and function or use. Staterooms shall be further labeled to indicate occupants
assigned to the room.

8.11 SAFETY MARKINGS

Markings of the Vessel's equipment, lifesaving equipment, fire extinguishers, fire stations, fire hoses,
emergency lights, etc., and provision of warning signals and flags, shall comply with Regulatory Bodies
requirements. Lifeboat station directional signs and other markings shall be provided and located as
required.

Lifeboat instruction cards, firefighting and access plan general notice cards shall be of anodized aluminum
with the image imbedded in the anodized layer photographically. They shall be securely mounted
mechanically or by an approved adhesive and shall be installed as required.

8.12 HVAC LABEL PLATES AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Label plates shall be provided to clearly identify each fan, controller, heater, cooling coil, motor access
plate, thermostat, damper, supply, and exhaust outlet and other major components of the systems. In the
quarters/offices area, these shall be located on or adjacent to ceiling panels required for removal to access
these components. Instruction label plates shall be provided for dampers and outlets and other equipment
required only for intermittent ventilation, or requiring periodic cleaning.

Instructions for operating the system shall be provided and posted in fan rooms.

8.13 NOTICE FRAMES

Notice frames shall be provided for and comply with any notice requirements of the Regulatory Bodies.

8.14 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND PLANS

The following Plans and operating instructions shall be reproduced by Metalphoto process and mounted in
builder and Regulatory Body designated locations on the vessel:

Firefighting and safety control system and escape routes
Principal piping systems (fuel oil transfer system, dirty oil discharge system, and bilge and
ballast system, fixed foam system, Water Mist system)
Detail wiring diagram of main switchboard (located adjacent to main switchboard) (690 volt
and 480 volt One Line Diagrams only)

8.15 MISCELLANEOUS

A white board lined off for tank soundings and metal chalk tray shall be provided in a location
near the jacking control room entrance as directed by Owner.



A white board with the schematic of the bulk mud system and liquid mud pits shall be provided in
the toolpushers office, the barge engineers office and the company mans office.

Watertight closures, doors, hatches, covers, etc., shall be labeled:

THIS DOOR, (HATCH,
COVER, ETC.) MUST BE
KEPT CLOSED DURING
AFLOAT OPERATIONS

OR
THIS DOOR, (HATCH,
COVER, ETC.) MUST BE
LOCKED CLOSED DURING
AFLOAT OPERATIONS

as required by the Operations Manual.

In a clearly visible location, all preload tank hatch covers and spud can hatch covers shall be labeled:

WARNING: COMPLETE CONFINED
SPACE PROCEDURES AND PERMIT
BEFORE ENTERING TANK

8.16 CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM

8.16.1 Spud Cans and Legs

A sacrificial anode type system for the legs and spud cans (interior and exterior) shall be
provided designed for a service life of ten (10) years.

Calculations shall be furnished to the Designer. Coverage is to be from the bottom of the
can to an elevation of 129.5 m (425-0) above the bottom of the can. Care must be taken
to avoid cathodic hot spots and to provide uniform coverage for all surfaces.

Calculation of cathodic protection for immersed surfaces is to comply with the latest
revision of the current cathodic protection standards (DNV RP B401 or equivalent).

Legs will be coated. Interior and exterior of spud cans will be blasted to remove all mill
scale and left uncoated.

8.16.2 Piping

An anti-fouling and cathodic protection system shall be installed by Builder at each (total
3) sea water pump discharge connection point.

8.16.3 Sea Chests

A sacrificial anode and anti-fouling system for the sea chests shall be installed by the
Builder. The anode system shall be designed for a minimum service life of ten (10) years.

Table of contents

SECTION 9.0 - DECK MACHINERY .......................................................................................................... 1

9.1 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................... 1
9.2 CRANES ........................................................................................................................................ 1
9.3 MOORING SYSTEM .................................................................................................................... 2
9.4 TOWING SYSTEM ....................................................................................................................... 3
9.5 TOWING BRIDLE RETRIEVING SYSTEM ............................................................................... 4
9.6 CANTILEVER AND DRILL FLOOR SKIDDING UNITS .......................................................... 4
9.7 CANTILEVER HYDRAULIC POWER UNIT ............................................................................. 5


SECTION 9.0 - DECK MACHINERY

9.1 GENERAL

The Builder shall install, connect, and align, etc., all items of deck machinery and test to demonstrate
performance as required by these Specifications and as required by the regulatory Bodies for certification.
The Owner shall provide only those specific items of deck machinery as listed in Section 18 as being OFE.

9.2 CRANES

Three(3) cranes, rated at 55 tons @ 25 ft. (7.5 m) electro-hydraulic (alternatively diesel-hydraulic), with 36.5
m(120 ft.) boom, load monitoring and alarmsystemand pedestal adapters shall be installed where shown on
the Contract Plans. The minimum height of the lowest projecting part of the cranes shall be about 9 meters
above the main deck or at sufficient height to clear any structures adjacent to the crane. Load monitoring
and safety system shall be installed on each crane. Each crane will also be equipped with an approved
communication system (VHF and UHF radio, telephone, deck loud hailer), anti-pollution system and a
slack rope tensioner. The cranes shall comply with Class safety requirements and shall be certified for man
riding as well.

Crane pedestals shall be provided with access platform and access from the main deck. In the event the
Owner supplies cranes, which require raising for roller/bearing maintenance, Builder shall fabricate and
install necessary jacking structure in/on the pedestals.

Hoisting speed shall be as follows:

Main hoist: 21~24m/min.
Auxiliary hoist: 30~35m/min.

Main power supply: 690 V/ 60Hz / 3Ph for two cranes and 480 V/ 60Hz /3 Ph for one crane.

Crane boom supports shall be provided with timber layer and pad eyes for sea fastening.

Securing lugs for hook and block to be provided for towing.

Heavy tool store hatch shall be served by one of the cranes. STBD crane is accessed from the Living
Quarters. The AFT crane from the jack house, and PORT crane from the main deck by spiral ladders.

Maintenance of cranes to be performed as close to delivery as applicable:
A. Annual inspection to be performed by OEM representative, inspection to be performed, but shall not
be limited to the latest edition (at the time of Contract signing) of API RP2D.
Note: Manufactures' requirements may exceed API requirement, however API to be used as a
minimum standard.
B. Oils and fluids
1. Oil samples to be taken and analysis to be performed. Analysis is to include ISO particle
count. This includes all hydraulic, gear oil, engine oil and cooling fluids.
2. Slew bearing grease sample to be taken and analysis performed.
3. Slew bearing deflection to be taken and recorded.

Prior to delivery crane must be inspected.
C. Wire rope and replace all wire rope.
D. Hooks and wire rope sockets and perform NDE inspection on main and auxiliary hoist hooks and all
wire rope sockets, items must meet components manufacturers requirements.

.


9.3 MOORING SYSTEM

Four sets of mooring winches, line load measuring and display systems, swivel fairleads, deck sheaves,
cables, anchors, buoys, and pennant lines shall be installed. Winches, turning sheaves, and fairleads shall
be arranged to ensure proper cable winding on the drums, as well as to provide the maximum amount of
unobstructed deck area possible.

Winch, deck turning sheave, and fairlead foundations shall be designed and built based on the breaking
strength of the cable. Four suitable anchor racks shall be provided with suitable stowage for anchor buoys
and pennant lines. Stern anchor racks shall be located on the port and starboard sides near the stern.

9.3.1 Mooring Winches (4 each)

Stall pull - 80 mt.
Rated pull 60 mt on the last layer
Brake capacity - 240 mt.
Drum capacity - 914 m of 51mm wire rope
Electric drive - Frequency conversion, 480 or 690 Volt
Local control as well as Remote control, from the jacking (barge) control room
Level winder (if required by equipment layout)

The Builder shall provide a central control console and local controls complete with all the specified functions
of the winches, including but not limited to: Line load monitoring system / amperage gauge , etc. (All
functions are to be visible at the winch controls and barge control room console)

9.3.2 Cables (4 each)

Diameter 51mm EIPS, 6 x 37WS+IWRC, RRL, Galvanized
Length - 914 m
Terminated with a closed spelter socket

9.3.3 Swivel Fairleads and Deck Sheaves

Swivel type fairleads, four each, for 51mm wire rope
Fixed type, horizontal turning deck sheaves, pedestal mounted, 4 each for 51 mm
wire rope.

9.3.4 Anchors

Four each
7,500 kg each, Flipper Delta
With shackles, anchor connecting link, Baldt No. 7 and other required jewelry

9.3.5 Anchor Buoys

Five each, non-metallic, non-rigid buoys, to support 150 meters of 44 mm dia. wire
rope and remain 50 % above sea surface.

9.3.6 Pennant Lines

Ten each, pennant lines, 44 mmdia x 46 meters long, 6 x 41 IWRC EIPS galvanized
wire rope with thimble eyes both ends


Ten each, pennant lines, 44 mmdia x 30 meters long, 6 x 41 IWRC EIPS galvanized
wire rope with thimble eyes both ends

Ten each, pennant chains, 51 mmnominal dia ORQ x 5.0 meters long stud link chain
with end link one end

25 each, shackles, 51 mm nominal dia.

9.3.7 Miscellaneous

Four each, mooring lines, 75 mmdia x 46 meters long, 8 strand braided nylon rope with
4 foot leather/canvas covered eye on one end

Four each, mooring chains, 38 mm nominal dia x 6 meters long ORQ chain

Four each, mooring shackles, 63 mm nominal dia safety shackle

Four each, mooring shackles, 38 mm nominal dia safety shackle

9.4 TOWING SYSTEM

Towing pads, chocks, fairleads, and brackets shall be provided and located as shown on the Contract Plans.
All pads, chocks, fairleads, and brackets shall be rated for 150 mt. SWL except for the five bow-mounted
Smit towing pads which shall be rated for 225 mt. SWL. Also see Section 3.13.

The following towing equipment shall be furnished by the Owner and installed by the Builder:

2 each, bridle chains, 76 mm nominal dia ORQ x 25 meters long stud link chain with end link
each end

2 each, towing chains, 76 mmnominal dia ORQ x 10 meters long stud link chain w/end link each
end rig to cut to suit

2 each, towing pennants, 63 mm dia x 40 meters wire rope, 6 x 41 IWRC EIPS galvanized with
thimble eyes both ends.

2 each, towing pennants, 51 mm dia x 40 meters wire rope, 6 x 41 IWRC EIPS galvanized with
thimble eyes both ends.

1 each, towing plate, Delta plate for 76mmchain, Marquip number 3 or equivalent, suitable for
the capacity of the wire SWL +10 % as a minimum.

5 each, towing shackles, 75 mt. SWL anchor safety.

4 each, chain links, 76 mmnominal detachable chain connecting link, Baldt.

Emergency towline, consisting of:

1 each, 14 m x 76 mm ORQ chain

61 meters x 63 mmdia, IWRC EIPS, wire rope thimble eye both ends.



2 each, 75 mt. SWL anchor safety shackle

1 each, 76 mm nominal dia chain end link

125 meters x 51 mmdia 8 strand braided polypropylene rope, color orange

1 each, orange marker buoy, 1 meter in dia w/attachment point

9.5 TOWING BRIDLE RETRIEVING SYSTEM

A towing bridle retrieving system shall be provided consisting of:

Two snatch blocks suspended from the helideck support structure with two 5.0 mt. air-driven winches,
rated at 8.6 bar operating pressure, arranged on an elevated platform mounted on the helideck support
structure above the main deck, and two recovery lines (19 mmdia., 125 meters long wire rope, IWRC EIPS
galvanized with thimble eye on one end).

Two additional 4.5 mt. air-driven winches mounted on the main deck, behind the forward towing pad eyes,
and two 4.5 mt. air-driven winches on the main deck aft, to handle towing lines. Personnel access shall be
provided to all equipment and fixtures in accordance with good marine practice.

Builder is to fully install towing bridle and ensure all interferences with the helideck and forward lifeboat
are removed.

All winches to have spooling devices.

9.6 CANTILEVER AND DRILL FLOOR SKIDDING UNITS

The system will consist of one complete set hydraulically powered cantilever and drill floor skidding
systems, cantilever Hydraulic Power Unit (HPU) cantilever rollers, shims, pads and service jack system,
etc. and associated equipment complete with control consoles.

Cantilever skidding system

The cantilever skidding system consists of a control stand and four jacks with capacity sufficient to skid the
cantilever with the most onerous combination of drill floor position, pipe rack load and setback load
through the full longitudinal range of skidding, subject to verification of Builder calculations for the
cantilever weight and static friction and approval of same by Designer. The Builder is to provide and install
all interconnecting piping, fittings, valves, hoses, etc. to complete the system.

Each skidding cylinder is connected to the cantilever skidding beam by means of one sliding locking pin
housing. The locking pin housing contains the locking pin and transfers all loads between the cylinders and
skidding beam. The locking pins are hydraulically actuated and are to be sequenced so that one pin is
always engaged in the skidding when the cylinders are cycling. This positive engagement is necessary to
prevent a run-away situation of the cantilever beam.

Drill floor skidding system

For the drill floor transverse skidding system, the Builder shall provide for and install control console (1
unit) and lift and roll skidding system (4 assemblies).


Each lift and roll skidding assembly consists of a base plate, Hilman Roller, lift cylinders and skidding
cylinders. The base or skidding plate is supported by the substructure upper flange. A Hilman Roller rests
on the upper surface of the base plate. Short stroke lift cylinders, attached to the top of the Hilman Roller,
lift the drill floor off of the substructure upper flange. While elevated, the skid cylinders which are attached
to both the base plate and drill floor leg are extended, thus moving the drill floor. When the skid cylinder
reaches the end of its stroke, the lift cylinders are retracted, lowering the drill floor to the substructure. The
skid cylinders are retracted and the process is repeated.

The four (4) assemblies operate in unison to move the drill floor to port or starboard.

The control console shall control and synchronize the operation of the four (4) lift and roll skidding
assemblies. Hydraulic power shall be supplied from the drill floor HPU. The Builder is to provide and
install all interconnecting piping, fittings, valves, hoses, etc. to complete the system.

Operating pressure for the lift and roll skidding system is 207 bar.

9.7 CANTILEVER HYDRAULIC POWER UNIT

The Builder shall install an independent Cantilever Hydraulic Power Unit, connect, test and prove
operational. The Cantilever Hydraulic Power Unit is designed to power the Cantilever Skidding System and
consists of the following:

Electric motors and variable delivery piston pumps, complete with power limiting
controls, are mounted vertically for compactness. The pumps and motors are mounted on rubber housings
to reduce vibration and noise to acceptable levels. The pumps and motors are connected together with
flexible couplings and bell housings.

The oil reservoir tank, constructed from stainless steel, is mounted above the height of the pumps, to
facilitate gravity feed, and is complete with isolation valves. The isolation valves allow the pumps to be
removed without having to drain the tank. The tank acts as a reservoir for reserve hydraulic oil and as a
catchment for return oil from the system.

The following items are fitted to the reservoir:
Air breather complete with filter
Temperature gauge with probe, which monitors the oil temperature
Immersion heater, controlled automatically by the temperature gauge, keeps the oil temperature
constant when the unit is idle.
Oil level sight glass and level switch
Fill and drain line filters
All coupling and hose connections to be suitable for marine environment

The whole unit is incorporated within a bump frame with certified lifting lugs at each comer. The bottom of
the unit is fitted with a sloping drip tray, which leads to a drain socket. A stainless steel control panel is
mounted on the side of the unit.


TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 10.0 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEM............................................ 1

10.1 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................................... 1
10.2 SYSTEMS ..................................................................................................................................................... 1
10.3 AIR CONDITIONING COOLING COILS ................................................................................................... 6
10.4 PIPING .......................................................................................................................................................... 6
10.5 FANS AND MOTORS .................................................................................................................................. 6
10.6 TRUNKS, DUCTS, ACCESS AND HOODS ............................................................................................... 6
10.7 INSULATION AND LAGGING .................................................................................................................. 8

SECTION 10.0 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEM

10.1 GENERAL

The Builder shall design, furnish and install a complete new ventilation, air conditioning system for the vessel.
Builder shall perform the engineering design, including heat load/gain analyses and submit the results to the Owner
for review and approval.

The requirements of this Section apply to all spaces, including accommodation, engine room, auxiliary machinery
room, VFD room, mud pump room, mud pits room, store rooms, and other working spaces. HVAC system for these
spaces should have 100% redundancy.

In the accommodation spaces, including recreation rooms, offices, etc., corridors shall not be used to collect return
air. Return air from these spaces shall be ducted back from each space served.

Air conditioning shall also cover stairways /wells in the accommodation block to stop condensation due to large
temperature differentials.

10.2 SYSTEMS

10.2.1 Air-Conditioning

All staterooms, recreation rooms, mess room, the hospital treatment room, the radio room, the jacking
control room, offices, etc., and the VFD room shall be air-conditioned using chilled water for each system.
Heat shall be provided using an electric heat system located in air handling unit.

The air conditioning system shall consist of (2) centralized chilled water units (chillers) each sized for
100% of the total rig load. The chillers shall utilize screw-type compressors, and all equipment is to be of
Carrier manufacture or equivalent. The system shall have redundant pumps for circulation of the chilled
water.

Accommodations:

Air handling rooms shall be located on each level for servicing of those areas. Medium or high pressure air
distribution is to be utilized so as to reduce ducting sizes and number of air handling units (AHU). There
shall be no more than (1) air handler room for each level of the quarters; preference is for an air handler
room to serve multiple levels. Temperature control of individual spaces shall be provided by volume
adjustment of supply air terminals using opposed blade dampers.

Each stateroom, office and public area shall have individual temperature control. The relative humidity
within the accommodation spaces shall be maintained between 30 % and 70 % regardless of external
conditions

Machinery Deck:

Additional air handler room(s) shall be located on the machinery deck to serve the drilling and jacking
VFD rooms, warehouse, electrical workshop, mechanical workshop, and maintenance office.

The drillers cabin as well as the LER/LIR (Local Equipment Room/Local Instrument Room) shall be air-
conditioned with an air-conditioning unit, suitable for this application and the hazardous area classification.

Each air handler room shall be designed so as to provide at least 100 % redundancy for the designated heat
load.


For isolated spaces that are to be air conditioned, individual unit air-conditioners/heaters will be installed.

10.2.2 System Design Requirements

The machinery providing the air-conditioning to the quarters shall consist essentially of one central chilled
water unit. The condenser shall be air or water cooled. The compressor and associated equipment capacity
shall be capable of handling peak requirements of all air-conditioned spaces with all air-handler units
operating. The system refrigerant shall be an environmentally friendly type, like HFC-134a or an
approved equivalent.

Air-handler shall be designed with copper tube and copper fins with epoxy coating. Each air-handler units
capacity shall be capable of handling peak requirements of the air-conditioned space or zone being served.
Air handlers shall be fitted with moisture indicators, over-sized dryers and cleanable filters as well as a UV
disinfectant system.

Air handler system is to be designed for boost cooling and load fluctuations flow capacity to support areas
such as mess and recreation rooms, high exhaust air volume loads such as galley and smoking areas, and
other areas.

In the design of the system, provisions shall be made to ensure performance is maintained even under low
ambient temperature (e.g. cooling VFD room under outdoor winter conditions). Air-handlers shall be fully
unitized equipment, complete with (isolatable) gauges, flow indicators, sensors, safety devices,
instrumentation and controls. All materials used shall be suitable for a marine environment.

All outside air vent supply registers for the quarters shall be equipped with a positive action screw down
means of closure, watertight as required by Class.

The air-conditioning and heating system shall be sized for the following conditions:

Highest outside ambient air temperature design condition: 45 C
Wet bulb temperature design condition 38 C
Lowest outside ambient air temperature design condition: -10
o
C
Highest outside ambient humidity design condition: 90 % R.H.
Lowest outside ambient humidity design condition: 30 % R.H.
Seawater:
Lowest: 0
o
C
Highest: 32
o
C

Table 10.1 - HVAC Performance Requirement
Area Summer Winter Rel Humidity
Quarters, staterooms,
hospital treatment room,
jacking control room
and offices

23 C

22 C

<70 %, >30 %
Avg. 50 %
Other space (machinery
stopped)

N/A
4.0 C

The system shall be certified by Classification Society.

10.2.3 Package Units

A split level unit style air cooled air conditioning unit shall be installed in the rubber storeroom, P.E. lab, and
similar isolated spaces. The drillers house shall feature a roof mounted air-conditioning unit. The unit for the
Drillers Cabin shall be suitable for the respective hazardous area classification. Each unit shall feature copper

tube and fin condenser and exchangers with epoxy coating. Each unitized package shall be complete with all
controls, indicators and safety devices. All materials used shall be suitable for a marine environment.

Driller's Cabin, LIR/LER and cantilever MCC roompackaged air conditioning units outdoor sections shall be
stainless steel frame. Drillers cabin air conditioner unit to be mounted on top of cabin or outside cabin, not
inside.

10.2.4 Ventilation System

The ventilation requirements of a space shall be the largest of the three quantities determined by: the rate of
air change, the required fresh air flow per occupants and equipment (e.g., engines, air compressors) and the
limiting temperature rise. Note that the combustion air to the diesel sets and air compressors should be
directed through a dedicated pipe line with gas detection and fire dampers, to shut down in case of an
explosive gas mixture in the intake air.

The required maximum temperature rise, minimum ventilation flow and rate of outside air changes for all
spaces is generally given in Table 10.2 as a guidance, the Builder is responsible to adjust the guidelines for
air changes or fan flow rates based on the actual volume or size of the spaces to be ventilated to achieve the
air changes as required to meet current Class or Regulatory requirements. For the accommodation spaces
the minimum number of air changes shall be at least 30 m
3
/h per person.

All enclosed living and working non-hazardous spaces are to be maintained under a positive pressure. Access
corridors and escape routes should be maintained at a pressure above that of adjacent cabins and other areas in
order to provide smoke control in event of fire in an occupied space.

The galley, laundries, change rooms and hospital treatment roomshall have exhaust systems that are ducted
directly to the weather away fromother ventilation intakes.

Each stateroom, office and public area shall have individual temperature control.

Ductwork connections to outside atmosphere and through fire barriers should be provided with fire / gas
dampers (SUS316) rated to that of the fire barrier.

Spaces not covered by the quarters HVAC, requiring natural supply or exhaust ventilation, without direct
connection to the weather, shall have doors fitted with louvers (520 mm minimum) in the lower panel.
Where door louvers or door undercuts are not desired or are impractical, a bulkhead opening fitted with fixed
louver, wire mesh or deflection grill, shall be used.

Toilet and shower space doors, without louvers, shall be undercut (130 m/h maximum). The maximum air
velocity through free openings shall not exceed 2 m/sec.

Common supply with a separate exhaust fan for the smoking recreation room shall be arranged.

As required, silencers shall be installed in the ventilation systemto reduce noise levels.

BASED ON JOB #7811 REV.0


Table 10.2
SPACE MECHANICAL
VENTILATION
NATURAL
VENTILATION
TEMP. AIR REMARKS
SUP. EXH. SUP. EXH. RISE C CHG. SEE NOTES & ABBREVIATIONS
BELOW
ENGINE ROOM X X 10 1/MIN. 2-ONE SPEED SUPPLY FAN
2-ONE SPEED EXHAUST FAN
VFD ROOM
EMER. VENT. SYSTEM
X X 5.5 NATURAL EXHAUST TO ENGINE
ROOM
AUXILIARY MACHINE
ROOMS
X X 10 1/MIN. CIRCULATING FAN - SUPPLY
FROM ENGINE ROOM NATURAL
EXHAUST TO ENGINE ROOM
SACK STOWAGE ROOMS X X 10 1/MIN. 1-ONE SPEED SUPPLY FAN
STOWAGE ROOM &
WORKSHOPS
X X 10 3/MIN. 1-ONE SPEED SUPPLY FAN
P TANK ROOMS, PORT
& STARBOARD

X X 10 1/MIN. 1-ONE SPEED SUPPLY FAN
MUD PIT ROOM X X 10 2/MIN. 1-ONE SPEED SUPPLY FAN
EXPLOSION PROOF FANS &
HEATERS
(SEE NOTE 2)
MUD PITS X X 1/MIN. SEE SECTION DESCRIPTION
BELOW & NOTE 2
MUD PUMP ROOM X X 10 1/MIN. 1-TWO SPEED SUPPLY FAN
1-TWO SPEED EXHAUST FAN
(SEE NOTE 2)
MUD PROCESS ROOM
LOWER LEVEL
X X 10 2/MIN 2-ONE SPEED SUPPLY FANS
MUD PROCESS ROOM
UPPER LEVEL
X X 10 1/MIN 2-ONE SPEED EXHAUST FANS
(SEE NOTE 2)


SPACE MECHANICAL
VENTILATION
NATURAL
VENTILATION
TEMP. AIR REMARKS
SUP. EXH. SUP. EXH. RISE C CHG. SEE NOTES & ABBREVIATIONS
BELOW
SHALE SHAKER HOOD X X 10
0
1/MIN (2) ONE -SPEED EXHAUST FANS.
OBJ ECTIVE IS TO HAVE
ENOUGH AIRFLOW TO REMOVE
THE FUMES WITHOUT PULLING
THE LIQUID. USE OF CURTAINS
AND CONTROLLED AIRFLOW IS
RECOMMENDED (SEE NOTE 2)
RADIO ROOM

X 10 / HR A/C SYSTEM
MESS AND REC. ROOMS

X 6/HR A/C SYSTEM
DRY STORES

X 10/HR EXPLOSION PROOF FANS AND
HEATERS
GALLEYS X X 20 /HR MS
30 /HR ME
A/C SYSTEM
PLC ROOM X X 1/HR A/C SYSTEM
SWITCHGEAR ROOM X 2/HR A/C SYSTEM

Notes: 1) Abbreviations used in the table are as follows:
2) Hazardous area.

CHG Change
EC Electric Convection Heater
EMER Emergency
EXH. Exhaust
ME Mechanical Exhaust
MS Mechanical Supply
NE Natural Exhaust
NS Natural Supply
SUP. Supply
VENT. Ventilation


10.3 AIR CONDITIONING COOLING COILS

Pre-heaters for air-conditioning systems shall be selected to suit design requirements.

The condenser and evaporator coils shall be of good commercial quality. Tubes shall be copper and fins shall
be copper, condenser coil shall be with epoxy coating for marine service.

Cooling coils shall be provided with suitable drip pans fitted with a 25 mm drain and water seal at each end of
the pan.

Coils and pans shall be easily accessible for periodic cleaning.

10.4 PIPING

The piping systems shall be carefully installed and every precaution taken to keep the system absolutely
clean internally during erection. Before operating the chillers compressors, the system shall be cleaned by
means of a special surge drum containing a filter, screen, and large quantity of desiccant, connected into the
suction side of the system. Prior to cleaning and pressure tightness tests, the system shall be dehydrated by
means of special vacuum pumps capable of developing a vacuum of at least 752 mm Hg. at -1 C on a wet
bulb vacuum indicator. All piping shall be insulated for design compliance and prevention of surface
condensations. Insulation shall be by use of preformed closed cell half sections.

10.5 FANS AND MOTORS

All fans shall be marine type as made by Hartzell Inc., Woods or equal. Motors shall be directly connected
with enclosures to suit location on the vessel. Fan HP, quantity and static pressure developed shall be
suitable for the duct systems, as installed, to provide the design quantities in each compartment. Fans shall
be selected to insure minimum noise levels are attained throughout the system(s). Main deck and other
areas not otherwise subject to high ambient noise are to be maintained at 85 dBA or less by use of silencers
and similar means.

(Zones 1 and 2) shall be ATEX certified EEx motors and anti-static, non-sparking fans, certified for use in
the area of application.

10.6 TRUNKS, DUCTS, ACCESS AND HOODS

Vent hoods shall be designed to minimize the amount of rain water from entering the ducting.
10.6.1 Air-Conditioning System

Medium or high pressure air distribution is to be utilized so as to reduce ducting sizes or the ducts
shall be sized for conventional flow velocities (15m/s) to meet SMACNA/ASHRAE requirements.

Air-conditioning ducts shall have 25 mm insulation on supply and 12.5 mm insulation on return
air. Rectangular ducts shall be installed with a minimum 48 kg/m
3
density fiberglass insulation
board, 25 mm thick with a factory applied aluminum foil vapor barrier, minimum thickness 0.05
mm.

All joints and seams of vapor barrier shall be lapped 75 mm whenever possible, and sealed with an
aluminum foil tape 75 mm wide. To further ensure vapor barrier integrity, all seams and joints

shall be sealed with an approved sealer. Round ducts shall be installed in the same manner using
foil faced blanket insulation 25 mm thick with a minimum density 24 kg/m
3
.

10.6.2 Mechanical Ventilation Systems (Supply and Exhaust)

Where space conditions limit duct cross-sectional area (circular or rectangular), velocities may be as
high as 15 m/sec, provided ventilation noise does not exceed recommended levels for the space
being ventilated, or in the vicinity of the fan.
All materials used shall be suitable for a marine environment.

10.6.3 Mechanical Supply System

Where space conditions limit duct cross-sectional area, velocities may be as high as 15 m/sec,
provided ventilation noise does not exceed recommended levels for the space being ventilated, or in
the vicinity of the fan.

10.6.4 Machinery Ventilation Systems (Supply and Exhaust)

Where space conditions limit duct cross-sectional area, velocities may be as high as 15 m/sec,
provided ventilation noise does not exceed recommended levels for the space being ventilated, or in
the vicinity of the fan.

10.6.5 Natural Vent Ducts - Serving Mechanically Ventilated Spaces (Supply or Exhaust -
Direct or Indirect)

5 m/sec for less than 6,800 m/h
12.5 m/sec for between 6,800-10,200 m/h
15 m/sec for more than 10,200 m/h

10.6.6 Natural Vent Ducts - Serving Naturally Ventilated Spaces

1,360 m/h (assumed for sizing of ducts)

10.6.7 Construction

Trunks, ducts, covers, louvers, etc., exposed to the weather shall not be less than 6.5 mm steel plate
and shall be watertight.

All other duct construction shall be in accordance with the Classification Society or specifications
requirements (i.e. wall thickness, materials, etc.). Composite ducting materials shall be used
wherever allowed by the Regulatory Bodies and Classification Society.

10.6.8 Shaker Hood

Close fitting exhaust vent hoods shall be provided over each shale shaker, fabricated from stiffened
5 mm 316L stainless steel plate or suitable composite material.


Exhaust ducting, fabricated from3.5 mm 316L stainless steel, shall be run fromeach shaker to a
discharge location as approved by the Regulatory Bodies. Exhaust ducts shall be fitted with a vapor
collector for handling oil based mud vapors.

10.7 INSULATION AND LAGGING

Air-conditioning ducts shall have 25 mm insulation on supply and 12.5 mm insulation on return air.

Rectangular ducts shall be installed with a minimum 48 kg/m3 density fiberglass insulation board, 25
mm thick with a factory applied aluminumfoil vapor barrier, minimumthickness 0.05 mm. Round
ducts shall be installed in the same manner using foil faced blanket insulation 25 mm thick with a
minimumdensity 24 kg/m3. All joints in insulation are to be taped with foil adhesive tape.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 11.0 - SHIP SERVICE REFRIGERATION .................................................................. 1
11.1 SHIP SERVICE REFRIGERATION MACHINERY ............................................................ 1
11.2 REFRIGERATED WALK-IN COMPARTMENTS .............................................................. 1
11.3 PIPING .......................................................................................................................................... 2
SECTION 11.0 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM

11.1 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM

11.1.1 General

A ship's service refrigerating system consisting of cooler and freezer and designed for the
direct expansion of an environmentally friendly refrigerant like 407C or an Owner
approved equivalent.

All equipment shall be designed for completely automatic operation and shall be supplied
by the manufacturer as packaged units, complete with refrigerant piping and a holding
charge of refrigerant.
Each refrigerated walk-in Compartment shall have two condensing unit and two evaporator
unit, each one redundant.
Condensing unit shall have ventilator-motor, compressor, condenser coil.
Condenser and evaporator coils shall be copper tube and copper fin, and epoxy coated, and
shall be built in accordance with Regulatory bodies requirements.

11.1.2 Equipment - Condensing Units

Two air-cooled condensing units shall be provided and installed.
Each unit shall have ample capacity to Pull down the refrigerated compartments
temperature to the design temperature within 72 hours after loading. The refrigeration
capacity of each unit shall be sized based on -29 C suction temperature and 49
0
C
condensing temperature. Units shall be complete with pre-wired control panels, containing
incoming power lugs, circuit breakers, control transformers, defrost timer, terminal strip,
starters, high and low pressure switches and evaporator motor manual starters. Units to be
complete with gauge isolation valves and refrigerant sight gauges. The alarms of the
refrigerating units shall be routed to the DCS.

11.2 REFRIGERATED WALK-IN COMPARTMENTS

11.2.1 General

The refrigerated walk-in shall be provided with location and size as per the specifications.
The temperature and methods of cooling shall be as indicated in Table 11.1 below.

Table 11.1 - Refrigeration Requirements
Compartment Temperature, F (C) Loading Temp., F (C) Method of Cooling
Chiller 35 (1.7) 55 (12.8) Air Cooler
Freezer -9 (-23) 15 (-9.4) Air Cooler

The relative humidity shall be designed of 85%.

Condensers shall have a purge valve and a relief valve.

Walk-in shall be prefabricated with smooth finish 1 mm thick stainless steel 316 interior.
Sections shall have tongue and groove edges with non-asbestos gaskets and fitted with
locking devices for connecting adjoining sections. Doors shall be stainless steel clad both
sides. Hardware shall be cadmium plated. Doors shall be equipped with safety release
latches. Door heaters shall be provided in freezer box door. Remote indicating
thermometers shall be provided on outside of the freezer and chill boxes and high
temperature alarm and lighting inside. All hardware is to be triple chrome plated steel or
stainless steel.

11.2.2 Refrigerated Compartment Equipment

Air Coolers
The air coolers shall be self-contained type. Fans shall be direct drive and to be
protected by guard.
The fan capacity shall be sufficient to change the air once a minute with the
compartment empty.

Defrosting of compartments below 2 C shall be automatically accomplished by electric
heating elements built into the cooler coils and drip pans.

Shelving and Miscellaneous Equipment

The freezer and cooler rooms shall be provided with adjustable stainless steel shelves
with battens, arranged four tiers high.

Each compartment shall be equipped with overhead light with exterior switch and pilot
light and a 75 mm deck drain with removable wooden plug.

11.3 PIPING

The piping systems shall be carefully installed and every precaution taken to keep the
system absolutely clean internally during erection. Before operating the compressors, the
system shall be cleaned by means of a special surge drum containing a filter, screen, and
large quantity of desiccant, connected into the suction side of the system. Prior to cleaning
and pressure tightness tests, the system shall be dehydrated by means of special vacuum
pumps capable of developing a vacuum of at least 750 mm Hg. at -1 C on a wet bulb
vacuum indicator. All piping shall be insulated for design compliance and prevention of
surface condensations. Insulation shall be by use of preformed, closed cell half sections.

Table of contents

SECTION 12.0 - MAIN AND AUXILIARY MACHINERY ....................................................................................... 2
12.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................. 2
12.2 MAIN ENGINES AND GENERATORS .................................................................................................. 2
12.3 EMERGENCY GENERATOR .................................................................................................................. 3
12.4 PUMPS ...................................................................................................................................................... 3
12.5 WATERMAKERS ..................................................................................................................................... 3
12.6 WATER HEATERS .................................................................................................................................. 3
12.7 AIR COMPRESSORS AND TANKS ....................................................................................................... 3
12.8 WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT ..................................................................................................................... 4
12.9 SEWAGE COLLECTION & TREATMENT EQUIPMENT .................................................................... 5
12.10 AIR HOISTS .............................................................................................................................................. 5
12.11 MACHINERY HANDLING EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................. 5
12.12 DIESEL OIL PURIFIER, OILY WATER SEPARATOR ......................................................................... 6
12.13 SPARE PARTS .......................................................................................................................................... 6
12.14 CANTILEVER AND DRILL FLOOR SKIDDING UNITS ..................................................................... 6
12.15 SEA WATER SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS .................................................................................................. 7
12.16 PRELOAD AND ENGINE COOLING SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS .......................................................... 8
12.17 SEA WATER PUMP TOWERS & ELEVATING SYSTEMS ................................................................. 8
12.18 MISCELLANEOUS TANKS .................................................................................................................... 9
12.19 HELICOPTER REFUELING EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................ 9
12.20 BOP WORK PLATFORM ...................................................................................................................... 10
12.21 FORK LIFT TRUCK ............................................................................................................................... 10

SECTION 12.0 MAIN AND AUXILIARY MACHINERY

12.1 GENERAL

This Section describes the proposed main, auxiliary and deck machinery, including all necessary auxiliaries
for the Vessel described in Section 1 of these Specifications and covers substantial machinery of first class
design, material and good marine practice. All ratings in the specification and on the one line drawings are
considered as a minimum requirement. It will be the Builders responsibility to size the equipment for the
required services and to demonstrate the rating by calculations, load analysis, load flow calculations and
selectivity study.

Machinery is to be installed and mounted on Builder furnished foundations with noise and vibration
absorbers so as to minimize vibration and structure-borne noise (ref. ISO 6954, Guidelines for the Overall
Evaluation of Merchant Ships). In general, noise levels shall be in accordance with Classification Society
requirements. Low noise equipment and machinery shall be selected if available, and all methods of noise
reduction shall be considered (acoustic baffles, sound-absorbing insulation, sound dampers on ventilation
trunks, isolated duct mounts, etc.). Special consideration shall be given to any equipment near the
accommodation block. In high noise areas (drill floor, mud pump room, engine room, shale shaker area,
compressor room, etc.) special noise reduction methods and precautions shall be evaluated.

Measurement of global and local vibrations in the accommodations, drill floor, and machinery spaces shall
be carried out by an independent third party analyst. The performance of the main engine vibration mounts
shall be evaluated.

The access for maintenance and installation of equipment shall be arranged keeping in mind the subsequent
need for removal of that equipment for repair or replacement. The placement of equipment shall, in
general, be in accordance with the arrangement shown on the Contract Plans with deviations made as
necessary to suit the development of detailed engineering.

12.2 MAIN ENGINES AND GENERATORS

The engine room shall be designed for the placement of six (6) diesel generator sets, each furnished and
installed by the Builder, water-cooled, 690 volt, 3 phase and 60 Hz alternators.

The main engines shall be mounted on vibration isolators recommended by the engine manufacturer and in
accordance with the specifications. The isolation mountings shall consist of all steel welded top and
bottom housings incorporating two or more steel springs and shall be provided with built-in leveling bolts
and built-in resilient stops to control oscillation and withstand lateral forces in all directions, with one
spring isolator at each mounting bolt.

The engines and alternators shall be unitized on a common skid complete with pumps, oil coolers, control
panels, compressed air starters, silencers with spark arrestors and all other required accessories.

All engines shall be capable of being started with 8.6 bar air pressure from the rig air system.

All engines (jacket and aftercoolers) shall be cooled by fresh water circulated through a fresh water/sea
water plate type heat exchanger(s). See section 14.5 for a description of the system.

Prior to delivery, all engines to be serviced and have the oil and filters changed and maintain less than 100
running hours on new oil as per OEM.


12.3 EMERGENCY GENERATOR

The Builder shall furnish and install one 480 volt, 3 phase and 60 Hz diesel electric generator set.
Unattached accessories include: exciter field rheostat and resistors, voltage regulator, starting battery, battery
charger, control panel, and silencer with spark arrestor and expansion joint. The radiator shall be equipped with
a normally-closed, automatically operating damper. The fuel tank for the unit is to be sufficiently sized by the
Builder for the intended service. The unit shall be capable of 24 volt DC electric (battery) and air motor
starting, radiator cooled with after-cooler, turbo-charger, and all standard accessories as listed in Section
18, and in compliance with the Regulatory Body requirements. The emergency unit shall be able to be
started from 2 (two) different sources (air and electric).

12.4 PUMPS

The pumps shall be generally as specified on the Contract Plans. In all cases for the final design, the
pumping equipment selected shall be suitable and adequate for the service intended. Power and head
values are for guidance only and shall be confirmed by Builder during final detail design calculations.

12.5 WATERMAKERS

Builder shall furnish and shall install two fresh water makers 60 m
3
per day capacity equipped with heaters
and an automatic chlorination system (0.5 to 1.5 ppm throughout the distribution network), inlet filtration
system, ion sterilizer and full redundancy continuous service auxiliaries. Water makers can either be
reverse osmosis or regenerative heat recovery types.

12.6 WATER HEATERS

The Builder shall install three (3) electric heaters for supplying hot water to showers, lavatories and all
other equipment requiring hot water. The system shall be the recirculating type, sized to accommodate the
demand by the rigs complement. The size and capacity for the electric water heaters shall be determined
during detailed engineering.

Each hot water heating tank shall be fitted with a combination pressure/temperature relief valve, inspection
hand hole, drain, electric heater control thermostat and low water level and low flow heater cutout switch.

12.7 AIR COMPRESSORS AND TANKS

Consisting of three unitized skid mounted compressor units including: rotary screw type air compressors, rated
at 15.3 m/min at 8.6 bar, including flexible coupling, dry type inlet air filter, pneumatic inlet control valve, oil
pump, oil level gauge, oil filter, ASME coded oil separator and sump, water cooled oil cooler, TEFC motor
driven fan and air cooled after-cooler with separator and trap c/w starter, sequential panel and acoustic
enclosure.

The Builder shall furnish and install two (2) refrigeration type air dryer, rated at 51 m/min for pressure dew
point of -40 C with inlet air temperature of 37.8 C, air cooled. The air dryer shall have a separate skid base.

The Builder shall furnish and install one (1) cold start, air compressor with V-belt drive, driven by a manually
started air cooled diesel engine complete with fuel tank and exhaust muffler. The unit shall be complete with
all standard equipment and shall be unitized on individual skid bases. The compressor shall have a
minimum rating of 0.9m/min at 8.6 bar and shall be equipped with suction unloading valve, pilot valve,
filters, etc.


The Builder shall furnish and install one pressure reducing valve bulk air systemc/w water trap system
capable of 22.6 m/min flow regulation and reducing 8.6 bar rig air service to 2.5~4.5 bar.
Both pressure reducing valves need to have isolation valves.

Six (6) ASME coded approved air receiver tanks shall be installed. The Builder shall provide receivers as
indicated below. The capacity of the air receivers is a minimum and is to be confirmed by the Builder after
the selection of all consumers. Location and size of the air receiver tanks is as follows:

a) Two 3.4 cu. m. capacity service air tanks with a relief valve setting of 9.5 Bar shall be
installed in the compressor room, or convenient adjacent compartment.

b) One 3.2 cu. m. capacity service air tank with a relief valve setting of 9.5 Bar shall be
installed on the drill floor. An isolation check valve shall be fitted to this receiver supply
line.

c) One 1.0 cu. m. capacity service air tank with a relief valve setting of 9.5 Bar shall be
installed on the cantilever. An isolation check valve shall be fitted to this receiver supply
line.

d) One 2.0 cu. m. capacity air tank with a relief valve setting of 9.5 Bar shall be installed in
the emergency generator room.

e) One engine starting air receiver sized as required.

Starting air tank capacities are for guidance and shall be sized in conformance with requirements of the
engines supplied and the requirements of the Regulatory Bodies.

Air receiver tanks shall be rated for 8.6 bar working pressure, fitted with relief valves, automatic water
traps and necessary gauges.

Prior to rig delivery, all compressors to be serviced and have the oil and filters changed and maintain less
than 100 running hours on new oil as per OEM.

12.8 WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT

Builder shall furnish and install two, 480 volt AC, 400 AMP DC rectifier-type welding machines. The two
machines shall be arranged one over the other in the mechanical workshop.

A minimum of eight two wire welding outlets shall be provided by the Builder, distributed in working areas
as directed by Designer. Outlets shall be arranged so that any of these locations may be reached by a
welding cable 100' in length. Builder shall provide four sets of 30 m. (100') welding cables, 30 m. (100')
ground cables, electrode holders, helmets, etc., which shall be stowed in the mechanical workshop by the
Builder. Hull return system shall not be used.

In addition, the following workshop machines shall be furnished and installed by the Builder.

Drill press
Power hacksaw
Grinder
Hydraulic press
Pipe threader
Lathe

Universal Milling M/C
Hydraulic hose crimping machine

12.9 SEWAGE COLLECTION & TREATMENT EQUIPMENT

One sewage treatment plant(s), of the electrolytic type, having a total capacity suitable for a complement of
total amount of persons on board shall be provided and installed by the Builder with a vacuum collection
system. Each unit shall be unitized with automatic briner unit, pumps, cell, and all standard accessories. A
collection tank high level alarm shall be integrated into the engine room alarm system.

12.10 AIR HOISTS

Air hoists in a compliment of both single and double drum design shall be installed as indicated on the
Contract Plans and in the specifications. All air hoists shall be fitted with an air regulator, water trap,
lubricators, silencer and a spooling device consistent with design specifications of each air hoist, as well as
a quick acting air supply valve (ball valve type). A sufficient number of air or hydraulic hoists shall be
installed to enable safe and efficient work on the drilling unit, the total amount and location of the hoists
may be determined during detailed engineering.

12.11 MACHINERY HANDLING EQUIPMENT

Adequate load rated pad eye plates shall be provided above all pieces of major equipment such as motors,
compressors, engines, pumps, generators, and miscellaneous machinery. Load rated lifting pads shall be
provided at the head of all ladders, and above hatch openings of space containing equipment.

Two lengths of trolley rail with a 10 mt. trolley shall be installed above the fluid end and motors of each
mud pump to facilitate maintenance and overhaul. Other trolleys shall be installed over the drawworks
motors and drum and elsewhere as shown on the Contract Plans and in the specifications, and sized in
accordance with the component or assembly weight of the equipment, engines, etc., to be serviced.

A system of transverse and longitudinal trolley beams and geared hoists is to be installed in the engine
room generally as shown on the Contract Plans and in the specifications. Trolley beams for removing
pistons and liners shall be installed over each cylinder bank. When used in tandem the trolley beams with
their hoists shall have the capacity to service any part on the engine or remove the generator. The
longitudinal trolley beams and hoists shall have the capacity and shall be arranged to move any generator to
the removal hatch area.
Trolley beam in mechanical workshop
Trolley beam above cementing unit
Bridge crane in Heavy tool equipment room
All lifting gear shall be trial fitted and functionally tested in place prior to delivery and demonstrated to be
satisfactory for the purpose intended and in compliance with all Specifications.

All weight handling equipment and permanent fittings, including all pad eyes, are to be proof load tested at
150 % of the intended safe working load capacity and to be permanently marked on and in the vicinity of
each item, with unique I.D. number and load rating. Regulatory Body certification shall be provided by
Builder for each tested item.

All Builder furnished lifting equipment is to be stowed on bulkheads near machinery served unless stowage
is provided at lifting point.


12.12 DIESEL OIL PURIFIER, OILY WATER SEPARATOR

12.12.1 Diesel Oil Purifier

The diesel oil purifying equipment should consist of two 4 m/h purifiers. Each unit shall be
complete with stainless steel bowl assembly, inlet and outlet pumps, electric motor and all
standard equipment.

Each unit shall be equipped with an excessive water detector to shut down the purifier upon
excessive water discharge.

12.12.2 Oily Water Separator

A system consisting of one oily water separator with a process capacity of 10 m/h, one oil-in-
water monitor and one strip chart recorder to be installed by the Builder. The single stage
separator shall be fitted with an automatic oil drain control, oil drain sight glass, relief valve and
other required connections. The separator shall have a treated liquid discharge process capacity to
reduce oil contamination down to at least 15 ppm.

Oily water supply to the separator shall be provided using an electric pump with a maximum
capacity of 45 m/h at 5 m head.

12.13 SPARE PARTS

All spare parts shall be Builder-furnished and shall meet the Vendor's recommendation for one year's
service. The Vendor's recommendation shall be final. Spare parts shall be inventoried and delivered on
board the Vessel at time of Vessel delivery. Spares over and above those recommended by Vendor but
required by the Regulatory Bodies shall be additionally supplied by Builder.

12.14 CANTILEVER AND DRILL FLOOR SKIDDING UNITS

The system will consist of one complete set of hydraulically powered cantilever and drill floor skidding
systems, cantilever Hydraulic Power Unit (HPU), cantilever rollers, shims, pads and service jack system,
etc. and associated equipment complete with control consoles and shall be furnished and installed by the
Builder.

Cantilever skidding system

The cantilever skidding system shall consist of a control stand and four jacks with capacity sufficient to
skid the cantilever with the most onerous combination of drill floor position, pipe rack load, and setback
load through the full longitudinal range of skidding, subject to verification of Builder calculations for the
cantilever weight and static friction and approval of same by Designer. The Builder is to provide and install
all interconnecting piping, fittings, valves, hoses, etc. to complete the system.

Each skidding cylinder is to be connected to the cantilever skidding beam by means of a sliding locking pin
housing. The locking pin housing contains the locking pin and transfers all loads between the cylinders and
skidding beam. The locking pins are hydraulically actuated and are to be sequenced so that one pin is
always engaged in the skidding beam when the cylinders are cycling. This positive engagement is
necessary to prevent a run-away situation of the cantilever beam.

Cantilever Hydraulic Power Unit


The Builder shall install a Cantilever Hydraulic Power Unit, connect, test and prove operational. The
Cantilever Hydraulic Power Unit is designed to power the Cantilever Skidding System.

The Cantilever Hydraulic Power Unit is composed of two vertically mounted main electric motors with
variable hydraulic piston pumps, a stainless steel oil reservoir tank, an air cooling system, a return line
filter, frame and electrical control panel.

The control panel provides manual control of the two main pumps and automatic control of the cooler
pump. Either pump 1 or pump 2 or both pumps together may be run by pressing the appropriate PUMP
START buttons. All wires and operators to be wire tagged and labeled.

Other features:
Low Oil Level Switch
Low Low Oil Level Switch
Cooler On/Off Temperature Switches
High Oil Temperature Switch
Immersion heater with integral thermostatic and high/over temperature control
Stainless Steel Suction Lines
Return Line Filter with Visual and Electrical By-Pass Indication
All Hose Ends and Piping to be Stainless Steel
Stainless Steel Control Panel
Motor to Pump Adaptors

Drill floor skidding system

For the drill floor transverse skidding system, the Builder shall provide for and install the control console (1
unit) and lift and roll skidding system (4 assemblies).

Each lift and roll skidding assembly consists of a base plate, Hilman Roller, lift cylinders and skidding
cylinders. The base or skidding plate is supported by the substructure upper flange. A Hilman Roller rests
on the upper surface of the base plate. Short stroke lift cylinders, attached to the top of the Hilman Roller,
lift the drill floor off of the substructure upper flange. While elevated, the skid cylinders which are attached
to both the base plate and drill floor leg are extended, thus moving the drill floor. When the skid cylinder
reaches the end of its stroke, the lift cylinders are retracted, lowering the drill floor to the substructure. The
skid cylinders are retracted and the process is repeated.

The four (4) assemblies operate in unison to move the drill floor port or starboard.

The control console shall control and synchronize the operation of the four (4) lift and roll skidding
assemblies. Hydraulic power shall be supplied from the drill floor HPU. The Builder is to provide and
install all interconnecting piping, fittings, valves, hoses, etc. to complete the system.

Operating pressure for the lift and roll skidding system is 207 bar.

12.15 SEA WATER SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS

Submersible pumps, suitable for continuous operation while submerged in salt water, with a capacity of
400 m/h at a head of 60 meters. The pump and motor shall be one assembly consisting of a 60 HZ, three
phase electric motor, multiple stage impellers and discharge pipe. Motor details and horsepower is to be
determined by the vendor to suit the preceding requirements. The unit is to comply with the applicable
attached classification society.


Total maximum rig demand shall be met by 2 pumps. The third pump should be provided for redundancy
as required by Class.

Submersible motors are to be designed for continuous operation under any thrust that may develop. Thrust
bearings are to be the high load tilting shoe type. Motor starter will be the reduced voltage type. Motor
housing is to be made of bronze. The motor is to be removable from the pump column without the need to
disassemble the pump bowls. The motor is to be supplied with a continuous length of electrical cable. The
exact length will be determined at a later date.

All pump impellers and internal components are to be protected by stainless steel suction strainers.

The pump shaft is to be AISI 316 stainless steel.

Heavy duty self-lubricating bronze bearings are to be used throughout the assembly.

Bowls are to be individually flanged and bolted for positive alignment and assembly and disassembly. The
discharge bowl is to have a standard flange connection for attachment to the pump tower.

All bowls and impellers are to be fitted with wear rings.

Impellers are to be attached to the pump shaft with taper locks.

The discharge bowl bearing is to be protected with a sand collar.

12.16 PRELOAD AND ENGINE COOLING SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS

One (1) preload submersible pump, suitable for continuous operation while submerged in salt water, with a
capacity of 500 m/h at a head of 50 meters. The pump and motor shall be one assembly consisting of a 60
HZ, three phase electric motor, multiple stage impellers and discharge hose(s). Pump motor details and
horsepower are to be determined by the vendor to suit the preceding requirements. The hose(s) are attached
to an electrically powered reel mounted on a platform above the main deck on the starboard aft side of the
hull. The reel is to be fitted with a slip ring to permit pumping while the reel is rotating. Reel is to be
complete with all necessary controls. The platform is to be fitted with a hang-off structure to secure the
pump when not in use.

One (1) engine cooling submersible pump, suitable for continuous operation while submerged in salt water,
with a capacity of 300 m/h (to be confirmed after engine selection) at a head of 50 meters. The pump and
motor shall be one assembly consisting of a 60 HZ, three phase electric motor, multiple stage impellers and
discharge hose(s). Pump motor details and horsepower are to be determined by the vendor to suit the
preceding requirements. The hose(s) are attached to an electrically powered reel mounted on a platform
above the main deck on the starboard aft side of the hull. The reel is to be fitted with a slip ring to permit
pumping while the reel is rotating. Reel is to be complete with all necessary controls. The platform is to be
fitted with a hang-off structure to secure the pump when not in use.

Both units are to comply with the applicable attached classification society and regulatory body regulations.

Pump construction and material specifications are the same as the Sea Water Submersible Pumps.

12.17 SEA WATER PUMP TOWERS & ELEVATING SYSTEMS

The Builder shall provide and install three (3) movable submersible raw water pumps (as mentioned in
section 12.15) and tubular pump towers complete with leg mounted guides and elevating systems.


One (1) Sea water pump and tower shall be installed on the inboard face of each leg and consists of a series
of guides mounted on the pump tower, a pump tower support structure, installed on top of the spud can and
two (2) guide rails mounted on the leg bracing tubulars. In the transit mode, the pump tower is supported by
the spud can support structure and the guide rails.

The rails, guides and fork are shown on the Contract Plans.

The Builder shall supply adequate pad eyes on the Sea water pump towers for lifting using the rig cranes,
or other suitable means for removal for maintenance.

A fixed cable storage / deployment reel with locking dogs and overhead turning sheave support system
shall be provided for the Sea water pump power supply cables. The power supply cable shall be of
sufficient strength to support the cable weight at working depth.

12.18 MISCELLANEOUS TANKS

The tanks listed in table 12.2 are to be located and connected as outlined on the Contract Plans and/or
Specifications. Tanks shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements and/or manufacturer's
recommendations for proper operation in the system they serve. The tanks shall be supported on suitable
foundations and provided with the required connections for fill, discharge, gauge drains, relief, sounding,
access manholes, inspection openings and alarms where required. Tank capacities shall be suitable for the
service requirements.

12.19 HELICOPTER REFUELING EQUIPMENT

Consisting of a pumping unit, filtration, metering and delivery hose system and two offshore type fuel
tanks with quick release platform for jettisoning of tanks overboard shall be installed. All necessary piping,
wiring, drains and coamings shall meet the Classification Society and Regulatory Bodies requirements.
Storage tanks shall be located so as to be fully serviceable by the rig cranes in their loaded condition.

12.18.1 Helicopter Refueling Equipment

1 lot Two Portable offshore fuel tank(s), fuel pump, metering and filtration system(s),
control(s), discharge hose and ground strap reels.

Table 12.2 Independent Tanks
QTY SERVICE CAPACITY Remarks
2 RIG AIR 3.4 m EACH SEE POINT 12.7
1 DRILL FLOOR AIR 3.2 m SEE POINT 12.7
1 STARTING AIR, MAIN ENGINE 1.0 m.* SEE POINT 12.7
1 STARTING AIR, EMERGENCY
GENERATOR
2.0 m SEE POINT 12.7
1 CANTILEVER AIR 1.0 m SEE POINT 12.7
1 LUBRICATING OIL STORAGE (ENGINE
ROOM)
TWO COMPARTMENT
4550 LITERS TOTAL

Table 12.2 Independent Tanks
QTY SERVICE CAPACITY Remarks
1 LUBRICATING OIL STORAGE (MUD
PUMP ROOM) TWO COMPARTMENT
1500 LITERS TOTAL
3 SURGE 2 MUD 1 CEMENT 1.98 CU. M. EACH
1 HYDRAULIC OIL TANK 1000 LITERS
1 DIESEL OIL DAY TANK 25,300 LITERS *
1 DIESEL OIL SETTLING 25,300 LITERS *
1 EMERGENCY GEN. DIESEL OIL DAY
TANK
2270 LITERS *
1 COMPRESSOR LUBE OIL TANK 230 LITERS.
1 POTABLE WATER PRESSURE TANK 760 LITERS

* Final sizes to suit engines furnished and the requirements to be shown on PIDs.

12.20 BOP WORK PLATFORM

The BOP work platform(s) shall be installed on the BOP(s) to provide access to the various levels of the
BOP stack. The platforms are of a construction of steel frame with fiberglass grating and handrails with
sufficient space to allow work to be carried out on the BOP rams. Each frame attaches to the BOP body
lower flange. Where multiple levels are used, a ladder way between each platform level will be included.
The platforms also serve to support the BOP control hose umbilical to the BOP stack.

In lieu of the working platform, an access basket can be provided.

12.21 FORK LIFT TRUCK

A 2.5 mt. electric fork truck shall be furnished by the builder and installed on the lower level of the sack
storage room. The forklift shall be of the narrow aisle, free lift uprights type.

The Builder shall furnish charging points in the sack storage area, tie-down rings, etc. for securing in the
transit condition.

12.22 ELEVATOR (PERSONNEL)
The Builder shall furnish and install one (1) electrically driven rack and pinion elevator at the STBD
side of the accommodations as shown on the Contract Drawings. The elevator shall have a capacity of
1000 Kg (2200 lbs.) and shall accommodate one hospital type gurney and two (2) attendents.
The elevator, equipment and controls shall conform to ANSI A17 and other applicable regulatory
requirements for ship board elevator installations and shall include all alarms, telephones, etc. required
by the ABS MODU rules.


TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 13.0 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS ............................................................... 1
13.1 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
13.2 MATERIALS .................................................................................................................... 1
13.3 DESIGN ............................................................................................................................ 2
13.4 IDENTIFICATION ........................................................................................................... 3
13.5 INSULATION AND LAGGING ...................................................................................... 3
13.6 OPERATING GEAR ........................................................................................................ 4
13.7 SEA CHEST ...................................................................................................................... 4
13.8 DECK CONNECTIONS ................................................................................................... 4
13.9 MATERIAL SCHEDULE ................................................................................................ 6
13.10 HEAT TRACING SYSTEM ............................................................................................ 6
SECTION 13.0 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS

13.1 GENERAL

The Builder shall verify the information shown on the Contract Drawings to be in accordance with these
Drawings and with the information provided by the selected manufacturer of the equipment concerned and
the Classification Society and Regulatory Body Requirements. Piping systems, where Contract Drawings
are not clear or not available, shall be in accordance with the Specifications, including the general piping
requirements in this Section, the Classification Society and Regulatory Body requirements, Industrial
Standards and equipment manufacturer's recommendations.

All pumps in all piping systems will have to be able to be locally as well as remotely controlled. Where
automated systems are installed, there should be a possibility to control the pump from at least one remote
location. The pressures in various vital systems may be monitored through the engine room alarm and
control panel, systems and locations to be chosen during detailed engineering. The builder shall make a
matrix, showing all piping systems, control and monitoring devices for the Owner to approve.

The piping systems shall be designed, installed and tested in accordance with the requirements of these
Specifications, the Contract Plans, Regulatory Body Requirements, the Requirements of API, ANSI and
ASME.

All bolts and nuts are to be hot dip or electro-galvanized as a minimum. Some applications may warrant the
use of stainless steel bolting. All bolted connections in tanks shall be fitted with lock washers.

All gate type valves 50 mm(2 inch) and under shall be bronze or stainless steel, rising stem and union bonnet.
Stainless ball valves may also be used for special applications.

Pumps to generally have flexible connections at suction and discharge (except fire pumps and diesel oil
pumps).

Branch circuits and bends are not to be mitered. All fittings (elbows, tees, reducers, etc.) shall be of material
grade compatible with the pipe.

All elbows are to be standard long radius minimum, unless space dictates the use of short radius elbows.

All Pressure Reducing valves (PRV) and Pressure Safety Valves (PSV) shall have certificates and shall be
recalibrated as necessary such that the validity of the certificates is 6 months fromdelivery.

13.2 MATERIALS

Piping materials shall be as called for on the Contract Plans and the following:

1. Slip-on flanges shall be limited to 10 bar (Class ANSI #150) rating.

2. Butterfly valves size 500 mm(20 inches) and smaller are to be lug type, unless otherwise specified by
the owner. Valves 600 mm(24 inches) and larger shall be flanged, unless otherwise required by the
Classification Society or Regulatory agency.

3. Gaskets shall be in accordance the pipe specification for the service intended. Asbestos free gaskets
shall be used.

4. To the maximum extent possible/practical, all valves in a system, or like systems, shall be from the
same manufacturer.

5. To the extent permitted by the Classification Society and Regulatory Bodies, plastic or composite
material pipe shall be used.

6. Plastic or composite material, Fiber-Reinforced Plastic (e.g., Bondstrand) shall be used to the extent
permitted by Regulatory Bodies and as noted in these Specifications.

7. All fittings (elbows, tees, etc.) shall conformto ANSI standards (B16.9, etc.). The use of fabricated
fittings, including lateral connections in drains, shall be subject to prior approval by the Owner.

13.3 DESIGN

All piping systems shall be designed to provide sufficient rigidity to the systemto control deflection due to fluid
shock or pulsation and to ensure piping systemharmonics are outside of the operational harmonics of the fluid
systems. This would generally be applied to high-pressure hydraulics, mud, cementation and choke & kill
piping systems. Likewise sufficient compliance shall be provided at joints, support points, and equipment
connections through the incorporation of bends, loops, and offset in arrangements, to allow for all stresses
resulting fromexpansion, contraction, bending, vibration, shock and deflection of the machinery and vessels
structure. Gauges with isolation valves shall be fitted on pump suction and discharge lines. Where subject to
high vibrations, gauges shall be remotely mounted free of induced vibrations. In all cases, valves should be
positioned in pipe runs so as to make access for their operation and maintenance as simple as practicable.

Fresh water velocity in constantly running systems shall not exceed 5 m/s free-streamvelocity.

Sea water and/or brine velocity, m/s, in all applications other than heat exchangers shall not exceed K times the
square root of D where K is 0.30 and D is the actual inside diameter of the pipe in mm. However, in no case
shall this velocity exceed 3.7 m/s.

Sea water and/or brine velocity at inlet nozzles of and within tubular heat exchangers shall not exceed 1.83 m/s.
Maximum inlet velocities to plate type heat exchangers shall be in accordance with Manufacturers
recommendations.

Diesel oil systemvelocity shall be limited generally to a maximumof 4.57 m/s for onboard operations (suction,
discharge and transfer). However, for On-loading and Off-loading operations the maximumvelocity shall
not exceed 7.6 m/s.

Lube oil suction velocity shall be limited to a maximumof 1.2 m/s and discharge and transfer piping shall be
designed for a maximumvelocity of 7.25 m/s.

Compressed air pipe velocities shall be limited to 35 m/s.

The size and arrangement of suction-side piping shall be designed with consideration to avoiding potential for
pump cavitations.

In general, all continuous duty pumps shall be sized for lowest speeds possible that result in the proper
discharge head for the system.

No bilge and drain piping shall pass through fresh water tanks.

No piping shall pass through diesel oil tanks, refrigerated, medical, commissary and/or predominantly
electrically equipped spaces, unless directly associated with and/or servicing such spaces. Such piping shall be
one length throughout unless installation dictates otherwise; necessary joints shall either be welded or brazed
sleeve joints or otherwise shielded as approved. Suitable anti-sweat type insulation shall be applied to all
exposed or concealed pipes to prevent drips, which will cause damage to equipment and/or discomfort to
personnel.

Piping conveying flammable media shall be routed to avoid being located near hot surfaces or electrical
equipment, unless adequately shielded.

Gate type valves shall not be used for throttling services, nor shall resilient-seated butterfly type valves be used
where close controllable throttling is mandatory.

Valve seat and disc material for non-lubricating services shall be of different hardness of material as approved.

13.4 IDENTIFICATION

Systems, associated components and/or equipment, piping and appurtenances, shall be readily identifiable to
indicate its service and direction of flow.
On drawings the identification shall be: Project name - nominal line size - system code - material class - line
number - insulation type & thickness (if applicable). Example: GKXX-10-FW-41C1-001-H4.

Identification methods shall comply with the requirements of the Regulatory Bodies with color markings in
accordance with the Builders piping standards. Color-coding shall be banding or solid with direction of flow
marked.

Label plates shall be brass or stainless steel (stainless steel on and above main deck). Label plates must be
securely attached and located adjacent to all valves and components requiring identification. Also, they shall be
located so that they will not be easily damaged or be a hazard to an operator's hands. No label plate shall be
attached to handrails or in a location where they may be hazardous to any personnel using said handrail.

Sounding pipes shall have brass or stainless steel label plates welded or screwed to a base plate, welded
adjacent to the pipes. Vent terminals shall have brass or stainless steel label plates screwed to a base plate,
welded on the terminal or on an adjacent piece of structure.

13.5 INSULATION AND LAGGING

Insulation materials are to be of an approved type having proven service experience in the marine industry.

All insulation materials shall be properly secured and permit ready removal for maintenance, inspection and
repair. Selected materials shall not absorb water.

Material and thickness of insulation applied shall be selected in order to keep the surface temperature of all
insulated and lagged piping and machinery below 66 C. Insulation systems should be designed such that
surface temperatures do not exceed 52 C when used in areas susceptible to personnel contract.

Calciumsilicate or Rockwool insulation in preformed blocks shall be applied to the exhaust piping fromall
diesel engines and secured with stainless steel wire and covered with aluminum sheeting in interior
compartments, and stainless steel sheeting on insulated exhaust in exterior areas. Gaps in insulation are to be
filled with suitable insulation material.

Hot water piping shall be insulated with mineral wool type material. Refrigerant piping shall be insulated using
a pre-formed closed cell foamor equivalent material.

Suitable anti-sweat type insulation shall be applied to all exposed or concealed pipes to prevent drips which will
cause damage to equipment and/or discomfort to personnel. Such areas would include the overhead of the
quarters, galley and other humid spaces. Special attention should be given to refrigeration piping.

All insulation surfaces on cold services shall be coated with a vapor sealer at the time of application.


13.6 OPERATING GEAR

Remote operation of valves shall be as shown on the Contract Plans, listed in Builder Furnished Equipment,
and as required by Regulatory Bodies.

Valve operators shall be open-close or throttling as dictated by the service requirements. Butterfly valve
operators shall be electro-pneumatic type. Remote operated pump discharge valves shall be of the throttling
type.

Valve operators for gate or globe valves shall be electric type, Limitorque or equal.

Valves in the bulk material systems will be electro-pneumatic operated butterfly valves fitted with proximity
sensors according to the Contract Plans. Owner will furnish the electro-pneumatic butterfly valves fitted with
proximity sensors at bulk tanks.

Reach rods in tanks shall be solid steel fitted with bronze bearings and bronze universal joints.

Reach rods outside of tanks may be solid or flexible, utilizing knuckle type joints and bronze bearings. All
bearings and universal joints shall have lubrication points.

Extension stems shall be provided on valves as required for ease of operation from gratings, decks and
walkways.

All power-operated valves shall be remotely and locally operated by power as well as by local manual means.
Local manual operations shall be with a hand wheel or lever attached or stored adjacent to the valve.

All remotely operated valves shall have local and remote valve position indicators.

13.7 SEA CHEST

See Section 2 for description of sea chest construction.

Air flushing of the sea chest is to be provided.

Sea chest vents are to be provided.

Valves shall be located as close as possible to the shell. All bolting shall be 316 stainless steel.

The bilge/preload pumps and the drill water/emergency fire/general service pump via the sea chest shall
provide the sea water service requirements, when afloat.

13.8 DECK CONNECTIONS

Deck connections for the transfer of liquid and bulk materials shall be provided by the Builder.

All piping systems shown below shall have port and starboard loading/discharge deck connections:

1. Diesel Oil with flow meter (to be fitted with sampling spool at fill station)
2. Drill Water (to be fitted with sampling spool at fill station)
3. Fresh Water

(to be fitted with sampling spool at fill station)
4. Bulk Mud (to be fitted with rock trap at fill stations)
5. Bulk Cement (to be fitted with rock trap at fill stations)
6. Liquid mud with flow meter
7. Sewage
8. Base Oil (to be fitted with sampling spool at fill station)
9. Brine (to be fitted with sampling spool at fill station)

The Builder shall provide all required valves, goosenecks, flanges and fittings. All loose fittings shall be
attached with a keeper chain. All connections shall be permanently and boldly marked. Means shall be
provided at the fill connections to contain oil spills in accordance with the Regulatory Body requirements.
STOP-START stations for the oil transfer pumps shall be provided at the deck connection in accordance with
Regulatory Body requirements.

At each Port and Starboard loading station there shall be an extended platformwith a facility to drape and
hangoff each of the loading hoses. A rub bar shall be installed at the bottomof the side shell in line with the
loading station to prevent chafing of the hoses.

All bulk loading and discharge hoses shall be provided by the Builder, with a suitable support and securing
arrangement, including:

2ea. Diesel Fuel. 100 mm(4) bore. Platformconnection Anson 4" fig 200. Boat
connection Todo 4" quick release self sealing hose unit with dust cap.

2ea. Base Oil. 100 mm(4) bore. Platformconnection Anson 4" fig 200. Boat

2ea. Fresh Water. 100 mm(4) bore. Platform connection Anson 4" fig 200. Boat
connection Anson Fig 200 male sub and nut hammer with dust cap.

2ea. Drill Water. 100 mm(4) bore. Platformconnection Anson 4" fig 200. Boat

2ea. Dry Barite. 125 mm(5) bore. Platformconnection Anson 5" FIG 200 female
sub with dust cap and 5" male x 4" female API reducing adaptor. Boat connection
Anson 5" FIG 200 male sub and nut with dust cap and 5" male API x 4" female
API reducing adaptor.

2ea. Dry Cement. 125 mm(5) bore. Platformconnection Anson 5" FIG 200 female
sub with dust cap and 5" male x 4" female API reducing adaptor. Boat connection

2ea. Liquid Mud. 100 mm(4) bore. Platformconnection Anson 4" FIG 200 with dust
cap. Boat connection Anson Fig 100 male sub and nut with dust cap and 3" ball
valve c/w 4" API to 3" API reducing adaptors either side.

2ea. Sewage. 100 mm(4) bore. Platformconnection Anson 5" FIG 200 female sub
with dust cap and 5" male x 4" female API reducing adaptor. Boat connection

2ea. Brine. 100 mm (4) bore. Platform connection Anson 4" fig 200. Boat
connection Anson Fig 200 male sub and nut with dust cap and 3" ball valve c/w 4"
API to 3" API reducing adaptors either side.

The supply boat end of all hoses to be fitted with Anson Hose Lifter. All hoses to be color-coded according to
Regulatory Body requirements.

A filling station on rooftop will be provided for the emergency generator lube oil.

13.9 MATERIAL SCHEDULE

The material schedules for piping systems shown on the Contract Plans are for guidance and subject to the
requirements developed during the detail design phase. If conflict arises with respect to Classification Society,
Regulatory Body, Industrial Standards, or Equipment Manufacture requirements with respect to the tables on
the Plans, the former shall prevail. Any other deviations are subject to Licensor approval.

All systems in addition to those on the Contract Plans that are required to complete the vessel for intended
service shall be in accordance with the piping specifications provided by the Licensor, fabricated and installed
by the Builder in accordance with Classification Society, Regulatory Body, Industrial Standards, or Equipment
Manufacture requirements.

13.10 HEAT TRACING SYSTEM (FUTURE)

The fire main and other essential piping systems (Fire water, Deluge, External Fresh or Potable Water and
Grey Water) shall have freeze protection installed. Generally freeze protection in these systems shall be
accomplished by using electric heat tracing tape and insulation. In areas where piping runs through
hazardous areas, the trace heating system shall be of a type which is suitable for use in hazardous areas.

Other piping systems subject to freezing or freeze damage shall be insulated and heat traced as may be
required by the Owner or the Regulatory Bodies.


TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 14.0 - PIPING SYSTEMS ............................................................................................................ 1
14.1 GENERAL ......................................................................................................... 1
14.2 PRELOAD SYSTEM ......................................................................................... 1
14.3 BILGE SYSTEM ............................................................................................... 1
14.4 SEA WATER SERVICE SYSTEM ................................................................... 2
14.5 FRESH WATER SYSTEMS ............................................................................. 2
14.6 GENERAL FIREFIGHTING SYSTEM ............................................................ 4
14.7 FRESH WATER GENERATING PLANT SYSTEM ....................................... 5
14.8 LOW PRESSURE MUD SYSTEM ................................................................... 5
14.9 HIGH PRESSURE MUD AND CEMENT SYSTEM ....................................... 5
14.10 DIESEL OIL PURIFYING, TRANSFER AND SERVICE SYSTEM .............. 5
14.11 LUBRICATING OIL SYSTEM ........................................................................ 6
14.12 DRAINS ............................................................................................................. 6
14.13 VENTS, SOUND AND OVERFLOWS ............................................................ 8
14.14 DIESEL EXHAUSTS ........................................................................................ 9
14.15 SERVICE AIR ................................................................................................... 9
14.16 FIXED

FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS ................................................. 10
14.17 BULK SYSTEM .............................................................................................. 11
14.18 TANK LEVEL MEASURING ........................................................................ 11
14.19 HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS ............................................................................... 12
14.27 LEG J ETTING SYSTEM ................................................................................ 13

SECTION 14.0 - PIPING SYSTEMS

14.1 GENERAL

The piping systems shall be in accordance with the Contract Plans, and as required to meet the
Classification Society and Regulatory Body requirements. The Builder shall verify the information shown
on the Contract Plans with the information provided by the selected manufacturer of the equipment
concerned and the Classification Society and Regulatory Body Requirements. Piping systems, where
Contract Plans are not available, shall be in accordance with these Specifications, including the general
requirements in Section 13, the Classification Society and Regulatory Body requirements, Industrial
Standards and equipment manufacturer's recommendations.

14.2 PRELOAD SYSTEM

The preload system shall be in accordance with Contract Plans.

A saltwater preload/ballast system shall permit filling or emptying any of the saltwater preload/ballast
tanks. Pumps for the system shall consist of:

1. Three remote operated tower sea water pumps, one located in each leg well.
2. One high-volume tower sea water pump located outboard, on the aft starboard side shell. It is
intended that this pump will be utilized for early preloading when the vessel has arrived on its site
of operation prior to the three leg well tower pumps being placed in operation. Builder shall
fabricate and install stowage facilities for the pump when it not in operation; i.e., when the Vessel
is elevated greater than 3 m above the waterline. Pump lowering and raising shall be by the
starboard crane.
3. Two bilge/preload pumps that can be utilized independently or with the high-volume pump when
the vessel is afloat.

The submersible pumps located in each leg well shall also supply the sea water service system, jetting
system, and fire system when the Vessel is elevated. Operation of the pumps shall be via the DCS.

The preload fill valves shall be arranged in a manifold and located inside inner-bottom void spaces as
shown on the Plans. The fill valves shall be grouped to limit the quantity of manifolds to a maximum of
three. Isolation valves shall be arranged in optimum locations in the ring main to ensure best preload
performance from the various pumps.

Preload dump system valves shall be submersible electro-hydraulically or electro-pneumatic operated with
valves appropriately located within each preload tank. The valves shall be fitted with limit switches and
indicators to provide open or closed position indication. A non-return valve shall be located outboard of
each tank dump valve.
Control and monitoring of the dump valves shall be via the rig DCS.

A manual operated valve stripping system shall be provided with preload tank suction tailpipes are to be
located at the optimum low points so that with the rig trimmed aft all tanks can be stripped. Remote
controlled valve stripping system is optional.

14.3 BILGE SYSTEM

The bilge system shall be in accordance with the Contract Plans, Classification and Regulatory Body
requirements. All preload tanks shall be fitted with 100 mm (4) stripping lines. Bilge lines shall be 100
mm (4) (minimum) from all drained spaces, and no less than 80 mm (3) in all other areas.


The bilge system shall be serviced by the two bilge/preload pumps. Connection to the bilge suction
manifold shall be via a single bilge main provided with a simplex strainer and independent valve
connections at the pumps. All valves in the bilge manifolds shall be of the stop check type.

The port firemain pump shall be provided with an emergency bilge suction.

The bilge sumps shall be fitted with stainless steel float switches which shall be monitored via the rig DCS.

All collected fluids shall be cycled through the oily water separator.

14.4 SEA WATER SERVICE SYSTEM

The seawater service shall be in accordance with the Contract Plans.

The submersible pumps, one located in each leg well shall supply the saltwater service requirements of the
Vessel, when elevated. The pumps shall be sized to accommodate air gaps up to 22.0 m and consider
environmental criteria. The pumps are to be sized to provide their full required water demand with one
pump out of service. The sea water service system shall be equipped with basket strainers at the locations
of the sea water tower inlets to the drilling unit as well as an anti-fouling system per sea water intake.

The bilge/preload pumps and the drill water/emergency fire/general service pump via the sea chest shall
provide the seawater service requirements, when afloat.

The seawater cooling submersible pump shall provide the seawater cooling requirements while jacking.

The sea water service system shall supply feed water to the water makers and other heat exchangers
requiring salt water.

The sea water service system shall also supply water to various drilling services, including the mud ditch,
cementing unit and auxiliary equipment, shale shakers, mud charging pumps, mud logging unit, drill floor,
sack storage room, mud mixing area, mud pit room, mud pump room, heat exchangers and other areas and
equipment as may be necessary.

14.5 FRESH WATER SYSTEMS

The fresh water systems shall be connected as shown on Contract Plans.

14.5.1 Engine Cooling System

The fresh water cooling piping for each main diesel engine is to be developed by the Builder in
accordance with the requirements of the selected engine manufacturer. The system shall consist of
plate heat exchangers, expansion tank(s), fresh water circulating pump(s), thermostatic control
valve(s) and connecting piping. Final arrangement is to be approved by the engine manufacturer and
calculations of piping system flow and head losses shall be furnished to manufacturer.

The engines shall be unitized with fresh water pumps, thermostatic control valves, water temperature
alarms, oil coolers, turbo after coolers and associated piping. A vent line shall be led from the
highest point in the fresh water discharge piping on each engine to its respective expansion tank.

Each expansion tank shall be fitted with a vent valve, and make-up water connection which shall be
provided via a chemical mixing tank. The expansion tanks shall be fitted with a valve funnel for the
introduction of chemicals, potable water connection, sight glass and outlet lines.


Main engines shall be cooled by seawater to freshwater plate coolers. The plate coolers shall
provide 100% redundancy for main engine cooling

14.5.2 Regenerative Brake Cooling System (if applicable)

There shall be a sea water/fresh water cooled regenerative brake cooling system, to be fed fromthe
seawater system, complete with fresh water pumps. The resistors will be located in the hull, on the
same level as the VFD system. All pumps statuses, temperatures, pressure in/out, delta P and flow to
be displayed on the DCS.

14.5.3 Drill Water System

The drill water systemshall be connected as shown on the Contract Plans and shall consist of two
drill water pumps, drill water tanks and the necessary piping fromthe pumps to the drill water supply
header.

The drill water tanks shall be arranged for filling from the main deck through port and starboard
valve connections or fromthe water makers.

Water fromthe drill water supply header shall be piped to the mud pits, mud mix pumps, de-silter
pumps, mud process pumps, cementing unit and auxiliary equipment, shale shaker, sand trap and
various wash down connections as shown on the Contract Plans. A drill water service line shall also
be piped to the mud pumps and into the mud pump room.

Three lengths of suitable rubber hose for wash down purposes shall be Builder furnished and
installed on dedicated racks.

The drill water pumps and all system valves located in the auxiliary machinery roomshall be locally
and manually operated. All drill water tanks shall be provided with tank level indicators with a level
indication display in the jacking control room.

Builder to furnish and install high pressure wash down ring main to cover drill floor main
deck, cellar deck, BOP storage area, mud pit room etc.

14.5.4 Central fresh water cooling System

The Central fresh water cooling water system shall be connected as shown on the Contract Plans and
shall consist of two auxiliary cooling pumps, plate heat exchangers, expansion tanks and the
necessary piping from the pumps to Main engine after coolers, VFDs, HP mud pumps, air
compressors.

14.5.5 Potable water system

The potable water supply shall be connected as shown on the Contract Drawings.

The potable water system shall provide hot and cold water for drinking, cooking and washing on
the Vessel. Discharge from the fresh water pressure set shall be through a properly sized in line
UV bacteria treatment, charcoal filter and other chemical injection system as required by the
sanitation regulator. The non-treated cold water supply shall also provide make-up for all diesel
engine jacket cooling water systems and other machinery services. Wash down outlets suitable for
the attachment of 20 mm hose shall be provided in the galley and on the aft sides of the house,
port and starboard.

The fresh water pressure sets consisting of pumps and hydrophore tanks shall take suction from
the fresh water tanks and discharge through the treatment system to make it into potable water to

the various fixtures and services throughout the vessel. Start and stop of the hydrophore pressure
pumps shall be arranged such that under normal conditions only one pump is in operation. Hot
water heaters shall be as specified in Section 12 of these Specifications.

The potable water supply shall be provided with isolation valves as required to facilitate
maintenance of system. Isolation valves shall be located in normally accessible spaces such as
passageways.

The return line of the hot water system from each deck shall be piped back to the hot water
circulating pump and each return shall be fitted with ball valve. The pressure side of that pump
will feed into the water heaters and supply the hot water back to each level.

14.5.6 Sanitary system

The sanitary system shall be served by two motor driven centrifugal pumps supplying flushing
water to all urinals and water closets. An insertable spool shall be supplied to alternatively
connect the suction piping of the sanitary pumps to the drill water or fresh water suction piping.
The fresh water header at this joint shall be protected with a check valve to prevent the ingress of
drill water into the fresh water system. There shall be manually operated isolation valves to
ensure isolation between the fresh water or drill water suction headers. The pumps shall normally
be arranged to take suction from the drill water tanks. The sanitary pumps shall discharge to a pair
(the second unit shall be installed at the 3rd or 4th accommodation level) of 0.76 cubic meter
galvanized or epoxy coated hydro- pneumatic tank fitted with a relief valve, gauge glass, air
charging connection, manhole and drain connection. Special care shall be taken in the sizing of
the pumps and system components to ensure that sufficient pressure and flow is available for toilet
flushing in the upper levels of the accommodation, with ample allowance for future fouling of the
lines. Likewise, adequate cleanouts shall be provided for cleaning lines.

The pumps shall be pressure actuated so that under normal circumstances only one pump is in
operation.

14.5.7 Chilled Water Piping for Air Conditioners

Builder shall supply and install interconnecting chilled water piping between the air conditioning
system components. Lagging shall be performed according to Section 13, and as addressed below.
Any external chilled water piping shall be lagged and covered with stainless steel sheeting.
Internal (accommodation and machinery deck) piping shall be lagged using a durable system,
suitable to prevent condensate in the non-air conditioned spaces. Supports are to be provided at
appropriate spacing, as suitable for the various types of piping and lagging systems. U-bolts are
not acceptable for these systems.

14.6 GENERAL FIREFIGHTING SYSTEM

A complete fire main system shall be provided, served by the submersible pumps supplying water to the
fire pumps, jockey pump, and the drill water/emergency fire/general service pump. The system shall fully
conform to all the requirements of the Classification Society, the Owner and Regulatory Bodies.

A complete fire main system shall be provided, permanently pressurized by a jockey pump in combination
with hydrophore.

For the deluge/foam pump and systems, refer to the Contract Plans.

The fire system shall be run throughout the drilling unit and shall include all necessary risers, and isolation
valves, hoses, hose valves, fire hose and nozzles, monitors, fog nozzles, applicators, hose cabinets,
wrenches, fire axes, etc., to meet the requirements of Classification Society and Regulatory Bodies.


All exterior and interior fire stations shall be 65 mm (2) nominal bore pipe size.

Fire hoses shall be stowed on racks or reels with connection spanners and applicator secured with clamps,
thus arranged for easy removal. Hose racks or reels outside accommodations shall be located on the walls
of the deck houses and be enclosed in heavy duty fiberglass or approved molded plastic cabinets, recessed
where possible, and arranged so that the valve is within the cabinet. Hose racks and hydrants inside the
accommodation spaces shall be recessed in bulkheads where practical, and preferably large enough to also
accommodate the portable fire extinguishers. Permanent type and identification marking, in accordance
with Classification Society, Owner and Regulatory Bodies requirements shall be provided.

14.7 FRESH WATER GENERATING PLANT SYSTEM

The fresh water generating plant shall receive feed water from the saltwater service system. Brine water
shall be dumped overboard. If heat rejection units are utilized, the energy to produce water will come from
the heat rejection of the main diesel engines through the cooling water circuit of the main engines, which
also incorporates booster heaters to boost the temperature of the cooling water in case of low heat rejection
due to partly loaded main diesel engines.

The fresh water from the plant shall be connected to the fill connection for the potable water tanks and to
the drill water tanks via a funnel.

14.8 LOW PRESSURE MUD SYSTEM

The low pressure mud system shall be installed as shown on the Contract Plans.

A full description of the low pressure mud system is in Section 17, Drilling Systems.

14.9 HIGH PRESSURE MUD AND CEMENT SYSTEM

A full description of the high pressure mud system is in Section 17, Drilling Systems.

14.10 DIESEL OIL PURIFYING, TRANSFER AND SERVICE SYSTEM

The diesel oil purifying, transfer and service system shall be designed as shown on the Contract Plans.

Diesel oil shall be carried in the hull storage tanks. Two diesel oil purifiers shall be arranged to take
suction from the settling tank and discharge to the diesel oil day tank.

Two diesel oil transfer pumps shall be arranged to take suction from any of the storage tanks and discharge
to deck fill connections, mud pits, settling tank or enable transfer between storage tanks. An additional
6.34 m/h (27.9 GPM) pump shall transfer diesel oil from two (2) main engine day tanks to the service
header via a discharge manifold as indicated below:

emergency generator diesel oil day tank
cement unit
trip tank
diesel engine driver starting air compressor
mud process are

well logging unit
burner booms

From the Main Engine Day Tanks, diesel oil shall supply the main engines, boiler and incinerator by
gravity feed.

Each day tank shall be provided with a high and low level alarm arranged to sound on the Engine Control
Panel.

The waste discharge from the diesel oil purifiers shall be piped to the dirty oil tank.

The diesel oil day tanks shall have a capacity according to the Contract Plans and as required by
Classification Society and Regulatory bodies.

The diesel oil day tanks and emergency generator diesel oil day tank shall be provided with direct reading
level gauges, of an approved type, marked in gallons and liters at gauge or tank itself.

14.11 LUBRICATING OIL SYSTEM

The lubricating oil system shall be connected as shown on the Contract Plans and shall be complete with
storage tanks and all necessary piping.

The main diesel engines and mud pumps shall be arranged for gravity filling from the lubricating oil
storage tanks located in the machinery spaces. Drained lubricating oil from the diesel engines and mud
pumps shall be piped to the dirty oil tank.

Fill lines shall be installed for the lube oil tanks terminating on the main deck and arranged for hose
connection and/or funnel for dumping in drums of oil. All fill lines shall be fitted with screens to remove
contaminants that may be inadvertently introduced.

The oil storage tanks shall be fitted with sight gauge glasses and bolted oil tight access plates for cleaning
the inside of tanks.

14.12 DRAINS

The drain system shall be installed as shown on the Contract Plans.

14.12.1 Weather and Interior

Drains shall be provided in all spaces and on all decks where water or oil can accumulate so as to
create a zero discharge collection and treatment system. All drain lines shall have a minimumslope
of 1:100 and utilize lateral and Y type connections exclusively, to promote good drainage flow
through the systems. The drains shall be divided into two general categories: clean and
contaminated. Clean drains shall be piped to the contaminated drain holding tanks (port or
starboard) with a provision to isolate the drain collection system fromthe holding tanks. As an
option, clean drains fromthe main deck may be piped to the drill water tanks, P/S, to relieve load on
water maker. Contaminated drains shall be piped to the contaminated drain collecting tanks.

All deck drains shall be fitted with a removable strainer plate having an open area equal to the area of
the connecting down pipe. Strainer plates shall be bronze. All drain down pipes shall be a minimum
of 100 mm (4) pipe, except accommodation decks and coaming drains which maybe 50 mm (2)
pipe (minimum), and mud pump roomand mud process rooms which shall be 150 mm (6) pipe.

Deck drains shall generally be located in the corners of spaces or coamings, but the final location is
dictated by the arrangement of the specific area.

Clean drains are fromthose areas not subject to contamination by oily liquids, fuels or chemicals
such as quarters, main deck and house top, exterior doors and vestibules, interior accommodation
deck drains other than toilet spaces, etc.

Contaminated drains are from those areas that are subject to contamination by spillage or leakage of
oily liquids, fuels or chemicals. There are four types of contaminated drain collection holding tanks:

(1) a single bilge contaminated drain holding tank for collection of liquids from all
the below deck machinery spaces, loading stations, vent coamings and main
deck pipe storage areas (except mud pump room and mud mixing room),

(2) two drain holding tanks (port and starboard) for collection of liquids from the
accommodation, main deck and house top, exterior doors and vestibules, interior
accommodation deck drains other than toilet spaces, etc.

(3) the skimmer tank for collection of fluids from the drill floor and cantilever areas,
and other hazardous areas

(4) the dirty oil tank for engine room & fuel oil drains and oil from the oil/water
separator.

All drain holding tanks shall be fitted with individual high level alarms.

Drains fromthe mud mixing room and mud pump roomshall be collected into a common header.
An isolation valve provides option for fluids from these spaces to be pumped to mud ditch or
overboard discharge or to be pumped to offloading or portable holding tank. Rodding (cleanout)
facilities shall be provided to allow cleaning of these drain pipes.

The drill floor shall be provided with a drip pan and drain collection system of gutters which
surround the working areas of the drill floor, including the setback areas. The gutters shall have bar
grating covers with an adequate number of down spouts to handle the maximum flows. Down
spouts shall be no less than 6" pipe and headers at least 8" pipe. Drain pipes shall be constructed of
Bondstrand 2000M or equivalent composite piping materials. Facilities for rodding out each section
shall be provided. The drill floor drains and all other cantilever drains shall be routed to and
collected in the mud process equipment or cantilever skimmer tank. The drains from the cement unit
area coaming are directed to an overboard discharge aft of the transom. The skimmer tank is
monitored for level and is automatically (or manually) pumped out with individual sludge gulper
pumps to a portable collection tank nearby. Solids that may accumulate in the skimmer tank shall be
removed manually via a manhole installed in tank side shell and stored in cuttings skips..

The oily water separator shall be capable of taking suction from, either drain holding tank or the
bilge holding tank. Extracted oil is pumped to the dirty oil tank. Processed fluid is returned to the
drill water tanks or pumped overboard. A sampling pump system for each clean drain holding tank
circulates clean water holding tank fluids through an oil monitor (with strip chart recorder). If the
fluid contamination level is less than 15 ppm, the clean water can be dumped directly overboard,
otherwise it is recycled through the oily water separator until the contamination level of the water in
the clean drain holding tank is reduced to less than 15 ppm.

The dirty oil tank shall be provided with a pump and system to allow dirty oil to be pumped to the
off-loading discharge station (to shore facilities or barge) or portable container. Remote START-
STOP push-button stations shall be provided at the port and starboard stations/main deck outlets.

14.12.2 Sewage Piping


All plumbing drain systems shall be designed for the installed sewage system. Plumbing drains shall
be divided into two categories: clean and soil. Clean drains are all interior drains other than soil.
Soil drains are those fromtoilets, toilet space deck drains, urinals, showers, lavatories and hospital
lavatory, bath and shower. All plumbing drain piping shall be fitted with clean outs at least every 12
m. All drain piping shall be provided with vent lines to the atmosphere. Consideration shall be
given to the location of vents in respect to ventilation system intakes and normally manned areas,
and to prevent siphoning of P-traps.

Clean drains fromthe accommodation level below main deck are to be led to the drain holding tanks
or overboard.

Soil drain lines shall be piped to the sewage treatment plant. All drains fromthe hospital shall be
piped separately to the sewage treatment plant.

All drains piped to the sewage treatment plant shall also be capable of being led directly overboard;
however the valves shall be normally locked and blind spectacle flanges mounted in the drain lines to
overboard.

14.12.3 Refrigerated Compartments and Food Preparation and Serving Spaces and Equipment
Drains

Deck drains for refrigerated spaces, laundry, dry stores, mess areas, galley and other food preparation
spaces, including pantries, shall be provided in quantity and location so that complete drainage is
possible under normal conditions of list or trim. Deck and equipment drains fromthese spaces are to
be led to the sewage system or overboard.

14.12.4 Helideck

The helideck and helideck refueling system areas shall be provided with a drain collection system.
Coamings around the refueling storage tanks, refueling package shall capture spilled fluids. The
helideck surface and recessed tie-downs drains shall be in a manifold underneath the helideck. The
collected drains shall be run down to main deck where the fluids can be directed to overboard
discharge or to a portable holding tank.

14.13 VENTS, SOUND AND OVERFLOWS

Vents and/or overflows shall be installed for all liquid tanks and void spaces and where tanks are to be
filled by pump pressure, the cross-sectional area shall be equal to or greater than 125% of the fill pipes
cross-sectional area. Ball check valves in vent terminals for all preload ballast tanks are to have clearance
equal to dump valve opening area.

Vents from oil tanks shall be fitted with 40-mesh corrosion resistant flame screens protected by 6 mm wire
mesh screens and shall be led to the open air. All vents to the weather shall be fitted with balls and covers.

Fresh water tank vents shall be fitted with 16-mesh or finer bug screens of corrosion resistant wire.

The vents from the lube oil tanks in the engine room and mud pump room shall terminate below the main
deck out of the weather.

The fresh water and preload tanks shall have remote level gauges for sounding.

In order to prevent the discharge of oil upon filling of the contaminated drain tanks, a high level float alarm
switch shall be installed in the contaminated drain tank(s).


Each of the preload, diesel oil, drill water, and void tanks shall have a straight sounding pipe extending
from the main deck to within 38 mm of the tank bottom with 12.5 mm thick striking plate about 150 mm x
150 mm located under the sounding tube. The sounding tube shall be 50 mm pipe 5.5 mm wall thickness,
continuously welded and shall have sleeves in way of each deck or tank top penetration. The upper ends of
the sounding tubes shall be fitted with sounding plugs on main deck with inscription of tank service
engraved on a stainless steel plate adjacent to the sounding plug.

All engine crank case vent lines shall be routed to outside the engine compartment with low point drain.

14.14 DIESEL EXHAUSTS

The exhausts from the main diesel engines shall be led from the engines up through the main deck. Each
exhaust shall be provided with flanged spark arresting silencer. Exhaust piping and silencers shall be
mounted on vibration isolator. All support brackets to hull plate will be extra heavy and attached by use of
doubler plates.

The exhaust piping shall be provided with sufficient flexible connections to compensate for expansion.
Expansion joints shall be stainless steel fitted with an internal sleeve liner. Exhaust pipes shall be run in
such a manner as to provide clear paths to all chocks and cleats.

The Main Engine exhaust pipes shall be run outboard of the Vessel side shell and vertically down to a point
flush with the Vessel bottom plate. Pipes are to be fitted with bypass outlets at the main deck. Access shall
be provided to the bypass outlets.

Internal runs shall be located to maximize the useable head space in the compartments through which they
run.

The cementing unit diesel engines and emergency diesel engine shall be fitted with spark arresting
silencers.

14.15 SERVICE AIR

The service air system shall be as shown on Contract Plans and shall furnish air for engine starting, drilling
services (including air hoists, drawworks, drillers console, power slips, top drive, bulk handling system,
control valves, etc.), and other equipment and service outlets throughout the Vessel.

The service air system shall be designed for 8.6 bar working pressure and shall be delivered by the service
air compressors discharging through an air dryer to the engine room starting air receivers, and the service
air receivers as specified in Sections 12 and 17 of these Specifications. Acoustic enclosures shall be
installed on the three air compressors. The three service air compressors will be operated on a sequential
base, whereby the running hours for each individual compressor will be kept in line with the other ones.
The running status and hours will be remotely displayed on the engine room alarm and control panel.

Air for the bulk handling system shall be furnished by the air compressors through reducing valve station.

Compressor discharge lines and connections to engine starting motors shall be made with flexible hose of a
type meeting the requirements of the Regulatory Bodies.

Each service outlet shall each be fitted with a ball valve and filter, pressure regulator and lubricator to suit
vendors' recommendation.


14.16 FIXED

FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS

14.16.1 Fixed Fire Extinguishing Systems

A complete high pressure water mist fire dousing system shall be provided by the Builder for
protection of the spaces listed below. The system shall be designed and installed in accordance
with applicable regulatory body requirements.

The System shall be fitted with approved alarm to provide personnel evacuation warning prior to
discharge. The alarm signal shall be distinctive, visible, and clearly audible over the normal noise
levels in the respective rooms.

Ventilation systems will be shut down when the water mist system (or any other means of fixed
fire extinguishing system is activated) is discharged into the relevant compartments via the fire
and gas detection system cause and effect matrix.

The following spaces shall be protected:

1) Engine room
2) Main switchgear room
3) Emergency generator room
4) Galley
5) Paint locker
6) Control room / Radio room
7) Mud pit room and below the mud pit deck plates

The following spaces shall be protected from a unit on the cantilever:

1. Mud process room and below process pit deck plates
2. Cantilever MCC room
3. LER at drill floor
4. Cement unit room or space

14.16.2 Foam System

A complete foam fire extinguishing system shall be provided by the Builder for protection of the
spaces listed below. The systems shall be designed and installed in accordance with applicable
Regulatory Bodies.

1. Helideck and helicopter refueling area

14.16.3 Galley Hoods

A remote actuated R102 system shall be provided to protect the galley range hood, deep fat fryer
and the exhaust ventilation duct. Actuator shall be located at exit(s) from gallery.

14.16.4 Deluge system

For the deluge pump size, location and piping refer to the Contract Drawings.


A deluge system shall be provided to protect the drill floor, cellar floor and well test area in
accordance with Regulatory Bodies. A water spray system shall further be installed on the
handrails near the burner booms on the aft side of the drilling unit, as well as on the hand rails of
the adjacent jack houses, to provide cooling during flaring operations.

14.16.5 Sprinkler system (optional)

An optional sprinkler system may be provided for accommodation and other areas in accordance
with the Regulatory Bodies. Note that an accommodation sprinkler system is not required when an
early smoke detection system is installed in every space of the accommodation.

All necessary alarm systems for the fixed firefighting systems as per Regulatory Bodies
shall be provided by the Builder.

14.17 BULK MUD SYSTEM

A full description of the bulk mud system is in Section 17, Drilling Systems.

14.18 TANK LEVEL MEASURING

14.18.1 General

There will be a level measurement in all tanks, ballast/preload, and any other water, fuel or oil
tank. The level display for the preload tanks may be in the area of the preload control panel, with a
slave panel in the jacking control room. All other levels may be displayed on the DCS, with a
slave panel in the jacking control room.

The preload control panel shall be near the pre-load manifold.

The panel will have the following functionality:

monitor and control tower pumps
monitor and control bilge/preload pumps
monitor the tank levels
monitor and control the preload valves
14.18.2 Sensors

The tank levels will be monitored using differential pressure sensors with 4-20 mA outputs. The
piping will be arranged such that the sensors will be mounted externally to the tanks. Each sensor
will be wired to the preload monitoring panel.

14.18.3 Preload Dump Valves

The preload dump valves will be elector-hydraulically or electro-pneumatic operated and fitted with
a position indicator.

14.18.4 Pumps


The pump stop / start contacts and run signal in the motor starter cubicles will be wired to pre-load
panel.

14.19 HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS

14.19.1 Drill Floor

There shall be a water cooled multi-purpose hydraulic power unit with a distribution / pressure
control manifold at the drill floor serving:

Drill line spooler
Hydraulic Cathead
Hydraulic Rotary drive
Casing tong
Drill floor lift and roll system
Top drive pipe handler
SPHS Pipe Handling System and associated hydraulic unit
Iron Roughneck
Catwalk Machine (on cantilever)

The drill floor skidding systems shall include supply and installation of all piping, hydraulic hoses,
etc. and be complete working systems. Pipe work and fittings shall be stainless steel.

Isolation valves shall be installed on supply lines, non-return valves on return and drain lines at
each piece of equipment supplied by the central HPU. A permanently installed hydraulic oil
filtration and cleanliness system including permanent readout of NAS or ISO 4406 cleanliness
level should be included at the central HPU.

14.19.2 Rack Chock System

There shall be a complete HPU, control console and control distribution system for the F&G
supplied Rack Chock system(s) (screw jacks and lift cylinders) at each of the three legs. Each
system allows individual control of each individual Rack Chock.

14.19.3 Split Conductor Tension Unit (CTU)

The CTU control and accumulator system and split CTU / sliding panel system shall be installed in
the moon pool area of the cantilever. The foundations for the system accumulator bottles shall be
provided with two extra slots for future expansion. The CTU control system shall be installed to
allow both local and remote control/instrumentation display of the system via interface with the
DCS.

The Split CTU unit shall be installed in the CTP. The installation shall include a complete hookup
and function test/simulation.

14.19.4 Cantilever Skidding


There shall be a complete and independent HPU, control console and supply and control system for
the Cantilever skidding system. The system includes the port and starboard skidding cylinders.

14.19.5 Cantilever hydraulic unit

A complete and independent hydraulic unit for the supply of the following units shall be located on
the cantilever:

CTU
BOP Handling
Casing Stabbing Basket
BOP carts

14.27 LEG JETTING SYSTEM

The spud cans shall be equipped with a double jetting system:

One system shall consist of twelve nozzles underneath the can, and the other system shall consist of twelve
nozzles on the upper surface of the can.

Two 125 mm (5) standpipes (104 bar WP) shall be installed in each leg with a sufficient number of outlets
to allow jetting at any elevation.

The jetting system shall be capable of being connected either to the HP mud pump discharge manifold
through a relief valve or direct to the raw water system.

Deck connections shall consist of two sets of 125 mm (5) valves (104 bar) installed in the vicinity of the
leg well and two 138 bar HP flexible hoses. Either hose shall be capable of being connected to any valve.

The spud cans are to be fitted with a means of removing water from each spud can. An eductor is located at
the lowest point in each spud can. The eductors require an operating pressure of the motive medium to
remove the liquids from the spud cans of 10 to 14 bar, at which the suction lift will be around 27 ft. Spud
cans to be fitted with a means of educting water from each can Spud cans. The educator capacity
shall be 45 m/hr.

This is usually accomplished by connecting the sea water service system or drill water system via a hose
connection to the eductor supply pipe. A rose box strainer is connected to the suction side of the eductor to
prevent any debris from getting lodged in the pipe. All supply and spud can water is discharged overboard
via a hose connection attached to the end of the eductor discharge piping.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 15.0 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ................................................................................................. 2
15.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL PLANT ......................... 2
15.2 GENERATORS .................................................................................................. 4
15.3 ELECTRICAL SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELS ......................................... 4
15.4 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFD) .................................................... 7
15.5 RIG J ACKING SYSTEM .................................................................................. 7
15.6 TRANSFORMERS ............................................................................................ 9
15.7 DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM ............................................................................... 9
15.8 CABLES ........................................................................................................... 11
15.9 A.C. MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS (MCCS) ............................................ 12
15.10 A.C. MOTORS ................................................................................................. 12
15.11 CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS ..................................................... 13
15.12 HEATERS AND WINDOW WIPERS ............................................................ 13
15.13 LIGHTING SYSTEM ...................................................................................... 13
15.14 STORAGE BATTERIES AND CHARGERS ................................................. 15
15.15 ELECTRICAL SHOP ...................................................................................... 17
15.16 ELECTRICIAN'S TEST PANEL .................................................................... 17
15.17 RADIO COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT ................................................. 17
15.18 WEATHER INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM .............................................. 18
15.19 ALARM SYSTEMS ......................................................................................... 18
15.20 EMERGENCY SHUT DOWN (ESD) AND "STOP" STATIONS ............. 19
15.21 INTERIOR COMMUNICATIONS ................................................................. 20
15.22 ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM ....................................................................... 22
15.23 NAVIGATION AND SIGNAL LIGHTS ........................................................ 23
15.24 MISCELLANEOUS NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT ...................................... 24
15.25 DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEM ........................................................... 24
15.26 LAN SYSTEM ................................................................................................. 25
15.27 ECHO SOUNDER ........................................................................................... 25
15.28 CCTV SYSTEM ............................................................................................... 25
15.29 SHIP SECURITY ALERT SYSTEM .............................................................. 25
15.30 HEAT TRACING SYSTEM (OPTIONAL) .................................................... 25

SECTION 15.0 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

15.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL PLANT

Scope

The electrical plant shall be described as guidance herein and in accordance with all applicable
requirements of the Classification Society, Owner and Regulatory Bodies.

15.1.1 Design Requirements

The electric plant including power generation, distribution, and electric power consuming equipment,
such as lighting, power, communications, and electronics shall be as specified herein, and in accordance
with all applicable requirements of the Classification and Regulatory Bodies.
The electrical drawings shall be complete in all details, as required by all applicable Regulatory
Bodies, and as specified by the Owner.

The Builder shall submit a load analysis plan for the Owner's approval within sixty (60) days after
Contract signing. The 'generator load analysis' shall include as a minimum:
(1) Total connected load,
(2) Calculated operating loads for various operating conditions (elevating, drilling, emergency, etc.),
(3) Assumed usage factors for the various loads in the various operating conditions.

In addition, the format and information shall be suitable for Regulatory Body approval, specifically for
ABS approval.

Builder shall prepare a fault current analysis to indicate the minimuminterrupting capacity required of
each circuit breaker at its point of application. Fault current analysis for the systemshall include
calculations of symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents at all critical points with a bolted fault. Any
assumptions made shall be noted and justified. In addition, the format and information shall be suitable
for ABS evaluation and approval.

All circuits, SWBD, MCC and equipment shall be adequately protected. Design will be based on IEC
standards.

Electrical equipment and machinery shall have suitable barriers and screens wherever necessary to
prevent personnel from contacting non-insulated energized parts. Nonconductive rubber matting shall
be installed at operating and service areas in way of electrical switchboards for the prevention of
electric shock.

Elementary wiring diagrams, deck arrangement plans, one line diagrams, and other special plans and
booklets, as required to sufficiently details all electrical systems, shall be prepared by the Builder and
submitted to the Owner for approval.

Wiring arrangement plans shall be per MCT schedule.

Units shown on elementary wiring diagrams, for which a separate wiring schematic is provided, may
be represented by a block with terminals shown and appropriately marked.

Manufacturer's technical manuals (6 copies) shall be provided for all Builder-furnished electrical
equipment and systems that require explanatory information and instruction for proper operation
and maintenance. Such manuals shall include:

Installation instructions.
Operating instructions, including safety precautions and sequence of operation if needed.
Maintenance procedures and routine adjustments.
Parts illustrations, including parts lists and designation of number as required per component.
Wiring diagram (including conductor color code if applicable).
Trouble shooting procedure.

Dimensions, weights and center of gravity.

15.1.2 Arrangement of Equipment

Electrical equipment shall be installed in such locations as to provide ready accessibility for replacements,
service and repairs and to reduce to a minimum any chances that the equipment may be exposed to
damage caused by leaking oil or water frompiping, ventilation ducts, or containers within the same or
adjacent compartments or by excessive heat. Equipment and cabling shall be installed so as to minimize
the possibility of mechanical damage during the handling of stores or drilling component

15.1.3 Hazardous Area Classification

The extent of Zone 1 and Zone 2 hazardous area shall be dictated by the more onerous of ABS, CDS, API
505, IEC or IP Model Code of Practice Part 15 - Area Classification Code for Petroleum Installations. All
electrical apparatus essential for the safe operation of the rig shall be selected or enabled with the
appropriate degree of protection for the area classification into which it is installed. The Builder shall
generate a register of all hazardous area equipment, complete with one picture of each type of equipment
and the location of all equipment according to a grid pattern to be found on the hazardous area drawings.

15.1.4 Equipment and Materials

All electrical equipment located on open decks shall be rated for full load service at 45 C. All electrical
equipment in enclosed machinery spaces shall be rated at 45 C, except that in the engine rooms and mud
pit rooms are to be rated for full load service at 50 C. In enclosed -non-machinery spaces, electrical
equipment may be designed for 40 C.

Flame-proof, increased safety and intrinsically safe equipment located on the open decks or in hazardous
areas shall have CENELEC (ATEX) approval and be installed in accordance with the requirements of the
Classification Society and Regulatory Bodies. UL, FM, CSA listed equipment is not to be used, unless
with specific approval of the Owner. All equipment in hazardous locations as well as the equipment that
remains in operation after a shutdown in all other areas, shall be ATEX certified for operation in Zone 1
or 2, as dictated by the area.

Watertight (IP 56) equipment shall be installed in all locations either temporarily or permanently exposed
to the weather or subject to flooding. Drip proof (IP 44) enclosures shall be provided for all other
electrical equipment.

The electrical equipment shall be adequately protected against corrosion and have as a minimum
protection an epoxy coating, when mounted in outside areas exposed to the weather. Cable trays shall
be of stainless steel in areas where the trays are prone to corrosion (on outside locations, semi exposed
areas, mud pit room, shale shaker room, mud treatment and mixing areas, drill floor (above and below),
battery rooms, paint locker, etc.) and be hot dipped galvanized metal ladders when located inside the
accommodation or technical rooms.

All electrical cables, cable connectors, and cable glands shall be provided. All cables shall be sized in
accordance with the Regulatory Bodies.

15.1.5 Spare Parts

Spare parts shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of the Regulatory Bodies and the
recommendations of the manufacturer for one year's operation. Spare parts shall be delivered to Owner
onboard the vessel at time of delivery.

15.1.6 Nameplates and Marking for Electrical Equipment

All electrical equipment shall be provided with name plates and carry unique marking for identification.
Name tags shall be phenolic or photo-engraved stainless steel in all exposed and aggressive location.
Name tags shall be attached with stainless steel screws.


Every piece of electrical equipment shall be provided with a nameplate as described above; such
nameplates will name the equipment, the feeding circuit designation, origin, voltage, and tag number.

All electric cables shall be marked in accordance with the Regulatory Bodies' requirements. As a
minimum, all cables shall have a permanent ID tag at each end of the cable. In some cases wherein such
cables pass through an MCT, a typical marking at each side of bulkhead shall be applied. The ID tag
shall correlate with the identification shown on the one line diagrams.

Nameplates provided on the switchboards shall clearly identify all devices, their function, circuit or
purpose. Circuit identification shall be provided by number, capacity, name, maximum current rating and
element rating.

15.2 GENERATORS

15.2.1 Main Generators

There shall be six (6) diesel driven generators which shall supply normal power to the Vessel. The
generators shall be arranged for simultaneous parallel operation.

The main generators shall generally be as follows:

Six (6) Caterpillar diesel engines, connected to generators with a minimum power rating of
2191 kVA (1534 kW at pf. of 0.7), 1200 RPM, 690 volt, 60 Hz, 3 phase.
The generators shall be: Brushless, for VFD use, insulation class H, ambient temperature 50
C, with two bearings, Air intake with filters, space heaters, 6 x 10 ohm RTDs for
generators wires and two (2) RTDs for generators bearings.

15.2.2 Emergency Generator

There shall be one (1) diesel driven emergency generator with a minimum power rating of
(900 kW at a pf. of 0.8), 1800 rpm, 480 volt, 3 phase, 60 Hz. The unit shall be rated for
operation at 50 C. , and all associated electrical equipment shall also be rated for 50 C. Air
intake with filters, space heaters, RTDs for generator wires and bearings.

The emergency diesel driven generator system shall be equipped with a dual starting system (air and
batteries) which complies with all applicable rules and regulations.

15.3 ELECTRICAL SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELS

15.3.1 General

A main 690 volt AC switchboard, 480 Volt MCC boards and a 480 volt Emergency Switchboard (all IT
system) and other power and lighting distribution boards shall be supplied and installed by the Builder.

The drilling AC switchboard shall be associated with the VFD panels which shall be supplied and
installed by the Builder.

All MCC's will be located in the main electrical space and in the emergency generator room.

All bus bars and connections shall be made from hard drawn pure commercial copper. Bus bars and
connections shall be provided with tin plated surface contracts.


All free standing control, distribution and switchboards shall be fitted with insulated front grab rails.
Sufficient power supplies, telephone, LAN, PA/GA, fire and gas detection, etc. shall be routed to 3
d
party
equipment, where these are to be located.

Nameplates shall be provided on the switchboards to clearly identify all devices, their functions, circuits
or purposes. Circuit identification shall be provided by number, capacity, name, maximum current rating
and element rating.

A frequency/ voltage converter 690V 60Hz/3PH to 380V 50Hz/ 3PH with an output of 300kW, 380V,
50HZ 3PH and suitable to start DOL for ac motor up to 150hp, 3000rpm, with distribution panel, will be
supplied by a motor / generator set and installed by builder.
15.3.2 Circuit Breakers

Distribution of circuits from all switchboards shall be in general accordance with the applicable one line
diagrams. All ratings shall be demonstrated by load analysis and in accordance with IEC 61892 and other
applicable rules and standards.

All circuit breakers shall be capable of interrupting the maximum fault current available at their point of
application. The protection features and interrupting ratings of circuit breakers shall be coordinated to
provide the greatest continuity of service possible and a selective system of tripping which allows the
generator breaker to be the last to open.

15.3.3 Main AC Switchboard

This switchboard shall contain the necessary equipment to provide adequate protection and control the
generation and distribution of 690 volts, 3 phase, 60 Hz power, and switch gear necessary for distribution
of 690 volts, 3 phase power. All circuit breakers shall be of the withdrawable type, load sharing shall be
droop and ISOC digital, complete with synchronizer, displays, power management system, etc.

15.3.4 Main 480 Volt Distribution Center

Consisting of a main-MCC A, main MCC B, ,cantilever MCC A and cantilever MCCB,
Drilling MCC A and Drilling MCC B, ventilation MCC A and ventilation MCC B,
Emergency MCC panels, free standing type, front access only, dead front type Main 480 Volt
Distribution Centers. All electrical distribution systems shall be of the IT type, floating neutral, complete
with earth fault detection systems (where applicable) in each distribution board.

All circuit breakers will be of the withdrawable type exept for MCC starter breakers. The MCC starter
buckets shall be of the withdrawable type.

The Main 480 Volt Distribution Centers shall be located in the Switchgear/Engine Control Room and
shall receive power from the 690/480 volt transformers and distribute this power to motor control centers,
transformers, distribution panels, etc. The Main 480 Volt Distribution Centers shall have a split bus
arrangement and shall have interlock bus tie and transformer secondary interrupters. These interrupters
shall be mechanically interlocked in such a way that it shall not be possible to close more than two at one
time. In addition, the bus tie switches shall have a key lock type device which shall prohibit unauthorized
closing.

The main 480 Volt Distribution center shall have two spare circuit breakers installed for every ten (or
fraction thereof) used in the final installation.

15.3.5 Emergency Switchboard

Consisting of a free standing, front access, dead front type emergency switchboard for use with the
emergency generator as indicated on the Contract Plans.


The emergency switchboard shall control and distribute 480 volt, and 230 volts power to the circuits
indicated on the one line diagram and as prescribed by the Regulatory Bodies. The switchboard shall
contain voltage sensing, automatic engine starting, and bus transfer equipment as required by rules and
regulations.

The 480 volt emergency distribution switchboard shall be arranged to allow feedback to the main 480 volt
distribution switchboard and synchronized transfer to main power after a black-out.

All circuit breakers will be of the withdrawable type exept for MCC starter breakers. The MCC starter
buckets shall be of the withdrawable type.

15.3.6 Low Voltage Distribution Center

One (1) 230 volt, 3 phase, 3 wire Lighting and Small Power Distribution Center shall be provided and

The Low Voltage Distribution Center shall have two spare circuit breakers installed for each ten, or
fraction thereof, used in the final installation. The spare breakers shall be similar in size and type to those
used in final design. The incoming circuit breakers of the 480/230 Volt lighting and small power
switchboards shall be withdrawable.

15.3.7 Small Power and Lighting Distribution Panels

Distribution panels for small power and lighting shall be provided with cabinets that have doors and
locks, except in spaces where panels are constantly under supervision of personnel, (such as in control
rooms, machinery rooms, etc.).

A directory frame complete with the cabinets distribution schematic shall be installed on the back of each
lighting cabinet door.

Panel board main buses shall be 3 phase, 3 wire. Connections for single phase loads shall be allocated at
the main buses in such a manner as to maintain a balanced 3 phase system.

Panel boards shall be provided with at least one spare circuit breaker complete, installed but not used, for
every ten active units, or fraction thereof, installed.

All distribution panels shall be factory assembled, circuit breaker type, completely serviced from the
front. Bus work is to be copper with tin plated connections. Circuit breakers shall have a pole for each
conductor. All circuit breakers shall be of withdrawable type or MCCB type.

15.3.8 System earthing, protective and instrument earthing and bonding

System Earthing: All electrical systems on a drilling unit , listed below, shall be IT system, with an
earth leakage detection and alarm systems on each phase of all switchboards: 690V, 690V VFD, 480V
main and emergency boards, and 230V systems are IT isolated. In addition earthing for cantilever area
including the drill floor and the derrick shall be provided by builder.

Protective and Instrument Earthing: All metal enclosures of panels, motors, junction boxes and other
metal frames of workshop equipment, etc. shall be earthed at a location close to the equipment.
Instruments shall be earthed and cables connected to these instruments shall be earthed as per
manufacturers specifications.

Bonding: All equipment located on deck, in hazardous areas, the helicopter re-fuelling piping, pump
and filters, etc. and other equipment shall be bonded to the metal on the deck or house close to the
equipment. The conductor size of the bonding wire shall be according to the regulations.


15.4 DRILLING VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFD)

AC power for the drilling motors shall be provided by a Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) system as
shown on the Contract Plans, One Line Diagram - Electrical Power Distribution System.

The VFD system will be fully dual redundant PLC controlled and will use PLCs, MMIs, and software
packages as appropriate for this type of equipment.

Communications to the drillers console will be through dual redundant optical data links (preferably
fiber optic) and have control of all the major drilling functions.

The VFD system PLC will contain all the necessary components with which to operate and control the
top drive drilling system, i.e. no external or separate top drive control system will be required.

The below mentioned AC motors shall be connected to the VFD system. Each motor will require one
set of motor cables, one set of control cables for connection of blower motors, space heaters, mud
pump rod and chain oilers, charge pumps, and safety cut-out switches, in accordance with all
Regulatory Body requirements. The AC motors to be connected to the system are as follows:

drawworks AC motors
mud pump AC motors
top drive AC motor

Braking resistors shall be supplied, sized to the required braking capacity of the drawworks, top drive.
The assignment shall be provided to allow AC drilling motor for Top Drive to be supplied from one of
converters for AC drilling motor of Mud Pumps.

The VFD system shall provide all the necessary components with which to interface to other
miscellaneous devices needed to fully complete the AC power drilling system. These shall include but
not be limited to:

Control consoles
Drawworks control system
Top Drive
Mud Pumps
VFD brake resistor
VFD cooling units

The drillers control panel system shall contain all components necessary for the operation of the
following auxiliary drilling equipment:

* Hydraulic rotary table (optional)
* Hydraulic catheads
* Mouse hole tool.
* Drillers stop / start controls and run indicators (shale shakers, mud process
pumps, hydraulic units, etc.)

15.5 RIG JACKING SYSTEM

A complete jacking system with jacking and holding capacities as mentioned in Section 6.2.1 shall be
provided by. The jacking system shall be PLC controlled with system redundancy as per Regulatory
Body requirements.

The principal mechanical components of the jacking system shall be:

Fifty-four (54) J acking Units, each equipped with a motor and a fail-safe brake.
Nine (9) Pinion Wheel Assemblies for measurement of leg/hull height and rack phase
differential.


The principal electrical components of the jacking system shall be:

One (1) Central Control Console (CCC) with touch sensitive screens; also housing all
necessary PLC components for the operation, control, monitoring and alarms of the jacking
system.
Three (3) Motor Control Centers (MCC) with :
Electrical load transfer system (ELT)
Retorquing
Nine (9) Local Control Consoles (LCC) for load transfer from the jacking system to the rack-
chock system and vice versa, and for operating the brakes individually.
One (1) portable box for brake release
One (1) control chest which includes the back up PLC
Three (3) emergency control box
Three (3) Braking Resistor Banks to absorb regenerated power during descending jacking.
Thress (3) set of resistor control chest

The jacking system electrical equipment shall be of proven design and construction methods in
accordance with ABS rules and IEC/IEEE standards.

The Central Control Console (CCC) shall have the following functionality:

Data links to the jacking MCCs.
Power indication for each leg (kW value) and each motor.
Hard wired emergency stop discrete push-button which shall remove all power from the
jacking MCCs.
A three position selector switch: Central control Local Control - Retorquing
Separate controls for independent operation of each leg.
HULL UP/LEG DOWN push-button.
HULL DOWN/LEG UP push-button.
STOP push-button.
Individual motor status indication, displayed on screen in a graphical format.
Individual brake status indication.
Alarm override key switches.
POWER ON indication lights for electrical equipment of each leg.
Inclinometer alarms.
Leg length and RPD value.

The jacking system shall provide a dynamic pinion load monitoring and rack phase differential (RPD)
monitoring system.

The jacking control monitoring system shall continue monitoring while the hull/legs are in motion and
at standstill.

The display shall include but not be limited to:

Current, KW of electric motors
The state of the brakes
The torque value of each gear box
The height of the Rig
The inclination of the Rig

A bi-directional electronic inclinometer shall be provided, mounted in the CCC. The inclinometer shall
be electrically interconnected to the jacking system safety circuits. Two separate bubble inclinometers
shall be installed for visual reference information.

An electrical-mechanical load transfer system to transfer rig weight from elevating jacks to the rack
chocks and vice versa is provided. Load transfer to and from the rack chock system is carried out

locally at each chord by means of the local jacking control console installed at each chord. Electrical-
mechanical load transferring is initiated from the local jacking control console via a keyed lock out
switch.

There shall be a total of 54 jacking motors, 18 per leg, 6 per chord, 1 per jacking unit. Each AC
induction motor shall have sufficient HP / Torque to match the lifting capacity of the jacking pinion,
and have a 1.15 service factor. Each motor shall be provided with a space heater for moisture control,
motor wires and brake coil.

Each jacking unit shall be equipped with an electromagnetic, double face, spring operated fail-safe
brake. The brake monitoring unit shall indicate the opening/closing action of the brake and the brake
pad wear condition; these indications shall be displayed at the CCC.

Limit switches are to be installed which are activated when the leg reaches its extreme upper or lower
position. The MCC include the relays and program to stop the leg jacking operation upon the said leg
reaching its limit position. The limit switches are to be supplied by Builder.

The limit switches for Leg Up extreme position shall be fixed so as to stop the leg before contact of
the spud can with the hull. The nesting of the spud can in the hull shall be done gently by overriding
the leg limit switch from the central console.

The jacking system motors, termination boxes and brakes shall be rated to IP56 or greater.

15.6 TRANSFORMERS

Transformers of the marine, dry, air-cooled type rated for 50 C shall be installed as follows:

Two (2) 2000 KVA, 690/480 volt, 3 phase, delta-delta connected transformers shall
be provided for power supply to the ship's service distribution buses "A" and "B".

One (1) 125 KVA 3 phase, 480/230 volt delta-delta connected transformers shall be
provided for power supply to the emergency 230 volt, 3 phase 3 wire switchboard.

Three (3) 22.5 KVA, 1 phase, 480/230 volt transformer to provide undistorted
sinusoidal voltage for clean supply distribution.

Two (2) 225 KVA, 3 phase, 480/230 volt delta-delta connected transformers shall be
provided to supply power to the ship's service normal 230 volt system.

Two (2) 24 pulse isolation transformers, 690/710 /710 volt 5000 KVA Class F
insulation, which supply power to the VFD drilling system via two (2) 12 pulse
rectifiers in parallel.

One (1) 10 KVA, 3 phase, 480/230 volt, delta-delta connected transformer (UPS)
shall be provided to supply undistorted sinusoidal voltage to the communication
systems power distribution panel and to the electronics systems power distribution
panel/radio panel.

Two (2)100 KVA, 3 phase, 480/220 volt transformers shall be provided for the future
installation of a heat tracing system. Allocate space for equipment only

All transformers shall have a local winding temperature display as well as to the DCS.

The final rating of all transformers shall be calculated through load balance calculation and load flow
diagrams.

15.7 DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM


15.7.1 General

The distribution of electric power shall be in general accordance with the Contract Plans and calculations
done for load balance, load flow, short circuit and selectivity studies.

15.7.2 AC Power-Distribution System

The main AC power systemfor the vessel shall be ungrounded 690 Volt (IT system), 3 phase, 60 Hz
supplied by six (6) main generators, all capable of parallel operation. The generators shall supply 690
VAC power for ship's service power, to the drilling transformers, two main step-down transformers and
to three jacking system feeders, two cranes and spares.

The secondary of each 690/480 Volt transformer shall be connected to a 480 volt distribution bus located
in the Switchgear/Engine Control room. The 480 volt distribution buses shall provide power and control
to the various 480 volt power equipment located on the Vessel.

Normal lighting, control, small motors, galley equipment, and motor heater power shall be supplied by
two (2) banks of transformers fed fromthe 480 volt main bus. Galley and laundry equipment may be
supplied fromeither 230 Volt or the 480 Volt distribution. Socket outlet, heating and lighting groups shall
be supplied through separate groups on the distribution boards and panels.

Additional distribution junction boxes shall be provided, by the builder, in the following locations:

Well Testing Area: One (1) 480V, 200A, 3PH
Near Mud Process Area: Two (2) 480V, 250A, 3PH
Cementing Unit Area: One (1) 480V, 160A, 3PH
One (1) 230V, 50A, 1PH
Around Main deck Area: One (1) 480V, 160A, 3PH

15.7.3 Receptacles

There shall be provided general purpose Schuko CEE 7/4 (Type F) grounded socket outlets fed from
the lighting and small power distribution board through a 10 mA GFI breaker as well as one (1) duplex
socket outlet per stateroom. Single socket outlets shall be installed near all lavatory mirrors in accordance
with Regulatory Body requirements.

In addition, socket outlets shall be installed for the following equipment:

* Adjustable Bracket Lamps
* Desk Lights
* Portable Bench Tools
* Portable Lights
* Television Sets and Radios (in recreation room)
* Office Machines
* All fixed, however removable equipment

230 Volt receptacles shall be distributed throughout the Vessel. In the accommodation passageways there
shall also be 230 Volt socket outlets, so as to permit the use of portable tools, including vacuum cleaners,
at any location without requiring more than 10 meter (30 ft.) of cable between the socket outlet and the
tool (location to be confirmed by the Owner). As a minimum there shall be two (2) outlets per room or
enclosed space, a minimum of two (2) outlets per desk, and a distance of no more than 20 meters in
outside areas, between two sockets outlets, which should be of a suitable CEE type.


A separate 230 Volt distribution system for harmonic sensitive equipment (computers, monitors,
instruments, etc.) will be fed from the clean undistorted distribution source (UPS or transformer). This
system shall be run to all computer locations, toolpushers office, company mans office, barge engineers
office, warehouse office, radio and control rooms, drill floor and mud loggers cabin and other defined
areas. All outlets shall be clearly marked and fitted with special computer service only plugs.

There shall be at least six (6) power socket outlets (480 Volt, 63 Amps) on the main deck, in addition to
that there shall be dedicated socket outlets in workshops for portable and fixed tools, 3rd party units etc.

15.8 CABLES

15.8.1 Selection of Cables

All electric cables and the installation thereof shall meet the requirements of the IEEE - 45, IEC 332-3
Category A and IEC 331 (where applicable), and the ABS Rules. The feeder cables are to be
calculated as per rules and regulations. All cables for installation in the accommodation shall be of a
low halogen, low smoke type. Conductor colors shall comply with IEC harmonized color coding and
marking of cables.

A cable specification shall be developed by the Builder. All cables shall be rated for 90 C conductor
temperature. All cables shall include an earth conductor.

Cables in the accommodation areas shall be of a low smoke and halogen free type. Cables installed on the
drill floor, cantilever, mud pit rooms and mud pump room shall be mud resistant to NEK 606 standards.

Communication and Instrument cables shall be shielded and screened (individual or overall and twisted as
required by the equipment or system manufacturer). Fiber optic cables shall have an orange outer jacket;
all cables for intrinsically safe circuits shall have a blue outer jacket over the whole length of the cable
and be run in separate cable trays.

VFD cables shall be 3 core +3G shielded with bronze armor.

All outside cables shall be non-metallic armored and approved for use in hazardous areas and
mechanically protected against crane handling and falling objects

Suitably armored cables are required if the cable enters a Zone 1 Area or the area within 15 meters of the
rotary table and any part of the derrick, unless separated by a solid boundary, or if the services supplied by
the cable are essential and required during or after a major or catastrophic failure.

15.8.2 Installation

Where cables pass through watertight decks, kick pipes or preferably multi cables transits (MCT) shall be
used. Each kick pipe shall consist of piece of steel pipe, threaded on the upper end, fitted with a female
terminal-tube with the lower end welded into the deck. Kick pipes shall be 30 cm (12") in height. The
use of potting compounds on multiple cable penetrations on water tight, gas tight, weather tight, or fume
tight (Class A) bulkheads is not acceptable even if such installations are Regulatory Body approved. The
MCT shall be filled only with the proper manufacturers supplied blocks and inserts, according to
Regulatory Standards. Composite materials may be used for cable trays and conduits wherever allowed
by the Regulatory Bodies and the Classification Society.

Cables shall be arranged so that external magnetic fields are reduced to a minimum especially for high
current cables when passing through cable entry plates in MCC panels with metal cable glands.

All cables exposed to radio frequency fields, and particularly those within spaces containing radio
equipment shall be metallically shielded throughout their entire length in the exposed areas. The
shielding armor (or braiding) shall be efficiently grounded at the equipment to which they connect.


All cables installed on cable trays and cable guides in the engine room, other technical rooms and in the
weather (on deck, cantilever and drill floor) shall be strapped every meter with a suitable stainless steel
strap. Cables in other areas may be strapped with UV resistant plastic cable fasteners and straps.

All cables from the emergency switchboard to all emergency consumers shall NOT be routed through
high fire and damage risk areas, including the main generator room, mud pit rooms, galley, etc. The
cabling for emergency consumers shall be of a fire-resistant (IEC 331) type where required by Regulatory
Bodies and, in general, shall be separated from other power cables as far as practical.

The builder shall submit the cable sizing philosophy, depending on bundling of cables and voltage drop
calculations for each power cable. For motors, voltage drop calculations shall be provided considering the
current inrush on motor starting.

15.8.3 Test after Installation

The Builder shall carry out voltage drop calculations and insulation tests on any circuits before
connecting.

15.9 A.C. MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS (MCCS)

The Builder shall submit a motor control matrix to the Owner for approval. Auto/manual,
Local/Remote in the field or on the MCC face, remote control and/or monitoring shall be as per Owner
requirements

In general, any switchgear for AC motors shall be mounted in MCC. The controllers shall be provided
with motor running lights, hour meter, ammeter, overload reset buttons and motor heater on/off switch
with indicating light (if motors are fitted with heaters).

Motor controllers having float, vacuum, pressure, etc., pilot operating devices shall have provisions for
hand off automatic (H/O/A) and continuous operating in the event of failure of these switches.

Motors equipped with space heaters (3 kW /5 HP) and larger) are to have their heaters automatically
energized when the motor is not running. A door mounted H/O/A switch shall make it possible to
defeat this feature.

All controllers shall have 230V AC control circuits. A control transformer within each controller shall
supply control power.

The controllers for motors 75 kW (100 HP) or larger connected to the 480 volt main or emergency bus
shall be of the reduced voltage or a solid state type soft starter.

The number and location of MCC shall be as shown on the Contract Plans.

15.10 A.C. MOTORS

Except for the drilling VFD motors, all motors to be IEC standards and frames, minimum IP 23 in the
accommodation, IP 44 in machinery spaces and IP 56 in outside areas (in open spaces).

Motors shall be designed for operation in ambient temperature as required by the Regulatory Bodies.
All motors shall be squirrel cage induction type rated for Class "F" insulation with 1.15 service factor
(S 1). All electric motors in the hazardous areas shall be ATEX certified and rated for the relevant gas
group type and have a minimum temperature rating of T3.

All AC motors shall be equipped with proper terminal strips and no bolted connections will be
acceptable.

All electric motors 1kW and above will be 3PH


15.11 CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS

Electrical connections shall be made using solder less copper pins or lugs on terminals provided in the
equipment or on Owner approved terminal strips, such as Weidmueller terminals, etc. These lugs or
pins may then be screwed to the appropriate terminal strip or board or terminated in motor termination
blocks inside the motor connection box.

15.12 HEATERS AND WINDOW WIPERS

There shall be an adequate amount of window wipers for the jacking control room, the radio room and
the drillers house. Each window wiper shall have a disconnect switch mounted adjacent to the
window or on a central control console. All window wiper systems shall be provided with a window
wash system as well.

There shall be an anti-condensation heater for the control room, drillers cabin, crane operating cabin
and other locations where windows may fog up in certain weather types.

There shall be space heaters for the jacking MCCs, outside motors larger than 3 kW, pump room
motors, independent starters not located in the electrical rooms and other spaces where electrical
equipment requires anti condensation heaters.

15.13 LIGHTING SYSTEM

15.13.1 General

All lighting equipment shall be designed for operation at 230 volts, 60 cycles, single-phase AC.

All fluorescent fixtures except in quarters shall be equipped with approved type high output ballast
designed to give hum-free operation and to reduce RF interference.

Lighting fixtures provided for the derrick and drill floor and all fixtures located above 4 meter from the
deck shall be fitted with stainless steel safety lanyards.

All outdoor lighting installations shall be SS316 stainless steel type.

15.13.2 Emergency Lighting System

The emergency lighting system shall be supplied with 230 volts, 3 phase power via the 480 volt/230 volt
3 phase, delta-delta transformer located in the emergency generator room.

All Emergency lighting fixtures shall have a red E attached to the lens or housing on strobes, indicating
the light is part of the emergency circuit and shall be installed in quantities in the appropriate locations
required by rules and regulations, and as specified herein. The emergency lighting equipment,
distribution systems and controls shall be as specified by the Owner and as required by Regulatory
Bodies.

The accommodation shall have low level escape lighting as per IMO resolution A.752 (18)

As a minimum, emergency lights shall be installed in the following locations:

1. Throughout the machinery spaces to permit the performance of essential
operations and observations to facilitate restoration of power.

2. Throughout the drilling unit adequately distributed to permit personnel to
readily find their way through passageways, up stairways, or by other
available means to open decks with all water tight doors closed.

3. In the galley, mess room, recreation room, and the hospital.


4. On the heliport.

5. At life raft launching stations.

6. At lifeboat stations

7. In the tool pusher's office

8. In the jacking control room and the engine control room (main electrical
room).

9 In the radio room

10. On the drill floor and in the BOP control and handling area

11. At the port and starboard cranes

12. Escape routes, including leg wells

13. In front of the switchboards, MCC and other important control panels, i.e.
engines, BOP control and main unit, etc.

15.13.3 Illumination Requirements

Ultimate illumination values shall be determined by applying a maintenance factor (ratio of maintained
lux in service to initial lux) of 70 % to initial values to allow for deterioration of lamps, reflectors,
enclosures and painted surfaces of the compartments. Lux levels obtained by applying the maintenance
factor may range higher than level specified.

Ultimate illumination shall be provided as follows unless higher values are required by ABS Rules:

Engine Room 300 lux

Switchboard Room 300 lux
Machinery Spaces 300 lux
Mud Pump Room 150 lux
Mud Pit Area 150 lux
Access Areas 150 lux
Emergency Generator Room 300 lux
Auxiliary machinery Room 150 lux
Electrician's Shop 325 lux
Machine Shop 325 lux

Access-Storage Areas

P-Tank Storage Area 150 lux
Bulk Mud Handling Area 150 lux
Sack Storage Area 150 lux
Heavy Tool Storage 150 lux
Passageways 150 lux

Living Spaces

Staterooms 150 lux
Mess room 300 lux
Recreation Room 300 lux

Toilet/Washroom/Change
Room/Shower/ 325 lux
Passages . Hallways 150 lux
Hospital 360 lux
Galley 540 lux
Offices 540 lux

Control Rooms

Radio Room 540 lux
J acking Control Room 325 lux
Drillers Control Cabin 325 lux

Miscellaneous

Stairways 150 lux
Drill floor 200 lux
Derrick 200 lux
Monkey board 200 lux
Shale shaker house 200 lux
Fire pump room 100 lux
Supply boat loading area 100 lux
Pipe rack 150 lux
Material handling 300 lux
Platforms under Drill Floor 200 lux
Parts, Storage and Issue Spaces 200 lux
J ack Case and Rack Chock Areas 200 lux
Moon Pool Area 100 lux
BOP Service Area 200 lux

Escape lighting, this may generally be 25 lux. As per IEC 61892-2, chapter 11.4

Regardless of detail illumination levels, the following detail lighting fixtures shall be installed:

(1) Fluorescent berth lights, 15 W maximum, shall be installed on all berths.

(2) One (1) lighting fixture and one (1) AC receptacle shall be installed on each
lavatory mirror; individual control shall be provided for each mirror light.

(3) A desk light shall be installed at all desks.

15.13.4 Floodlights

Floodlights are to be SON-T type except at the lifeboat, life raft and heliport, where the high output LED
lights, beam type shall be used. The lights near the lifeboats shall be battery backed.

15.14 UPSS, BATTERIES AND CHARGERS

15.14.1 General

UPS/Batteries for BOP control system, PA/GA, fire and gas detection system, drilling control system,
engine room control system, LAN, and other 3rd party systems except where otherwise specified, shall be
of nickel-cadmium, sealed and maintenance free type installed according to the Regulatory Bodies
requirements. The capacity of the UPS/Battery systems shall be in compliance with the Class and
Owners requirements. The harmonics of all UPS/Battery units, VFDs, etc. shall be within 3 % per unit
and 5 % of all units.

Battery charging shall be by means of silicon rectifiers of the convection type or PWM controlled. The
equipment shall be complete with transformers and other components required accomplishing high rate

charging and trickling charging of the batteries. Over current and surge protection shall be provided.
Charging rates shall be automatically controlled over both the high charging and the trickle charging
ranges. The high charging rate shall be controlled by an adjustable time and a battery voltage sensing
device.

The Builder shall provide a matrix indicating the required operation duration per battery for each safety
system and present that the Owner for approval.

Each charger shall be fully capable of charging its attached battery in not more than eight (8) hours.

The following equipment shall be included on each charger. Ammeter-high rate, ammeter-low rate,
output voltmeter, potential free charger failure contacts and controls as necessary.

15.14.2 General Alarm Battery System

There shall be two battery backup (or a UPS) of sufficient capacity for the equipment providing the
general alarm signal system which shall comply with the Regulatory Body requirements.

15.14.3 Radio Battery System

Radio Battery(s) and charger(s) for the radio communication equipment shall be supplied and installed by
the Builder.

15.14.4 Battery Lighting System (suitable for Zone II installation)

For temporary lighting during a total power system shutdown, an auxiliary lighting system of
a number of battery backed fluorescent lights shall be provided as deemed necessary by the
Owner and the Regulatory Bodies in safe evacuation of the Vessel. Each fitting shall have
two (2) fluorescent lamps or bright LED lights. The lamps shall be energized by an internal
Ni-CAD or Lithium Ion battery with a self-contained charger. Each lantern shall have a
disconnect, test switch, and normal power available indicator lamp.

The battery powered lights shall be located but not limited to the following areas:

Accommodation
J acking control room
engine control room
engine room
switchgear room
mud pump room
mud pit room
mud processing area
drill floor
training room
recreation rooms
mess room
galley (including storage areas).
sack storage room
workshops
helicopter waiting room
auxiliary machinery rooms
Muster stations
Outside walkways

Each lifeboat station shall be equipped with battery powered lights as approved by the Classification
Society.


All battery backed light fittings outside the accommodation Temporary Safe Refuge (TSR) shall be
suitable for Zone 2 area.

15.15 ELECTRICAL SHOP

The electrical shop shall be provided with the following:

1 Work bench, steel with wood top 32mm (1" thick), drawers, shelves, battens,
etc.

1 Tool board for storage of portable electrical instruments, installed over work
bench.

1 Swivel base vise with 125 mm (4") jaws with aluminum inserts.

1 Electrical test panel.

15.16 ELECTRICIAN'S TEST PANEL

Receptacles, rated 20 amperes, shall be mounted on the bulkhead above the work bench in the electric
workshop. Additional receptacles are to provide the following power supplies for testing purposes:

690 volt, 32Amps, 3 phase, 60 Hz
480 volt, 32Amps, 3 phase, 60 Hz
230 volt, 1 phase, 60 Hz
127 volt, 1 phase, 60 Hz
0 to 36 volt DC, 15Amps variable

Adjustable Auto Transformer with an input voltage of 127 volt or 230 volt, output 0-230 volts AC or
DC.
All circuits shall be complete with a volt and ammeter and a circuit breaker that can be operated
without opening the test panel.

Matching CEE 17 format plugs with 3 meter (10 ft.) long cords shall be provided.

15.17 RADIO COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT

All radio equipment of any type (including cable, antenna(s), remote displays, controls, switches, etc.),
shall be installed and tested. Hangers, wire ways, cable straps, etc., shall be provided as needed to
deliver a complete working installation of each communication system.

Radio Communication Equipment List

ITEM QTY DESCRIPTION
1 1
MF & HF (SSB) radio communicating system (250W) which cover the
requirements of GMDSS for Ocean Areas AI, A2, A3
2 5 Two way radio Telephone portable
3 8
VHF radiotelephone Including Cranes and Lifeboats. Lifeboats radios shall be
DSC GMDSS capable.
4 5
Radar Transponder for use in Search and Rescue Operations (SART);
Complies with GMDSS, IMO/SOLAS.
5 1 EPIRB for GMDSS 406.0 MHz
6 6
Standard Communications brand handheld Marine VHF-FM, Rated
Intrinsically Safe.

7 6
Standard Communications brand handheld Marine radio, UHF-FM,
Intrinsically Safe, 8 channel capacity with 4 most used channels pre
programmed
8 1 Inmarsat-F Ship Earth Station
9 1 Non-Directional Aircraft Beacon
10 1
Navtex Receiver / Printer for dedicated reception at 518 KHz; SOLAS,
IMO,GMDSS with kit to include Active Antenna
11 1 GPS, eight outputs
12 1 Aircraft Base Radio Panel Mount Transceiver, VHF-AM, 25 Watts output
13 2 Aero VHF talkback
14 1 Clock with three hands, silence times, battery powered.
15 1 MF&HF (SSB), 250W for Back-up, installed in communal drilling office.
16 1 Inmarsat - C (EGC receiver)
17 1 SSAS Inmarsat terminal

The main radio station facilities shall meet as a minimum the GMDSS regulatory requirements.
One (1) Satellite Communications system with voice, data, fax and telex capability is part of that
installation.
In addition, the unit shall be equipped with radio beacons, four (4) sets of portable VHF lifeboat radios
and radio beacons, etc. in accordance with regulations.

15.18 WEATHER INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM

A weather instrumentation system shall be installed consisting of weather and environmental
instrumentation with sensors, visual displays (wind velocity and direction, dry and wet bulb
temperatures, relative humidity, atmospheric pressure, cloud base measurement, visibility, etc.) and a
wave height recorder.

The weather system shall be installed in the radio room and have displays in the jacking control room
and on the engine control room panel.

15.19 ALARM SYSTEMS

15.19.1 Ventilation Failure Alarm

The loss of ventilation air to enclose hazardous areas and electrical equipment rendered non-explosion
proof through loss of air pressurization is to be suitably alarmed in the DCS

15.19.2 Local Engine Alarm Panel

Each main diesel engine shall be provided with a local alarm and indication panel as well as an alarm and
indication page on the DCS (display), having the following alarms and shutdowns:

High cooling water temperature, alarm and shutdown (only on manufacturers set
points)
Over speed, shutdown
low oil level, alarm and shutdown (only on manufacturers set points)
low oil pressure, alarm and shutdown (only on manufacturers set points)
crankcase overpressure, shutdown
high oil temperature, alarm and shutdown (only on manufacturers set points)
low oil temperature, alarm
generator bearing temperature with digital readout


Collective alarm signals shall be fed to the drill floor miscellaneous alarm panel.

15.23.3 Fire Alarm System

See section 7 for a description of this system.

15.23.4 Gas detection and alarm system (Hydrocarbon and H
2
S)

See section 7 for a description of this system.

15.23.5 Sprinkler Alarm System

A sprinkler alarm system shall be provided in accordance with Regulatory Body requirements when such
a system is installed.

15.23.6 Other Alarm Systems

In addition, the vessel shall have all alarms required by the Regulatory Bodies, and other alarms
belonging to specific pieces of equipment. The miscellaneous alarm panel shall be installed in the DCS
and the remote collective slave alarm panel is to be located in the drillers cabin and the jacking control
room.

15.20 EMERGENCY SHUT DOWN (ESD) AND "STOP" STATIONS

The ESD philosophy shall comprise the functional requirements of the safety systems upon detection
of an abnormal situation, the fail safe functionality for the safety systems shall be included.

The philosophy shall indicate actions to:

Limit the duration and severity of the incident
Protect personnel exposed to the incident
Limit environmental impact
Facilitate escape, muster and evacuation as necessary

Interaction between the following systems shall be addressed during the HAZOP meetings between the
Builder and the Owners safety team: ESD, Fire and gas detection system, drilling process and well
control system, alarm and communication systems, active firefighting systems, ventilation systems and
energy sources that drive the emergency functions.

The ESD system comprises:

Manual input devices (pushbuttons) to be located in strategic locations, radio room, helideck,
drill floor, near the lifeboats, tool pushers office and engine control room.

Interfaces towards other systems:

Fire and gas detection system, usually one single integrated system
Alarm and communication system, PA/GA, drillers intercom, radio station
Drilling shutdown system and procedures
Well control systems
Firefighting systems
Ventilation systems

A central control unit (ESD shutdown control panel) receiving and evaluating signals from the
input devices and other systems, creating output signals to devices that shall be shut down or
activated.

The ESD system will provide visual indication of initiated inputs and activated outputs and
local audible and visual alarms, output actuators, relays, valves, dampers, as well as status
indicators

Signal transfer lines between the ESD central and all input devices, interfaced systems and
output actuators.

The ESD system shall be supplied normally from the main power supply (as well as the
emergency power supply) and a monitored UPS and battery backed up power supply, capable
of supplying power for at least 30 minutes on loss of main power.

The ESD control unit shall be installed in a non-hazardous, continually manned control room.

Stop stations shall be provided at the deck discharge stations for the fuel oil and dirty oil transfer and
bilge oily water separator pumps.

Emergency "STOP" stations two (2) shall be provided outside the machinery spaces to stop motors
driving the fuel oil pumps, the machinery space ventilation fans, and the mud pump, mud pit room
ventilation fans.

15.21 INTERIOR COMMUNICATIONS

15.21.1 General

Public Address (PA/GA) and telephone (PABX) Systems:

15.21.2 PA/GA system

Two free standing PA/GA (2 x 1500 Watt, A +B system) system housed in 19" industrial cubicle,
front and top access only, allowing good access to all out going cables and terminals without the need
to withdraw any of the amplifier or exchange racks. Each 19 rack shall be installed in a different
space and one of the units shall be explosion proof, possibly by means of overpressure with a back-up
air vessel.

Each PA/GA unit will have a UPS with DC Battery backup package.

The PA/GA system shall be equipped for the following access inputs:

2 Microphone inputs.
2 PABX inputs.
Alarm inputs

Microphones shall be located in the toolpushers office, jacking control room and in the radio room;
there shall be a priority speech set up, Builder to supply the matrix, Owner to approve.

Zone selection shall be three (3)
in total

Zone 1 - All areas, except sleeping and resting areas
Zone 2 - Accommodation
Zone 3 - All Call

Alarm selection shall be four (4) in total

Alarm 1 Fire/ Combustible Gas
Alarm 2 - H
2
S Gas
Alarm 3 General Muster
Alarm 4 Abandon Vessel


The audible alarms shall be generated through the PA/GA system which shall be activated by the fire
and gas detection system for fire and gas alarms and by the ESD system for abandon vessel. Visual
alarms shall also be fitted in all high noise areas which will also be activated via the PA/GA, fire and
gas detection system or the ESD system.

There shall be ample telephone sets in all areas of the drilling unit, those in noisy areas, shall be
equipped with a sound deadening booth and flashing lights. All telephones, speaker, cables and
associated equipment outside the accommodation shall be suitable of Zone I installation.

15.21.3 PABX system

The telephone exchange PABX system housed in 19" industrial cubicle, front and top access only,
allowing good access to all out going cables and terminals shall be equipped for up to 140 extensions
(plus 10 % spare) and the following levels of land line access pre-programmed:

One (1) level for Inmarsat (V-SAT) access
One (1) level for platform access
One (1) level for radio access

Associated with the interconnection from the PABX to the PA/GA system, there shall be digital storage
and forwarding devices. These devices will store the audio announcement from the PABX. On the
hanging up of the telephone extension or after a pre-set time with off-hook signal the digital storage
and forwarding devices will pre-chime the audio amplifiers and broadcast the announcement over the
selected zone.

Outgoing terminals from telephone are to be labeled with the telephone extension number.

The PABX system shall operate from the following supplies

1. AC Normal Supply - 230 V, 60 Hz
2. AC Emergency Supply - 230 V, 60 Hz
3. UPS with Battery Back Up - 24 VDC or UPS

On loss of 1, 2 will seamlessly take up the load. On loss of 1 and 2, 3 will seamlessly take up the load,
with the option to manually change over and bypass function.

An integral alarm system will monitor the PA/GA and PABX system for failure of exchange,
amplifiers, extensions and power supplies. A potential free contact shall be provided for remote alarms
of major failures, this shall be monitored by the DCS.

15.21.4 Hospital Call System

A hospital call bell system shall be provided with annunciators in the radio room or in main control room,
a push-button at each hospital berth, a rotating beacon outside hospital, a bell in the medics stateroom
and connections for a miscellaneous alarm panel.

There shall be a provision for a tie-in between hospital telephone and radio room V-SAT system for direct
communication between medic and shore base doctor.

15.21.5 Drilling Communication System

A hands free communication system with the talk back facility shall be installed serving the following
areas:

drillers cabin (2)
mud pump room
BOP Area (2), (strip tank +CTP area)

monkey board
cement unit
upper mud process room
mud pump room
Drill Floor

15.21.6 Sound Powered Telephone System

The system shall include the following stations:

Station Special Features

J acking Control Room 25 ft. of coiled handset cord,
explosion proof unit

Engine Control Room Auxiliary 24VDC horn, flashing red
light in Engine Room

Emergency Generator Room Sound deadening hood, high volume
ringer and auxiliary 24VDC horn

Drill Floor Explosion proof unit

Lifeboats Explosion proof unit

Tool Pushers Office

15.22 ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM

15.22.1 Television System

A satellite television system with a minimum of six (6) free to air decoders and a distribution system
shall be provided consisting of four (4) Owner approved 42" diagonal LCD/LED or Plasma color stereo
television stereo sets (HD ready). The televisions shall be capable of multiple format (i.e. NTSC, PAL,
etc.).

One (1) double 19 rack entertainment cabinet shall be supplied and installed by Builder for future
owner installation satellite TVs parts (receivers, decoders, etc).

Four (4) of which two (2) HD ready DVD/Blue ray/VCR players with multiple format (NTSC, PAL, etc.)
capability shall be provided.

The television sets shall be connected to a television distribution amplifier mounted in the radio room.
Game consoles shall be provided as part of the entertainment system.

The television distribution amplifier shall be connected the satellite distribution system, to be provided by
the Builder.

TV distribution outlets shall be installed in each cabin, offices, gym and hospital.

15.22.2 Entertainment Radio System


The entertainment radio system shall consist of two radio receivers/CD players having AM band coverage
of 540 KC to MC, at least 5 SW bands 13-80 m, and FM frequency band coverage. The radio receivers
shall be separately mounted.

15.23 NAVIGATION AND SIGNAL LIGHTS

15.23.1 Running Lights

Port, starboard, and stern lights shall be two compartment type with a (bright LED) lamp in each
compartment as per the rules and regulations.

15.23.2 Anchor Lights

Bow and stern anchor lights shall be single compartment type with single filament lamps (or bright LED)
as per rules and regulations.

15.23.3 Signal Lights

An array of fixed lights on the mast powered from and switched at the running light panel in the jacking
control office each consisting of a single filament lamp (or bright LED) in a Fresnel lens fixture of the
proper color shall permit signals to be displayed.

15.23.4 Aircraft Warning Lights

A flashing or steady red light shall be provided at the highest point of the derrick. Aircraft warning lights
for derrick legs shall be provided. Self-contained aircraft warning lights on top of each leg complete with
lights, batteries, solar powered charger, photocells, etc. shall be provided.

A red aircraft warning light shall be installed on each crane boom tip and A frames.

15.23.5 Helicopter Lights and Illuminated Wind Sock

Outline lights for the perimeter of the helicopter platform shall be provided in accordance with the
Regulatory Body requirements. The helideck and approach lights shall be in accordance with CAP 437
requirements for spacing and color. Floodlights shall be used for striking lights on the landing area; these
shall not blind the view of the pilot when landing.

An illuminated wind sock on a hinged mast (for re-lamping) shall be provided and installed clear of the
landing area but visible to pilot on his final approach.

An illuminated wind sock shall be provided on aft crane to indicate wind direction to drill crew during gas
release.

15.23.6 Obstruction Lights and Fog Horn

A flashing light system and fog signal horn shall be installed.

The light system shall consist of three (3) 15 mile, three (3) 10 mile and one (1) 5 mile marine signal
lanterns, one near each jack house. The 15 mile lights solid state contacts to flash synchronous and be
selectable for U code or Flash with automatic changeover to 10 mile lights on failure of the 15 mile
system with alarm in radio room. The 5 mile lights complete with automatic lamp changer. The 5 mile
lights are to work in synchronous with the 15 and 10 mile lights or can be run as an independent system
and should have alarm in radio room when the last light fails. Light locations are as follows:

One (1) 10 mile and one (1) 15 mile light on each aft leg tower.
One (1) 10 mile and one (1) 15 mile light at outer perimeter of helideck

One(1) 5 mile light at aft end of cantilever

The UPS and battery system shall be connected to the emergency switchboard and be capable of
supplying the complete power for the navigational aid system and simultaneously maintain the standby
batteries in a fully charged condition.

The UPS and battery system shall be connected to emergency switchboard and consist of one UPS/
storage battery bank of sufficient capacity to operate the fog signal four days with charger off and to
operate the obstruction lights for the duration required by the regulatory bodies with the charger off.

15.24 MISCELLANEOUS NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT

The following navigation equipment shall be provided:

1 Fog bell, 20" diameter
1 Fog horn, mechanical, hand-operated
1 Inclinometer
1 Barograph
1 Temperature recorder
1 Battery-operated bull horn
1 Aldis signaling lamp with rechargeable battery and red and green filters

15.25 VESSEL MANGEMENT SYSTEM (VMS)

A central DCS (Distributed Control System) shall be provided which shall monitor and control a variety
of rig functions on a PC and PLC based system. The critical components of the systemshall be fully dual
redundant. Failure of any critical component shall result in seamless fail-over to the backup system with
appropriate alarmmessages displayed on the systemHMIs which normally located in the manned
engine control space, the jacking control room and an alternative space to be indicated by the Owner.
All machinery alarms (both audible & visual) to be repeated at the equipment location as required by
class and agreed on with Owner. I/O provisions to include a minimum of 10 % spare capacity for each
type of I/O. The Builder shall provide additional back-up software, tools, etc. as may be required to
provide total redundancy for these systems.

The base system shall provide full integration for the systems listed below and shall replace the discrete
control panels normally associated with these systems. The systems to be fully integrated within the DCS
shall include but not be limited to:
Fire Detection System
Gas Detection System
Watertight door monitoring system
Bulk Handling system
Drilling Instrumentation system
Mud Instrumentation system
Environmental monitoring system
All fixed firefighting systems
Water mist system
HVAC shutdown system
Emergency shutdown system
Fire and deluge pump control systems
Preload system
Tank Gauging System
Bilge alarmsystem
Air compressor sequence control
Miscellaneous alarmsystem, etc.


The systemshall be powered by an UPS capable of maintaining power for a minimumof six (6) hours
continuous operation of the system.

The base shall be fully capable and expandable to a fully integrated control network through the addition
of local area network (LAN) servers and an associated disc storage subsystem.

All Backup software should be done and store in one laptop equipped for industrial use as SIMATIC
Field PG M3 or equivalent. This Laptop with preinstalled engineering software (licensed) is the ideal
industrial notebookoptimized for the configuration, commissioning, servicing and maintenance of
automation system.

15.26 LAN SYSTEM

One set LAN system should be provided which shall consist of a server located in the network roomand
terminal points distributed at the office, meeting roomand cabins. One (1) 19 rack shall be supplied and

15.27 ECHO SOUNDER

A builder supplied Echo Sounder shall be installed, with a bottom mounted (easily accessible for
maintenance and troubleshooting) sonar and associated equipment in the jacking control room, to
survey water depth and debris at the intended drilling location.

15.28 CCTV SYSTEM

Two (2) CCTV systems to be provided. One for the Driller and the other for Des system (composite cable
for the system to be supplied by the CCTV vendor). Monitor to be located at radio roomand Drillers
Cabin. Cameras (not less than 20) to be arranged at the engine room(1), helideck (1), main deck (2), mud
pit room(l), helicopter waiting room(1), BOP area, Drill Floor, Cantilever, etc.

15.29 SHIP SECURITY ALERT SYSTEM

One (10 set Ship Security Alert System should be provided.

15.30 HEAT TRACING SYSTEM (FUTURE)

The fire main and other essential piping systems shall have freeze protection installed.
Generally, freeze protection in these systems shall be accomplished by using electric trace heating tape
and insulation. In areas where piping runs through hazardous areas, the trace heater shall be of the
explosion proof type. An alarmfacility is to be built into the trace heating panel to indicate tripped
breakers or loss of power. This facility is to be connected to DCS.

Other piping systems subject to freezing or freeze damage shall be insulated and heat traced as may be
required by the Regulatory Bodies or the Owner. During the detail design phase consideration is to be given
to the future installation of the heat tracing systemwith regards to the installation of control panels, cables,
junction boxes, etc.


TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 16.0 - TESTS AND TRIALS ....................................................................................................................... 2
16.1 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................... 2
16.2 INCLINATION TEST ................................................................................................................... 2
16.3 MECHANICAL COMPLETION TESTS ...................................................................................... 2
16.4 SYSTEM TESTS ........................................................................................................................... 5
16.5 VIBRATION TESTS ..................................................................................................................... 5
16.6 DOCK ENDURANCE TRIAL ...................................................................................................... 5
16.7 ACCEPTANCE TRIALS ............................................................................................................... 5
16.8 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS ....................................................................................... 6
16.9 OTHER TESTS .............................................................................................................................. 6
16.10 RACK CHOCKS............................................................................................................................ 7
16.11 CANTILEVER TEST .................................................................................................................... 7
16.12 DRILLING SYSTEM TRIAL........................................................................................................ 7
16.13 DERRICK AND CANTILEVER BEAMS LOAD TEST ............................................................ 8

SECTION 16.0 - TESTS AND TRIALS

16.1 GENERAL

All FAT tests, Vessel installation tests, dock trials, and acceptance trials shall be scheduled and completed
to the satisfaction of the Owner and shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Regulatory Bodies,
the equipment manufacturers, and these Specifications. The Builder shall prepare a trial procedure
including all items covered by the above referenced test codes and submit it to the Classification Society
and Owner for approval at least six weeks prior to the trials.

All tests shall be scheduled by the Builder and notification of such testing shall be given to the Owner's
Representatives no less than one full working day prior to commencing with the test. The Builder shall
have all relevant documentation onboard the Vessel or at the testing site at the time of the test.

Where the trials require more than twenty-four (24) hours continuous testing, a recuperation period of six
hours shall be provided at the end of each eighteen hours period or at an acceptable stopping point wherein
all testing will be suspended.

All expenses or costs for the tests and trials shall be borne by the Builder. Builder shall limit the use of
vessel equipment and provide proper maintenance as per manufacturer recommendations to the equipment.
Cranes shall be inspected by a 3
rd
party company before delivery of the rig, at Builders cost, to verify the
condition. Consumables e.g. oil, filters, wires, sheaves, etc. will be replaced at Builders cost prior to
delivery as per 3
rd
party inspection report. Sea water pumps shall not be used at shipyard site, except during
commissioning and sea trials.

16.2 INCLINATION TEST

An inclination test shall be performed in accordance with the Regulatory Bodies and / or Classification
Society, as required. The Builder shall prepare the inclination test schedule and procedure shall consist of
moving the cantilever and drill floor (the weights of these entities shall be known and be confirmed in the
test) and submit the schedule to the Classification Society for approval. The results of the stability test
establishing the vessel's lightweight and center of gravity together with the calculations of trim and stability
adequately covering the full range of operating and transit loading conditions shall be documented in the
marine operating manual. The inclination test shall be conducted after all equipment has been
commissioned and all mechanical completions and punch lists have been cleared to the satisfaction of the
Owner as well as the Classification Society.

Tank liquids and contents at the time of the test shall be held to an absolute minimum and fuel oil shall be
restricted to the day tanks.

Based on the results of the stability test, the Builder shall prepare a stability booklet which sets forth the
stability data necessary to permit safe and efficient handling of the vessel. The booklet shall include an
indication of any operating conditions that must be maintained to assure that the Vessel will safely
withstand damage under the standard of subdivision required by these Specifications. These instructions
shall be as clear and concise as practicable and shall be approved by the Classification Society and the
Owner.

16.3 MECHANICAL COMPLETION TESTS

Definitions


Mechanical Completion means that all physical work on all components of the equipment, unit and/or area
has been completed.

A mechanical completion activity means a written recorded systematic checking and verification that the
work is completed satisfactory according to the requirements laid down by the Owner, Builder, Authorities,
Classification Society and the equipment manufacturer.

Commissioning means formal testing and verification of all functions of equipment, unit and system as it is
intended to function and operated stand alone and/or integrated to all other systems interfacing the
equipment, unit or system.

A commissioning activity means a written recorded systematic checking and verification of all functions
and operation demands, one by one and in combination, laid down by the Owner, Builder, Authorities,
Classification Society and the equipment/system manufacturer.

The equipment or system commissioning, checks and verifications procedures shall be developed by the
Builder with the assistance of the Owner and OEM and the final approval of the Owner and Class shall
include but may not be limited to the following:

1. Equipment installation check/verification list.
2. Documentation/Certification review.
3. Pre-commissioning tests.
4. Commissioning tests.
5. Acceptance tests.

General requirements

All equipment, units, areas and systems on board the Drilling Vessel shall be included in Mechanical
Completion Test and Commissioning activities. A preliminary Mechanical Completion Test and part
Commissioning shall be performed at equipment manufacturer fabrication site (Fabrication Acceptance
Tests, FAT) as well as after the installation onboard, when the full function of the equipment shall be
verified. All equipment shall be checked to the best possible extent at the manufacturers site prior to
delivery. This checking does not relieve the requirements for rechecking and extended checks and tests
after the installation on board.

The Builder shall have the responsibility to establish a system for unique identification of equipment,
instruments, valves, pipes, cables, etc., to be able to establish a systematic system for planning, verification,
check list, punch list and follow up of all Mechanical Completion Test and Commissioning activities. This
shall include both manufacturers equipment and systems and the Builder furnished equipment and
systems.

This system shall utilize an electronic database as a tool for the systematic identification, planning, status
recording and punch lists. The system shall be described and presented to the Owner prior to contract
signing.

Planning of the Mechanical Completion Test and Commissioning activities and preparation of check lists
and other preparing activities shall have an early start by the Builder within the project. Preliminary
schedules, activity identification and examples of check lists shall be presented to Owner within two
months after contract signing. The Builder shall be responsible for identifying and coordinating all
interfaces between equipment and system as a basis for the commissioning activities.

Complete plans, activities and detailed procedures divided by area, equipment and/or system shall be sent
to Owner for approval not later than two months prior to Mechanical Completion Test and Commissioning
activity starts. The Owner shall have the right to be present during the activities, and shall have reading
access to the Mechanical Completion Test and Commissioning database.


The status during the Mechanical Completion Test and Commissioning activities on site shall be
continuously updated in the database and shall be reported to the Owner once a week.

All punch items from Mechanical Completion Test and Commissioning activities shall be corrected by the
Builder prior to the delivery. The Builder shall, after having consulted with the equipment and system
supplier, inform the Owner of any countermeasures and corrective actions required to equipment and
system as a result of the Mechanical Completion Test and Commissioning activities.

All shop and installation tests shall be conducted in accordance with the best shipbuilding practice and to
the requirements of the Regulatory Bodies. The Society of Naval Architects and Marine Engineers
Technical and Research Bulletin No. 308, Code on Installation and Shop Tests, shall be used as a general
guide in determining the equipment to be tested and the scope of the tests. Detailed reports on shop and
installation tests shall be required. The Owner shall be notified, in writing, at least 10 days prior to any
shop or installation trial of any machinery or equipment items. Under no circumstances shall electrical
equipment intended for operation on 60 Hz power be tried, operated or tested on 50 Hz power and vice
versa.

Preparations

In addition to establishing the Mechanical Completion Test and Commissioning system database and other
administrative preparations as described above, the Builder shall have the responsibility to define and
obtain all temporary and testing equipment, and other utilities such as power, load bank, oil, air/nitrogen,
measuring instruments, reference system, etc., to execute all the Mechanical Completion Test and
Commissioning activities. In addition to all preparations thorough dropped objects verification shall be
carried out, especially in areas where loose items may be a falling hazard, such as on cable trays in the
upper part of the technical and other rooms, construction debris left in beams of the derrick. A check also
needs to be made for welding rods, pieces of metal, grinding material, rags, etc. left in piping, cleanliness
of switchboard cabinets, cleanliness under the floor plates in engine rooms, electrical rooms, etc.

Calibration and acceptance criteria

The Builder shall be responsible for calibration of all instruments, including test instruments, and sensors
output prior to the testing. Acceptance criteria for the instrument accuracy and for the test results shall be
suggested by the yard, after having consulted with the requirements established by Authorities, equipment
manufacturer and the Classification Society, and shall be agreed upon by the Owner prior to all
commissioning activities.

Special tests

The following tests shall be especially highlighted and shall be performed as a part of the commissioning
program within the Scope of Works:

All Class requirements to be performed by the Builder near their facility.

Power generation test;
Primary test of protection devices;
Derrick load test

The following equipment and ventilation tests

Drill string rotation including hoisting and lowering, pipe handling, mud circulation with
fluids (e.g. water);
Smoke test (for verification of suitable location of ventilation inlet/outlet and pressurized
areas)

Documentation


The file of all Mechanical Completion Test and Commissioning including FAT activities, punch lists and
test results, shall be available to the Owner on agreed format after completing the Works.

All drawings and documents, including manufacturers drawings and documents, shall be updated by the
Builder to include all modifications and/or corrections made as a result of the FAT and Mechanical
Completion Test and Commissioning activities

16.4 SYSTEM TESTS

All piping, ventilation, electrical, etc., systems shall be tested to prove operational readiness and
achievement of performance requirements to the satisfaction of the Owner and the Classification Society.
All drilling systems and an endurance test shall be carried out as per pre-agreed commissioning schedule
and procedures to demonstrate the functionality of the vessel as a drilling unit.

16.5 VIBRATION TESTS

A vibration test shall be conducted during trials to determine the "base line" of performance of all
machinery components. All major equipment shall be tested and measured both with the Vessel afloat and
in the elevated condition except that drilling equipment need not be tested in the afloat condition. These
tests shall be run when the machinery components are operating at simulated rated capacity and design
conditions as far as practical. Additional readings may be requested at various speeds of equipment that is
not constant speed equipment, i.e. equipment powered by internal combustion engines, DC motors, or
multiple speed AC motors.

16.6 DOCK ENDURANCE TRIAL

Prior to acceptance trials the entire Vessel's powered systems, drilling equipment and controls shall be
operated at the dock for at least 24 (twenty four) continuous hours. During this trial the loading of the
power system shall be produced by operating various pieces of the Vessel's equipment to maintain as close
to full load as possible. All equipment tests shall be done at 100 % load and 110 % load for the piece of
equipment or system involved, when this is required by the applicable rules and standards. An effort shall
be made to operate all of the vessel's equipment and the industrial equipment to maintain these loading
requirements. All safety features shall be carefully checked and functionally demonstrated to the
Classification Society. The detail of the test procedure is to be discussed with and approved by the Owner.

16.7 ACCEPTANCE TRIALS

When the Vessel is substantially complete and after satisfactory Dock Trials, the Builder shall conduct an
Acceptance Trial in accordance with an approved trial agenda.

While the Vessel is ballasted to its preload jacking allowable elevated weight, , it shall be jacked to clear
the hull from the water surface.

After the preload jacking trial, the Vessel shall be ballasted to a maximum preload as defined in the
operating booklet and then de-ballasted to the normal jacking loads. The time to jack the unit up, preload,
de-ballast, and then jack the unit into a transit mode shall be recorded.

While the Vessel is in the elevated position, all equipment or machinery shall be operated to show that it is
in proper working condition. Readings of vibrations, noise, temperature, current, voltage, and etc., shall be
recorded during all such tests.


The alignment of all rotating equipment shall be read both with the Vessel afloat in the transit condition
and in the elevated condition.

When the vessel is substantially complete, the Vessel shall be jacked up to the top of the legs and back
down. The amount of ballast onboard during this trial should be the minimum required for chord balance,
firewater, and engine cooling.

All jacking operations shall be supervised by a qualified jackmaster retained by the shipyard specifically
for this purpose.

16.8 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

After completion of Acceptance Trials the Builder shall be required to open up, correct, close up and re-test
as mutually agreed, any item judged faulty by the Owner or Classification Society. If it is necessary to
install the final sections of leg at a location other than the Builder's facility and after the Acceptance Trials,
the unit at its maximum deck load will be jacked to the maximum permissible height above the water, as
determined by the Owner's Underwriters, to prove the satisfactory installation of the final leg sections.
After this, all welds will be checked while jacking the unit down and any suspect welds non-destructively
tested. All defects shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Owner and Classification Society at the
Builder's expense.

The following tests shall be especially highlighted and shall be performed as part of the commissioning
program of the drilling unit within the Scope of Work. The Builder will carry out these tests with presence
of the equipment manufacturers representatives:
Power generation / Distribution / Management tests
Deluge / Fire water coverage, Foam test
Life boat davit test
Smoke test (for verification of suitable locations of ventilation intakes and outlets and pressurized areas)
All tests required by the Classification Society
Provision refrigeration plant test
Test of cantilever skidding system to maximum reach at maximum allowable skidding load and without
obstructions in the skidding envelope
Test of the Drill Floor skidding system to maximum transverse offsets
Working test for all auxiliary machinery
Working test for all electrical systems
Load test of all lifting appliances, cranes, hoists, davits, pad eyes, etc. All equipment shall be marked with
SWL and register number.
Working test of all automation systems
Working test of all software programs
Noise and vibration survey
Fire and gas detection tests
PA/GA system test
ESD system test

16.9 OTHER TESTS

All tests called for in other Sections of these Specifications (example: noise level, vibration, and
illumination) shall be accomplished at a time that will permit corrective action to be completed prior to
delivery of the Vessel. Official noise and vibration tests will be done by Owner on the first drilling
location. Such tests are to be attended and witnessed by Builder's representative(s), at Builder's expense.

All lifting devices and lifting attachments shall be independently proof load tested and certified by the
Classification Society in accordance with the Regulatory Body requirements.



16.10 RACK CHOCKS

Complete operational tests of the Friede and Goldman rack chock system and equipment shall be carried
out prior to delivery of the vessel. These operational tests shall consist of engaging the rack chocks with
the leg chord rack and tightening of horizontal and vertical screw support jacks, to the Designer specified
load. The rig weight shall then be transferred to the rack chock system from the elevating system pinions.
The rig weight shall then be transferred back to the elevating system, and the screw jacks must then be fully
retracted to the stowed position and the chocks disengaged and secured in accordance with instruction
book.

The rack chock system provides the rig support mechanism during storm, drilling and towing of vessel.
Close observance to the testing and operation of this equipment is necessary in order for it to serve its
purpose on the rig. Owners representative and Classification Society representative shall witness these
tests.

This operational test on the rack chock shall consist of, but not be limited to, the below listed items.

Table 16.1-Rack Chock System Test
NO. ITEM QTY. TEST
1 Chocks 18 Witness the release of all rack chock and transfer
of load onto the jacking pinions.
2 Chocks 18 Full horizontal and vertical travel. Fit of chock
teeth to rack teeth. Fit of chock securing
turnbuckle and lifting eyes.
3 Vertical Support J acks 36 Travel full in and out. J ack securing devices.
4 Horizontal Support J acks 36 Travel full in and out. J ack securing devices.
5 Positioning Cylinder 18 Installation to chock and structure. Piston travel.
Interference with support jacks in up position.
6 Hydraulic Power Unit 3 Pressure settings are correct. Satisfactory lifting,
positioning, and lowering of chocks. Check piping
and unit for leaks.
7 J ack Drives 36 Operate each jack with hydraulic operators from
control manifold.

16.11 CANTILEVER TEST

The builder shall compile a trial item of the cantilever beam moving function and the load function based
on the technical materials that provided by the designer, and submit to the Classification Society and the
Owner for approval. The Owner, the surveyor and the designer should attend to the trial, and the data on all
trials are to be recorded by the Builder. All trial procedures and approved trial data shall be compiled by the
builder and delivered to the Owner.

16.12 DRILLING SYSTEM TRIAL

The Builder shall ensure that the supplier compiles the procedures for single equipment and system testing,
and delivers to the Classification Society and the Owner for approval. Based on the approvals, the Builder
with the supplier shall, perform the trial and record the detail of the trial and compile the data to deliver to
the Owner for approval.


16.13 DERRICK AND CANTILEVER BEAMS LOAD TEST

The cantilever beams load test is to pretension the lifting gear (including the derrick) and supports by
applying a known load so that the cantilever will be subjected to a known loading moment and deflection.
The test shall be carried out in the presence of Class representative in accordance with Class and Owner
approved test procedure.

The load test shall be carried out for the center of the rotary 22.86m (75ft) aft of the transom and 4.57m (15
ft.) of the Vessel CL with the maximum allowable design load as per the load chart on the cantilever at the
center of the rotary. Builder should consider using a barge or an alternative load as the load test weight. The
deflection readings are to be recorded by transit and marks on both port and starboard cantilever beams for
the following conditions:
Substructure at centerline, without load.
Substructure at 15ft. off centerline to port, without and with load, and after it is released
Substructure at 15 ft. off centerline to starboard, without and with load, and after it is released.
Substructure at centerline, without load, after load test is complete.

Prior to conducting the load test, the Builder shall ensure the Vessel's power systems, electrical distribution
system, jacking system, skidding systems, ballasting system and racking system are all operable. In
particular, the drawworks and derrick and its rigging must be ready for the load test. The load test should be
performed after the cantilever beams and drill floor assemblies are weighed as described in these
Specifications. Weights in addition to the cantilever beams and drill floor lightship weights should be
recorded (e.g., contents of tanks). Checks should be made to ensure there are no obstructions to skidding
both the cantilever beams and drill floor. The procedure for the load test shall be fully developed by the
Builder and incorporate all Class and/or Owner comments prior to commencing the load test. The
following principal elements should be included:
Deflections of the cantilever beams should be measured at five (5) points along the beam.
Deflections should be measured before loads are applied, during the application of the load, and
after the load has been released.
The drawworks and a set of slings shall be used to lift the test weight. Recordings of the loaded
structure should be made only after the drawworks brake has been set and the load is in a static mode.

Builder shall record all data and prepare a summary of the test results for submittal to ABS and to the
Owner.
FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #7811 REV. 0
TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 17.0 - DRILLING SYSTEMS
17.1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................... 2
17.2 DRILLING EQUIPMENT AND PIPE HANDLING SYSTEMS ................................................... 2
17.3 DRILLING FLUID SYSTEMS ....................................................................................................... 7
17.4 BULK MUD SYSTEMS ................................................................................................................ 10
17.5 WELL CONTROL SYSTEM, CONTROL AND HANDLING .................................................... 11
17.6 WELL TEST SYSTEM ................................................................................................................. 14
Friede & Goldman, Ltd., Houston TX USA Rev. G 2
SECTION 17.0 - DRILLING SYSTEMS

17.1 GENERAL

This section provides only guidance for the delivery, installation and hook-up of the drilling systems and
equipment to be installed on the Vessel to provide a suitable drilling equipment package for the rig Builder to
satisfy the requirements of the Owner and Operator. It should be used by the drilling equipment provider in
conjunction with the other sections of this Specification that deal with specific aspects of the work such as
piping, electrical, etc. and in full compliance with the installation and selected regulatory bodies. A detailed
specification is to be developed by the Drilling Equipment Vendor (DEV) and associated contractors.

All the capacity and description of drilling equipment shall be finally defined in accordance with specification
of selected Drilling Equipment Vendor including mud and solids control system.
Any conflict between the description of drilling systemin this Specification and the final drilling equipment
including mud and solids control systemprovided by selected drilling equipment vendor, the description of the
drilling systemin the specification of selected drilling equipment vendor shall prevail.

17.2 DRILLING EQUIPMENT AND PIPE HANDLING SYSTEMS

17.2.1 Derrick

The primary purpose of the derrick is to support the weight of the string of tubulars used to drill the well and
the weight of the casing string when lining the well. The weight of the drill string is transmitted through the top
drive which, in turn, is supported by the hook / traveling block. The traveling block is raised and lowered using
the drawworks and drilling line. Casing may be run on the top drive or on the hook if the top drive can be
parked.

The derrick is a 51.8 m(170 ft.) high, and has a 12 m x 12 m (40 ft. x 40 ft.) base and 5.5 m x 5.5 m(18 ft. x 18
ft.) crown opening. The derrick, which is load-tested on installation, has a nominal hook load capacity of 750
st. (1,500,000 lbs.) with a limited setback capacity in transit field move of 181 mt. (400 kips) of pipe in
the derrick and is of a latticed structure. Cladding, which provides protection for the crew and equipment, is
installed fromthe rig floor to a level approximately 8.5 m(28 ft.) above the rig floor and at the monkey board
level, extending approximately 5,5m (18 ft.) towards the crown. A pipe racking platform is installed
approximately 27.5 m(90 ft.) above the rig floor. Two air winches are installed to facilitate the safe handling
of pipe at this level, if required. Access from the drill floor to the 90 ft. level or the crown is by means of a
ladder complete with staging platforms, safety rings and aided by a derrick climber (lad-safe type). An
emergency escape (controlled descent) device is situated at the 90 ft. level and is anchored to a safe
escape/landing area.

A casing stabbing basket is situated on the inside of the derrick. The derrick is also equipped with blocks and
tackle for auxiliary lines to and fromvarious items of equipment such as rotary tongs, man riding winches and
mud buckets, etc. All derrick mounted tackle equipment is fitted with safety straps.

The unit is equipped with a multi-sheave crown block with a maximumload rating of 750 st., a traveling block
which has seven 1.524 m(60 inch) diameter grooved sheaves and idler sheaves as required suitable for 1 3/4
diameter wire line and a load rating of 750 st. The traveling block is attached to a guide dolly which is
mounted onto the derrick installed rail system which prevents lateral movement and counteracts drilling torque.

The derrick generally will be delivered to the shipyard in its component pieces. The Builder will contract with
DEV to supply a derrick erection crew who will erect the derrick in position on the drill floor. The Builder
shall assist the derrick erection crew by furnishing the necessary labor, crane assistance, etc. to complete the
task. Builder shall furnish, build and install the foundation for the derrick to the design supplied by F&G.
Once the derrick has been erected it shall be Builders responsibility to provide all of the necessary crane
assistance, personnel, supplies, equipment and services to install the remainder of the equipment and services
into the derrick generally as directed by Drilling Equipment Supplier representatives.

17.2.2 Drawworks and Accessories

The drawworks consists primarily of a revolving drumdriven by AC motors, sufficiently sized as required for
the 750 st. hook load. The primary function of the drawworks is to draw pipe out of the well or lower pipe into
the well. The drill line is spooled onto the drumand when the direct coupled drawworks is engaged, the drum
turns and depending on the direction that it turns, either reels in the drilling line to raise the traveling block or
pays out the line to lower it.

The AC drive motors have blowers mounted on top for cooling purposes and also to maintain a positive
pressure within the motor to prevent any ingress gas, rendering thempurged / pressurized. Their cooling air
supply is taken from and exhausted to a safe area.

The drawworks is supplied drilling line that comes off the storage drum, which first passes through the deadline
anchor and is reeved between the crown of the derrick and the traveling block before being wrapped around the
drumof the drawworks a sufficient number of times to allow the block to travel the height of the derrick. Once
an adequate quantity is fed onto the drawworks drum, the drill line is secured at the deadline anchor using bolts.

Control of descent of the drawworks is primarily by the AC motors. The VFD systemis designed to provide
regenerative braking capabilities in addition to the disc braking system. The drawworks is controlled by the
drilling system, operated from the drillers or assistant drillers chair.

The drawworks is equipped with a hydraulically powered disc brake system (including a plate disc brake
system), incorporating a number of calipers, main as well as emergency. The systemis operated froma
dedicated hydraulic power pack located on the rear of the drawworks which is primarily pressured by an
electric motor/pump. The hydraulic power pack incorporates both high temperature and low fluid level alarms.
Should this electric motor/pump fail the systemhas a back-up facility in the formof an air pump and
accumulator bottles. The drawworks brakes are fail safe to set.

The drawworks' brake cooling systemconsists of fresh water, closed-loop heat exchangers complete with tank
and two circulating pumps located beneath the rig floor directly below the drawworks. Cooling water for the
heat exchangers is routed through a radiator for cooling. A flow rate, temperature, pressure, etc. monitoring
systemshall be furnished.

The drawworks control systemincludes a kinetic energy monitoring system(KEMS) which monitors and
controls the speed of lowering of the blocks in conjunction with the hook load. Should the kinetic energy
monitoring systems calculate excessive lowering speed for the weight being lowered, it will automatically
control the VFD systemto reduce the drawworks drum speed and, if necessary, apply the disc brake. In
the event of power failure to the auxiliary brake, the kinetic energy monitoring unit will apply the disc brakes.
The control systemshall also prevent collision between the crown, drill floor, auxiliary equipment in the
derrick such as pipe handling, bridge crane, etc. and the traveling block.

The Builder shall install the drawworks and all of its accessories at the locations on the drill floor and on the
foundation specified by the DEV. Builder shall satisfy himself that there is adequate clearance between the fast
line, the dead line, the derrick structure and equipment in the derrick and that there is sufficient clearance
around the drawworks to permit routine maintenance.

17.2.3 Top Drive

The purpose of the 750 st. Top Drive is to transmit rotational energy to the drill string and to allow drilling fluid
to be pumped through the drill string. The Top Drive provides the load transmission fromthe drill string to the
travelling block assembly. To reduce the overall height of the Top Drive and travelling assembly the Top
Drive shall feature a fully integrated swivel assembly and an adapter to connect to the travelling block.

The Top Drive shall be powered by one (1) AC explosion proof (IP 44) motor and the unit shall be complete
with a retractable dolly assembly to improve tripping efficiency.

Facilities shall be provided on the Top Drive to power and operate the pneumatic / hydraulic rotating type of
elevators used with automatic pipe handling systems. The Top Drive pipe handling systemshall be able to
rotate 360 deg.

The speed and torque requirements for the main Top Drive are given below.

InterimTorque: 128 kNm(94,500 ft-lb) at 0 170 rpm
Continuous Torque: 118 kNm(87,000 ft-lb) at 0 130 rpm
91 kNm(67,000 ft-lb) at 0 150 rpm
Drilling Speed: 0-260 rpm

The maximum continuous operating pressure of the drilling fluid system shall be 7,500 psi working
pressure. A 3 1/2 ID Top Drive main shaft is required and a wire line entry guide on the gooseneck shall be
provided.

Two separate Top Drive IBOP valves rated to 15,000 psi shall be provided, one manual (upper) IBOP valve
and one remote controlled (lower) IBOP valve.

Hydraulic power for the Top Drive shall be provided by the drilling hydraulic power unit. Electrical power and
other services to the Top Drive shall be provided and routed to the Top Drive via service loops. The service
loops shall be located so as to prevent visual interference between the drillers control cabin and the Top Drive.

Safe access to the Top Drive for routine servicing and maintenance shall be provided. Guards shall be provided
on the Top Drive to prevent hoist wires or tong hang off lines frombecoming entangled with the Top Drive
during its movement within the derrick.

17.2.4 Rotary Table
The rotary table supports the bushings and slips which in turn suspend the drilling and casing strings to allow
the addition or removal of tubulars. In addition, the rotary table supports the casing during running
operations. A 49 1/2 opening, 750 st. capacity rotary shall be furnished and installed. Power slips should be
installed in the rotary table as an option.
The rotary table shall be powered by a hydraulic motor to allow for controlled speed rotation of the
table. Power is to be provided to the rotary table by the drilling hydraulic power unit.
A split adapter bushing, a master bushing and insert bowls no. 1, 2 and 3 shall be included.
17.2.5 Iron Roughneck

One (1) online machine:

Max break-out torque 120,000 lb/ft
Make-up torque 100,000 lb/ft

The Online Iron Roughneck shall be able to handle tubulars from3 1/2 to 9

One (1) offline machine:

Max break-out torque 80,000 lb/ft
Make-up torque 60,000 lb/ft

The Off line Iron Roughneck shall be able to handle tubulars from3 1/2 to 9

The control for the Iron Roughneck is fromthe drillers control cabin.

17.2.6 Drillers Cabin with Instrumentation and Control Console

The Builder will supply a drillers cabin fromwhich all of the major drill floor equipment will be controlled
and in which the instrumentation and data acquisition systemthat monitors all drilling parameters, CTU, C&K,
Mud Pits, Pumps, etc. is located. The drillers cabin shall be suitable to be located in a Zone 1 hazardous area.
The cabin shall have a complete HVAC systeminstalled (powered frommain and emergency switchboards)
with fresh air to be taken froma safe area. The Builder shall install and connect this drillers cabin according to
the detailed instructions provided by the Cabin Manufacturer and under his direct supervision.

17.2.7 Instrumentation

The drillers cabin shall feature a drilling instrumentation and control system with controls for the drawworks,
top drive, pipe racking machinery, mud pumps, hydraulic power pack, brake water cooling unit, hydraulic cat
heads, etc. The instrumentation display system will obtain its information from equipment PCs/PLCs. The
displays provide output information for, but not limited to, hook load, mud pit volumes, flow rates, manifold
pressures (HP mud, C&K), pump stroke rates, conductor tensioning, etc. A slave display device shall also be
provided in the toolpushers office. Trending information shall be available on various drilling screens.

17.2.8 Bulk Tank Control System

See Section 17.4.3 for detail of Monitoring and Control System.

17.2.9 Offline Activity Crane (OAC)

The OAC shall be provided to allow for Offline Activity Crane and guidance of drill pipe stands and
BHA assemblies to the setback/fingerboard area. The OAC can also be utilized to present tubulars to well
center in preparation for pick up by the Top Drive System. The range of tubulars that the OAC can handle
safely is 12,000 pounds net, SWL. The OAC shall be equipped with spring applied, hydraulic released
brakes on cross travel, long travel and hoist drives.

17.2.10 Casing Stabbing Basket

The Builder shall install a Casing Stabbing Basket (CSB, 150 kg SWL), connect, test and prove operational.
The CSB is a telescopic armwith a personnel basket designed for offshore duty on vessels operating under
dynamic conditions. Its main purpose is to securely lift and position personnel above the drill floor to perform
work on or inspect equipment within its reach. It is operated fromthe basket or froma remote control stand
located at a site where an operator will have a proper view of the CSBs operating area. The CSB is comprised
of a steel basket, a telescopic boom, a derrick foundation with slewing bracket and a remote control panel.
Hydraulic cylinders performtilting, slewing and telescoping functions. This enables personnel in the basket to
manually assist stabbing operations or assist in inspection or maintenance of drilling equipment above the drill
floor.

17.2.11 Crown block

The crown block assembly shall have 750 st. gross capacities, and 8 ea. 152.4 cm(60) diameter sheaves
grooved for 1 3/4 drill line. Bumper blocks shall be secured under the crown sheave assembly to mitigate
damage to the sheaves in the event that the travelling block makes contact with the crown.

17.2.12 Travelling assembly

The travelling block assembly is raised and lowered by the drawworks. The capacity of the travelling block
shall be 750 st. and shall be capable of being strung with 14 parts of 1 drill line and the unit shall be
complete with a retractable dolly (Top Drive) assembly to improve tripping efficiency.

A hang off arrangement shall be provided to allow the block and Top Drive to be supported during slip and
cut operations. This hang off arrangement shall have a SWL of 80 Metric Tons.

17.2.13 Deadline anchor

The deadline anchor is used to secure the dead end of the drill line and is conveniently located on drill floor
between the drill line storage reel and the first (idler) sheave in the crown block assembly. It shall be rated to a
minimumof 120,000 lbs. using 1 3/4 drill line. The deadline anchor shall also feature a rotating type drumto
aid slip and cut operations and to reduce wear on the drill line. A load cell and a load indication display shall
be included to accommodate the drilling instrumentation.

17.2.14 Air and Hydraulic Hoists

Builder shall install and connect hoists at the following locations. Air hoists will use service air and will
operate on 8.6 bar air pressure. Hydraulic hoists will be connected to the drill floor HPU.

3 - drill floor hydraulic (one is man-riding)
4 - below drill floor 10 mt. air +2 man riding winches
2 - monkey board 500 Kg air

17.2.15 Drill String and Down Hole Equipment

The Builder shall receive all drill pipe, drill collars, tools, etc. and store them in temporary racks until the
vessel is completed and ready to receive all tubulars.

17.2.16 Additional drilling equipment

The following additional equipment shall be arranged on the drill floor area or elsewhere,

1 ea. Mathey Wireline Measuring unit
1 ea. Mud bucket c/w inserts for 2
7
/
8
to 6
5
/
8
drill pipe
2 ea. Mousehole, 45 ft. and 60 ft. long hydraulically powered
2 ea. Hydraulic catheads, remotely operated fromthe DCC
Drill line spooler, outside the drill floor
Power slips

17.2.17 Owner Furnished Drilling Equipment

This equipment will be delivered to the Shipyard during the course of the project and shall be installed by the
Builder at the locations shown on the Contract Plans or as determined by the Builder. Foundation designs for
all equipment will be provided by the Builder. The Builder shall provide all electrical and other services (fire
and gas detection, PA/GA, ESD, telephone, LAN, etc.) and connect the units to the satisfaction of the
suppliers of this third party equipment.

1 ea. Mud Logging Unit

1 lot Open Hole Well Logging Unit with Tool House

1 lot Cementing Unit and accessories. Interconnecting pipework, valves and fittings shall be
furnished and installed by the Builder.

1 lot Geology lab equipment

1 lot Satellite Communications System

1 lot Drill Pipe, Drill Collars and Heavy Weight Drill Pipe

1 lot Drill Jars

1 lot Bit Subs and Pup Joints

1 Lot Conductor Hammer

1 lot Drill Pipe and Casing Handling Tools

1 lot Fishing Tools

1 lot Multi-String Cutter

1 lot Rotating Scrapper and Stabilizer

1 lot Bit Breakers

1 lot Coring Tools

1 lot Hole Openers

1 lot Well Testing Unit and Flare Booms

17.2.18 Split Conductor Tension Unit (CTU)

The CTU control and accumulator system and split CTU / sliding panel system shall be installed in the moon
pool area of the cantilever. The foundations for the system accumulator bottles shall be provided with two
extra slots for future expansion. The CTU control system shall be installed to allow both local and remote
control/instrumentation display of the system via interface with the DCS.

The Split CTU unit shall be installed in the CTP. The installation shall include a complete hookup and
function test/simulation.

17.3 DRILLING FLUID SYSTEMS

17.3.1 Mud System General

The mud system(liquid and dry) is designed to provide a large, highly flexible storage and treatment facility
together with a high pressure systemcapable of pumping at the flow rates and pressures required for the drilling
of deep High Pressure/High Temperature wells. In addition, the systemshall be provided with the monitoring
capabilities compatible with the efficient and safe management of the mud systemand drilling operations. The
Builder furnished mud control system(pumps starts/stop, level indication, flow indication, pumps strokes, etc.)
will comprise the liquid and dry systems, the control will be fromthe drillers cabin as well as a control location
near the mud mixing hoppers.

The mud system includes, materials storage, mixing facilities, mud pits and mud pumps, both the mud system
supply and solids control system and ventilation facilities. The system components are designed and
manufactured to applicable API standard by reputable suppliers and certified fit-for-purpose by the
classification society.

The design of the system is such that the unit has the capability to keep a large amount of drilling fluid and
material on board the unit while being able to extensively build or treat different parts of the total volume. This
means that critical reserves e.g. kill mud, reserve drilling mud and cement spacers, can be prepared in advance,
this operation can be closely operated and monitored without affecting the active mud system.

The total surface capacity for liquid mud on board is 747 m (4700 bbl.), which includes eight mud pits and two
slugging pits. All active and storage pits are totally enclosed and equipped with agitators. Two (2) ea. (eight) 8
m trip tanks are mounted within the cantilever mud processing area equipped with two centrifugal pumps and
a mud level indicator readable fromthe Driller's position. The facility has the ability to isolate the trip tank
systemfromthe mud return system. In addition, a small tank (3 m) calibrated for accurate measurement of
returns during stripping operations is also located in the mud process area. The trip and stripping tanks shall
have a level indicating systemfeeding into the mud control system. There will be a flow return measuring
systemcapable of measuring all flow fromthe well back to the mud conditioning system.

For the purposes of this Specification the mud systemis divided into four sections:

High Pressure Liquid Mud System

Mud Conditioning

Mud Mixing

Mud storage and low pressure mud system

17.3.2 High Pressure Liquid Mud System

The high pressure mud and cement piping shall be connected as shown on the Contract Drawings. The
high pressure mud system is to include a 127 mm I.D. (5) high pressure discharge line from the discharge
of each mud pump to a distribution/crossover manifold. Each line to be fitted with isolation valves at the
manifold. From the manifold a single 127 mm I.D. line is to be run to one pit where it will terminate to a
shearing fixture and two 127 mm I.D. lines run to the drill floor where they will connect to the standpipe
manifold. The two 80 mm I.D. (3) cement discharge lines from the cementing package will be connected
to the cement standpipe manifold on the drill floor.

The HP mud system shall be capable of 517 bar (7500 psi) continuous rating and be fitted with 690 bar
(10,000 psi) valve bodies, dressed for 517 bars. The HP cement system and the C&K system shall be
capable of 1,035 bar (15,000 psi) working pressure and be fitted with 1,035 bar valve bodies and trim.

All HP mud system elbows or bends shall have a bend radius of 2 times the nominal pipe diameter. Elbow
bends for stand pipe goosenecks shall be a minimum of 3D bend radius. The C&K system shall only be
fitted with targeted blocks for elbows.

All API flanged ring joint connections shall have ring grooves with stainless steel inlay. Ring joint gaskets
are to be stainless steel.

Particular attention shall be given to the design of the pipe support structures for the high pressure systems
to guard against excessive deflections or vibration during dynamic system input.
The spud can jetting system shall be capable of being connected either to the HP mud pump discharge
manifold through a relief valve or direct to the sea water system.

The high pressure side of the mud systemcomprises of three triplex mud pumps which are capable of
delivering mud at up to 517.2 bar (7500 psi), dependent upon the liner size installed. The pumps can be used
individually or in parallel, dependent upon flow requirements, but the high pressure as well as the mud return
systemshall be capable of handling the maximumflow fromtwo of the three mud pumps, equipped with their
largest liners. Each pump is provided with a pressure relief valve which discharges directly back into the mud
pits and a pulsation damper to ensure smooth pump pressure delivery. The pumps will be supplied by the
DEV.

It shall be possible to stop and start the pumps from the drill floor or mud pump room. The mud pumps
take their suction from the DEV supplied charging pumps which take suction from the mud pits. The
suction manifold from the mud pits to the charging pumps shall be configured in such a manner as to allow
flexibility in selecting the mud pits to be drawn from. Each mud pump shall have a dedicated charging
pump, but the system shall allow assignment of other charge pumps (273 m/hr.). The Builder shall furnish
and install a high pressure piping system in which mud discharged from the mud pumps is pumped through
a crossover mud manifold located in the pump room and a parallel run of hard piping and high pressure
hoses (main hull to cantilever, cantilever to drill floor), which have a continuous working pressure rating of
517.2 Bar, to the stand pipe manifold on the rig floor. The stand pipe manifold shall be of the 'H' type
effectively giving two outlets which can be isolated from one another and providing greater redundancy in
the event of one failing. From the standpipe manifold, the mud flows through a DEV supplied flexible
hose to the top drive.

All pump installations, valves and related equipment that needs periodic maintenance shall be installed
taking into account ease of maintenance and appropriate lifting points and devices shall be provided by the
Builder.

The high pressure mud pumps shall be fitted with lube oil and rod oil coolers.

17.3.3 Mud Conditioning and Mixing System

The Mud Conditioning and Mixing Systems include 2 systems: the solids control system and the mud
mixing system. The mud system shall be capable of handling 2.2 sg fluids. For both these systems the
following conditions shall apply:

All centrifugal pumps may be horizontal or vertical (belt driven).
The two systems shall satisfy single point discharge requirements.
The electrical source will be 480V AC 3-phase 60 HZ.
The Pump Units shall utilize steel flex-couplings to deliver motor / pump power.
The Pump Units shall incorporate a Mechanical Seal for zero discharge compliance.
Pump & Motor Set Assemblies shall be skid mounted.
Pump seals & miscellaneous rubber components shall be suitable for use in conjunction with
Brine, Water Based Mud, Oil Based Mud and abrasive weight materials.
The Pump & Motor System shall be designed for operation within a Zone 1 area.
The Pump Units shall be self-contained and protect operators from any moving part / hazard.
The agitators shall utilize steel flex-couplings to deliver motor /agitator power.
Agitator & Motor Set Assemblies shall be skid mounted.
The Agitator & Motor System shall be designed for operation within a Zone 1 area.
The Agitator Units shall be self-contained and protect operators from any moving part / hazard.
Agitator shafts to be installed with bottom bearings (support).

17.3.3.1 Mud Conditioning

The solids control systemand equipment shall be located within the cantilever generally as shown on the
Contract Drawings and capable of handling of at least the maximum return flow from two HP mud
pumps @ 1500 gpm as a minimum. The system comprises the following equipment, all of which will be
supplied by the DEV and installed by Builder:

Gumbo removing equipment (gumbo shaker)
Mud flow divider
Shale shakers
Desander
Desander pump
Desilter
Desilter pump
Degassers
Mud cleaner (desilter mounted over one of the shale shakers)
Centrifuges (optional and 3
d
party)
Centrifuge feeding pumps (optional and 3
d
party)
Trip tank pumps (2)
Stripping tank
Cuttings dryer and cuttings handling skip and ship system(provision for space only)
2 ea. Portable 2500 cfmbug blowers.

The mud flows fromthe bit up the annulus transporting drilling cuttings fromthe bit to surface. Once on the
surface, the mud flows fromthe well bore down the flow line to a cascade shaker configuration. Firstly the
mud flows across gumbo shakers where the larger cuttings and clay balls are removed and discharged either
overboard or into skips. The underflow is then processed further across any number of the five shale shakers
located in the shale shaker house which, dependent upon the screen size installed, can remove unwanted solids
larger than 75 microns. The shaker area or shakers are enclosed to contain condensation and fumes from the
mud. Builder shall furnish and install a ducted atmospheric extraction systemthat removes the contaminated
air and exhausts it out through the deck below the BOP area.

The mud then flows from the shakers into the sand trap and then through the remaining treatment pits
where the finer solids can be removed by either centrifuging or mud cleaners. If required, the mud can be
degassed using either of the two degassers which work on a vacuum principle gas cut. Mud is pumped
through the degasser and a vacuum pump in the unit creates a low pressure condition making it easier for
the gas to 'break out' from the mud and the disengaged gas is vented up the derrick. The mud then flows
from the shaker house via the mud return ditch and is returned to the 'active pit' to be re-circulated back
through the system. The active / reserve / slugging mud pits are totally enclosed and agitators are installed.

17.3.3.2 Mud Mixing

The mixing systemis designed to take mud fromany particular mud pit, circulate it through either of two mix
lines to the mixing hoppers where bulk mud materials or chemicals can be added in order to give the mud the
required drilling properties. The mud is then returned to the same pit or an alternative pit. The systemshall be
designed in such a way that mixing and transferring can be done simultaneously.

The mix pumps (250 m/h, 100 kW) can also be used to transfer mud to the cantilever trip tank and shale
shaker tanks, cement unit and, if required, to a supply vessel through transfer hoses located at the bulk loading
stations either side of the unit.

The system comprises the following equipment, all of which will be supplied by the DEV and installed by the
Builder:

Mud mixing pumps
Base oil transfer pump
Brine transfer pump
Mud agitators
Mud guns
Mud mixer
Surge tanks
Local control panel
Liquid additive pump skid
LP shear mixer & shear pump unit
High rate mixers
Caustic mixing unit

Bulk material from the storage tanks is transferred through to the mezzanine level of the sack storage area
where there are two DEV supplied jet mix hoppers, two of which can be supplied from the two surge tanks
with bulk chemicals of these required to be added to the mud. All sack supplied material is added at the mix
ing hoppers. DEV shall furnish and Builder shall install an additional hopper facility on the main deck to
service larger sized bags that will be handled by the crane.

The DEV will provide an overall design of this systemincluding a general arrangement and foundation
drawings for the major pieces of equipment. Builder shall follow this design and the piping requirements of
Section 14 of this Specification to interconnect all of the equipment to provide a complete and working system
that meets the specifications of the DEV.

17.3.3.4 Mud storage and low pressure mud system

The low pressure mud system shall be installed as shown on the Contract Drawings.

The system includes the mud pump suctions (minimum 300 mm NB diameter), the various centrifugal
pump suction and discharge lines, the flow line, the trip tank return line, casing fill-up system and mud
mixing system. A positive means of shutting off the return line to the pits shall be fitted at the main deck.
The piping shall be laid out in such a fashion, that two mud pumps can take suction from two different mud
tank headers and send the contents to the drill floor separately.

Cleanout fittings with blank flanges shall be installed at the ends of headers and elsewhere as shown on the
system drawing. J etting lines shall be fitted in shaker header boxes; flow lines and overboard discharges as
necessary.

The low pressure mud systempiping interconnects both the mixing and conditioning systems and the low
pressure side of the primary mud pumps. The mud suction shall be capable of being taken by any mud pump
fromany mud pit, such that two different fluids can be pumped to the drill floor at once. It shall be furnished
and installed by Builder according to the Contract Plans and to the requirements of Section 14 of this
Specification so that all of the systems work together and independently as required by the DEV.

Each of the mud pits shall be interconnected through the suction pipe work and the two mixing lines and one
shearing line. Any of the three dedicated centrifugal mixing and shearing pumps shall be able to take suction
fromany pit and discharge into any pit. The lines shall go through manifolds in such a way that they provide
maximumflexibility in terms of taking suction fromand discharging to the mud pits. The entrances to the mud
pit roomshall have self-closing doors with an airlock and ventilation to create an under pressure with respect to
the adjacent rooms as per API 505.

Builder shall furnish and install mud ditches and gravity flow return troughs to carry the drilling fluids from the
well bore back to the active system. All ditches shall have circular (half round) bottoms and all ditches and
piping in the mud return systemshall have consistent slopes throughout, the maximumslope achievable is to be
used but in no case is it to be less than 40 mmper linear meter slope. Ditches in the mud process area however
may have a minimumslope of 10 mmper meter to ensure drainage of the system. Ditches shall be adequately
sized to handle the maximumflow potential of the HP pumping systemand shall have removable covers.

All mud tanks shall have supply lines fromthe sea water system, drill water system and diesel oil system.

17.4 BULK MUD SYSTEMS

17.4.1 Bulk mud materials

Bulk air and distribution lines shall be connected to the P-tanks. Each tank shall be provided with fill, vent,
compressed air and discharge connections as well as electronic load (or content) sensors and pressure
transducers. The cement discharge shall be piped to the cement surge tank located in the cement unit room
(cantilever) and the mud discharge shall be piped to the mud surge tanks located in the sack storage room.

The Builder shall furnish all pipe, flanges and fittings not directly connected to the tanks and headers, valves,
load sensors and fittings for interconnection piping at the P-tanks.

All elbow fittings shall be long sweep (min. 3D BR) 90 degrees or long sweep (min. 3D BR) 45 degrees. No
short or long radius fittings will be acceptable. Purge piping shall be provided as required for flow boost or
cleaning all sections of the systems. All piping connections to the P-tanks will be made through non load-
transferring flexible connections as required.

The installation of all piping shall avoid traps, and the final arrangement plans shall be approved by the bulk
system vendor. Access walkways and ladders shall be provided to all valves.

Bulk material (cement, barite and bentonite) is stored in eight DEV furnished bulk tanks. Each tank has two
access hatches, one top and one bottom, is each fitted with internal and external access ladders and load cells
that shall be installed into the Builder furnished and installed foundation structure by Builder. Builder shall
install the bulk tanks, hoppers and valves and fittings into a complete and working systemas shown on the
Contract Drawings.

Bulk material is transferred around the rig using compressed air that is introduced into the bulk piping system
fromthe rig air systemthrough a Builder Furnished pressure reducing station. The Builder shall furnish and
install the supply boat loading station on each side of the main deck for cement and bulk mud material systems.

Service air is supplied to the bulk system after having passed through two pressure reducing valves located
in the sack storage area, each of which is capable of handling the demands of the bulk system individually
and each can be isolated from the other. Normal system operating pressure is 2.76 Bar with the pressure
relief valve at the reducing manifold being set at 3.1 Bar. Additionally, each bulk tank is equipped with a
pressure relief valve set at 3.17 Bar which vents into a common vent line with an outlet above main deck
level. A dust collector is to be fitted to each vent line outlet.

Each bulk tank has its own fill, discharge, air supply and vent lines which are segregated fromone another by
either one or a series of pneumatically controlled valves. The fill and discharge lines can be made common
through a series of crossover valves which gives the systemgreater flexibility. The air supply lines are totally
segregated and non-return valves are installed at the inlet to each tank or at any connection into the bulk system
to prevent contamination of the air systemby bulk material. Bulk air is supplied into the bottomof each tank
through a 'spider' systemwhich both pressurizes the tank and aerates the bulk product. The load and discharge
lines have air purge lines installed to assist in the transfer of material and blowing the lines clear at the
completion of each transfer.

17.4.2 Sack material handling and storage

Mud material in package form, normally comes in sacks or drums which are stored in the sack storage area
which has a capacity of 5,000 sacks and which also incorporates a fully enclosed hazardous chemical store
located at the mezzanine level. Sack material is moved around the sack storage area with the use of a forklift
truck.

A DEV supplied dust extraction systemshall be installed by Builder at each hopper. This systemconsists of an
enclosure, closed in on three sides. Exhaust ducting from each enclosure is led to a collection receptacle.

An eyewash station and shower and personal protection equipment box is located at the mixing hopper area.

The systemshall have the ability to circulate mud fromthe mud pits through the mix hoppers and back to the
mud pits. Additionally, each mud pit shall have a high-rate mixing facility capable of adding bulk material at
up to 1,000 lbs./min directly into the mud pits.

17.4.3 Monitoring and Control System

The Bulk Systemshall be designed and installed complete with pneumatic systemfor loading, unloading,
storing, load cells and weight indicator, etc.

17.5 WELL CONTROL SYSTEM, CONTROL AND HANDLING

17.5.1 BOP Stack

Consists of one 18-
3
/
4
" BOP stack rated at 1034 bar with two double pipe preventer rams with one spool
between the pipe rams and one 689 bar annular preventer. The BOP shall have two choke and two kill outlets.
The BOP shall further be supplied with rams, as per Owners and Operators requirements, overshot, mandrels,
conductor pipe fromthe BOP to the diverter, etc. Shear rams will be required to shear 5 S-135, 38 ppf drill
pipe. The stack will be complete with all rams and packers to be used for high temperature and sour gas
applications.

One BOP test pump, fit for 20,000 psi and one 18 stack; 15,000 psi test stump shall be provided and

The Drilling Contractor (or Owner) shall verify the rating and design of the BOP stacks with the operator to
ensure that the BOP stacks will match the drilling program for the unit. The BOP vendor shall furnish all
required test stumps with mounting flanges, test pumps, controls, hoses, etc.

17.5.2 BOP Control System

Consisting of the BOP closing Unit and control manifold, 206.9 Bar WP with 3656.78 liter accumulators, 3 air
pumps, reservoir, two 25 kW electric pump, control manifold, and remote control panels, or equal according to
the latest API guidelines. The Builder shall allocate space for up to 4 banks of 15 bottles for systemexpansion.
Controls are to be provided at the closing unit, drillers cabin and toolpushers office. The BOP control unit
shall basically be based upon the BOP type selected and there shall be remote controls in the toolpushers office
and the Operators office, as well as the main control panels on the drill floor and the local controls near the
BOP control unit.

The accumulator shall be equipped with an air source from the cold start air compressor for emergency
operation. In addition, the Builder shall equip the accumulator unit with a "low accumulator pressure"
warning light and audio alarm with a secondary warning light located at the drillers console.

17.5.3 Fixed Diverter System

The diverter will consist of a Vetco-Gray KFDJ-500, Hydrill or equivalent diverter systemhousing and shall be
49 nominal ID and rated at 500 psi working pressure with integrated Control Panel and remote control
manifold with hydraulically operated valves. The systemshall be permanently installed and recessed below the
drill floor so that the 400 mm(16) , 19.05 wall thickness piping is run port and starboard fromthe diverter in
straight lines with no bends to the port and starboard extremes of the drill floor. All piping and valves shall be
adequately supported to withstand the maximumforces that will be imposed while diverting a flowing well.
The diverter configuration is to consist of: 1 x 16 flow line valve, 2 x 16 overboard line valves, 1 x 4 hole
fill up valve, 1 x 8 annulus fill valve, 1 x 3 trip tank valve, 1 x 4 diverter testing valve. Diverter accessories:

Diverter assembly
Diverter Insert Packer, Nom. 22 bore,
Diverter Insert Packer, Nom. 17-3/4 bore
Diverter Insert Packer, Nom. 10 bore,
Overshot Spool Assembly
Overshot Packer Assembly,
Overshot Mandrel Assembly
Diverter running tool

17.5.4 Choke and Kill Manifold

The Choke & Kill manifold system, 15,000 psi working pressure, consists of:

2 ea. 4
1
/
16
power choke with remote panel
2 ea. 4
1
/
16
adjustable chokes
4
1
/
16
bypass lines
2 ports for glycol injection
2 - Buffer Tanks (one 15,000 psi rated before the chokes, one 10,000 psi rated after the
chokes.
1 - Control Panel for multiple gate valves for isolation and choke line-up.
4 each, 15,000 psi WP., 3 inch ID Coflon lined, -40 F to 260 F Coflexip or equal hoses
preferred
two choke and two kill entries. Upper & Lower Choke & Kill lines.
overboard line that bypasses the chokes and buffer tanks

The choke manifold design must allow for bypass of the MGS. The Builder will supply fine read out
choke manifold gauge ranges of the 1,000 psi, 5,000 psi and 15,000 psi ranges.

17.5.5 Mud Gas Separator

The Mud Gas Separator (MGS) is connected to the choke manifold. When the mud enters the MGS, it passes
over a series of baffles which promote the gas to break out and eventually discharge up through a Builder
furnished and installed 300 NB (12) vent line extending up the derrick fromthe MGS to above the crown. The
liquid returns line taking the mud back to the surface systemcontains a 'U' tube arrangement which remains full
of mud, thus providing a liquid mud seal which forces separated gas to exit through the 300 NB vent, thus
preventing gas frommigrating downstreamto the mud processing area and ending up in the pits. To maintain
the integrity of the mud seal an additional line shall be connected to the 'U' tube to enable freshly weighted mud
to be regularly circulated through the tube. A secondary anti-syphon vent line shall be installed extending
13.75 m(45 ft.) up the derrick fromthe top of the 'U' tube. The height difference of the U tube shall be 6.0 m
(20 ft.) with a minimumdifference of 4.5 m (15 ft.).

17.5.7 BOP Handling and Service Cranes

The area between the cantilever beams and under the drill floor houses the BOP handling and storage system. .

The main BOP handling systemconsists of a rail mounted hydraulic lifting crane which is located in the BOP
area and which has the capability to move both forward and aft as well as transversely, port and starboard. The
crane is designed to facilitate the landing, disconnection and transportation of a complete BOP assembly up to a
maximumweight of 125 mt. from the well center to the test/storage skids located forward of the conductor
tensioner platform. The crane consists of vertically telescoping forks which engage a specially designed lifting
ring installed around the bottomof the annular preventer on the BOP. The unit does not have any means of
determining the load being lifted, therefore, should only be used with known weights.

Hydraulic supply to the trolley drive, bridge and six hydraulic lift cylinders on the forks is derived from the
multi-purpose hydraulic unit located on the cantilever. If hydraulic pressure is lost all functional control is lost
and its brake applied. Control of the unit is froma console located in the BOP area. The unit is only operated
when in the jacked-up mode. When in the floating mode the unit is locked in the stowed position.

Attached to the bridge crane are two 5 mt. air hoists which are controlled independently from push button
pendant control boxes. These cranes are used to service the BOP(s) once in situ.

In addition to the BOP handling system, the unit is also equipped with two (2) Ex proof electrically operated
17.5 mt. service bridge cranes which traverse the BOP test / storage area and is used for the service and
maintenance of the BOP stacks. The BOP Service Cranes can operate independently or in tandem. Control of
the crane is through a festooned, push button, pendant which allows for hoisting/lowering, trolley
forward/reverse and port/starboard operations. The block is equipped with a maximumsafety limit switch to
prevent hoisting the block into the structure.

Several devices are fitted to stop the trolley and bridge at their extreme limits of travel.

The BOP storage and deployment are configured for a two stack system, though only a single stack systemis
initially employed; the second position can be utilized for well head construction. The BOP(s) are stowed on
retractable storage skids in the test/stowage area. These skids are equipped with hydraulic rams which enable
the BOPs to be skidded longitudinally from the stowed position to the moon pool so that the BOP handling
systemcan latch and transport the BOPs to the well bore. BOP test stump(s) are permanently attached to the
skids.

17.5.8 Conductor Tensioning Unit

For deepwater operation, the unit is capable of applying a primary vertical tension to the conductor pipe up to
272.1 mt. at any position of the cantilever and substructure and up to 136 mt. secondary tension to the BOP
stack. Supported on a structural platform(Conductor Tensioner Platform) hung fromand below the cantilever,
the Conductor Tensioning Unit (CTU), consisting of four pairs of hydraulic cylinders driving a lift ring
assembly which reacts against a load collar attached to the conductor pipe to apply tension. The CTU is also
designed to slide transversely 4572 mmeither side of the hull centerline and is locked in place (in 150 mm
increments) to accommodate any drilling position within the range of the transverse drill floor movement.
Consistent and balanced load is assured by hydraulic accumulators serving opposite pairs of cylinders. Each
bank can be independently adjusted. The CTU cylinders have a maximum600 mmstroke so changes in the
length of the conductor pipe due to temperature fluctuation and lateral motion of the conductor fromwave or
current action are automatically accommodated.

Monitoring and control of the systemis through a control panel. The systemincorporates several isolation
valves, each accumulator bottle can be isolated individually and the systemcan be isolated from the power
pack.

The support platformitself is totally enclosed and can be raised and lowered vertically and secured to allow the
cantilever to be retracted all the way forward for transit mode. In order to raise and lower the platform, a
special tool attached to a length of drill pipe which is hung from the top drive and latches into the center of the
CTU base. Lateral support to the BOP is provided by four 10 mt. deck winches mounted in the corners of the
cellar deck with the wire led through fairleaders. The CTU and CTP will both be supplied by the DEV and

17.5.9 Secondary Tensioning System

The unit is equipped with a secondary tensioning system which, if it is intended, will support the weight of the
BOP stack, thus reducing stress loading on the riser.

The systemconsists of four 34 mt. x 900 mmstroke hydraulic rams which are suspended from pad eyes
mounted beneath the rotary table and attached to the BOP stack. Hydraulic power is supplied fromthe multi-
purpose hydraulic power pack. The systemalso has independent accumulators fitted.

17.6 WELL TEST SYSTEM

A fixed well test piping system shall be provided. A single high pressure (75 mm x 690 bar) (3 x 10,000 psi) line
shall be run from the drill floor to the well test area on main deck. This run will include the standpipe and
gooseneck at the drill floor, jumper hoses between drill floor / cantilever, and cantilever / main deck. The system
and all its components shall be suitable for H
2
S service.

From the well test manifold, a 150 mm x 100 bar (6 x 1500 psi) line to and 100 mm and 150 mm x 100 bar (oil and
gas) lines from a test separator position will be provided (separator to be supplied by the testing service company).
The 100 and 150 mm, 100 bar rated oil and gas test lines shall be run to a transverse distribution header along the
transom between the port and starboard burner boom locations. Sufficient valves shall be provided to allow
selective discharge between port or starboard and provide complete isolation. All connections to hoses or test area
shall be of the hammer union type. A 100 mm airline shall run port to starboard along the transom, to allow a third
party air compressor on either side of the deck, to provide air to the flaring operation. This airline shall never be
connected into the service air system.

7876 Construction Specification Rev G (Without Section 18) - 8.27.2013

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

7876 Construction Specification Rev G (Without Section 18) - 8.27.2013

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

FRIEDE AND GOLDMAN LTD

J U-2000E J ack-Up Drilling Unit

Você também pode gostar